// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.7.0) (access/Ownable.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
import "../utils/ContextUpgradeable.sol";
import "../proxy/utils/Initializable.sol";
/**
 * @dev Contract module which provides a basic access control mechanism, where
 * there is an account (an owner) that can be granted exclusive access to
 * specific functions.
 *
 * By default, the owner account will be the one that deploys the contract. This
 * can later be changed with {transferOwnership}.
 *
 * This module is used through inheritance. It will make available the modifier
 * `onlyOwner`, which can be applied to your functions to restrict their use to
 * the owner.
 */
abstract contract OwnableUpgradeable is Initializable, ContextUpgradeable {
    address private _owner;
    event OwnershipTransferred(address indexed previousOwner, address indexed newOwner);
    /**
     * @dev Initializes the contract setting the deployer as the initial owner.
     */
    function __Ownable_init() internal onlyInitializing {
        __Ownable_init_unchained();
    }
    function __Ownable_init_unchained() internal onlyInitializing {
        _transferOwnership(_msgSender());
    }
    /**
     * @dev Throws if called by any account other than the owner.
     */
    modifier onlyOwner() {
        _checkOwner();
        _;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the address of the current owner.
     */
    function owner() public view virtual returns (address) {
        return _owner;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Throws if the sender is not the owner.
     */
    function _checkOwner() internal view virtual {
        require(owner() == _msgSender(), "Ownable: caller is not the owner");
    }
    /**
     * @dev Leaves the contract without owner. It will not be possible to call
     * `onlyOwner` functions anymore. Can only be called by the current owner.
     *
     * NOTE: Renouncing ownership will leave the contract without an owner,
     * thereby removing any functionality that is only available to the owner.
     */
    function renounceOwnership() public virtual onlyOwner {
        _transferOwnership(address(0));
    }
    /**
     * @dev Transfers ownership of the contract to a new account (`newOwner`).
     * Can only be called by the current owner.
     */
    function transferOwnership(address newOwner) public virtual onlyOwner {
        require(newOwner != address(0), "Ownable: new owner is the zero address");
        _transferOwnership(newOwner);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Transfers ownership of the contract to a new account (`newOwner`).
     * Internal function without access restriction.
     */
    function _transferOwnership(address newOwner) internal virtual {
        address oldOwner = _owner;
        _owner = newOwner;
        emit OwnershipTransferred(oldOwner, newOwner);
    }
    /**
     * @dev This empty reserved space is put in place to allow future versions to add new
     * variables without shifting down storage in the inheritance chain.
     * See https://docs.openzeppelin.com/contracts/4.x/upgradeable#storage_gaps
     */
    uint256[49] private __gap;
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.8.0) (finance/PaymentSplitter.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
import "../token/ERC20/utils/SafeERC20Upgradeable.sol";
import "../utils/AddressUpgradeable.sol";
import "../utils/ContextUpgradeable.sol";
import "../proxy/utils/Initializable.sol";
/**
 * @title PaymentSplitter
 * @dev This contract allows to split Ether payments among a group of accounts. The sender does not need to be aware
 * that the Ether will be split in this way, since it is handled transparently by the contract.
 *
 * The split can be in equal parts or in any other arbitrary proportion. The way this is specified is by assigning each
 * account to a number of shares. Of all the Ether that this contract receives, each account will then be able to claim
 * an amount proportional to the percentage of total shares they were assigned. The distribution of shares is set at the
 * time of contract deployment and can't be updated thereafter.
 *
 * `PaymentSplitter` follows a _pull payment_ model. This means that payments are not automatically forwarded to the
 * accounts but kept in this contract, and the actual transfer is triggered as a separate step by calling the {release}
 * function.
 *
 * NOTE: This contract assumes that ERC20 tokens will behave similarly to native tokens (Ether). Rebasing tokens, and
 * tokens that apply fees during transfers, are likely to not be supported as expected. If in doubt, we encourage you
 * to run tests before sending real value to this contract.
 */
contract PaymentSplitterUpgradeable is Initializable, ContextUpgradeable {
    event PayeeAdded(address account, uint256 shares);
    event PaymentReleased(address to, uint256 amount);
    event ERC20PaymentReleased(IERC20Upgradeable indexed token, address to, uint256 amount);
    event PaymentReceived(address from, uint256 amount);
    uint256 private _totalShares;
    uint256 private _totalReleased;
    mapping(address => uint256) private _shares;
    mapping(address => uint256) private _released;
    address[] private _payees;
    mapping(IERC20Upgradeable => uint256) private _erc20TotalReleased;
    mapping(IERC20Upgradeable => mapping(address => uint256)) private _erc20Released;
    /**
     * @dev Creates an instance of `PaymentSplitter` where each account in `payees` is assigned the number of shares at
     * the matching position in the `shares` array.
     *
     * All addresses in `payees` must be non-zero. Both arrays must have the same non-zero length, and there must be no
     * duplicates in `payees`.
     */
    function __PaymentSplitter_init(address[] memory payees, uint256[] memory shares_) internal onlyInitializing {
        __PaymentSplitter_init_unchained(payees, shares_);
    }
    function __PaymentSplitter_init_unchained(address[] memory payees, uint256[] memory shares_) internal onlyInitializing {
        require(payees.length == shares_.length, "PaymentSplitter: payees and shares length mismatch");
        require(payees.length > 0, "PaymentSplitter: no payees");
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < payees.length; i++) {
            _addPayee(payees[i], shares_[i]);
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev The Ether received will be logged with {PaymentReceived} events. Note that these events are not fully
     * reliable: it's possible for a contract to receive Ether without triggering this function. This only affects the
     * reliability of the events, and not the actual splitting of Ether.
     *
     * To learn more about this see the Solidity documentation for
     * https://solidity.readthedocs.io/en/latest/contracts.html#fallback-function[fallback
     * functions].
     */
    receive() external payable virtual {
        emit PaymentReceived(_msgSender(), msg.value);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Getter for the total shares held by payees.
     */
    function totalShares() public view returns (uint256) {
        return _totalShares;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Getter for the total amount of Ether already released.
     */
    function totalReleased() public view returns (uint256) {
        return _totalReleased;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Getter for the total amount of `token` already released. `token` should be the address of an IERC20
     * contract.
     */
    function totalReleased(IERC20Upgradeable token) public view returns (uint256) {
        return _erc20TotalReleased[token];
    }
    /**
     * @dev Getter for the amount of shares held by an account.
     */
    function shares(address account) public view returns (uint256) {
        return _shares[account];
    }
    /**
     * @dev Getter for the amount of Ether already released to a payee.
     */
    function released(address account) public view returns (uint256) {
        return _released[account];
    }
    /**
     * @dev Getter for the amount of `token` tokens already released to a payee. `token` should be the address of an
     * IERC20 contract.
     */
    function released(IERC20Upgradeable token, address account) public view returns (uint256) {
        return _erc20Released[token][account];
    }
    /**
     * @dev Getter for the address of the payee number `index`.
     */
    function payee(uint256 index) public view returns (address) {
        return _payees[index];
    }
    /**
     * @dev Getter for the amount of payee's releasable Ether.
     */
    function releasable(address account) public view returns (uint256) {
        uint256 totalReceived = address(this).balance + totalReleased();
        return _pendingPayment(account, totalReceived, released(account));
    }
    /**
     * @dev Getter for the amount of payee's releasable `token` tokens. `token` should be the address of an
     * IERC20 contract.
     */
    function releasable(IERC20Upgradeable token, address account) public view returns (uint256) {
        uint256 totalReceived = token.balanceOf(address(this)) + totalReleased(token);
        return _pendingPayment(account, totalReceived, released(token, account));
    }
    /**
     * @dev Triggers a transfer to `account` of the amount of Ether they are owed, according to their percentage of the
     * total shares and their previous withdrawals.
     */
    function release(address payable account) public virtual {
        require(_shares[account] > 0, "PaymentSplitter: account has no shares");
        uint256 payment = releasable(account);
        require(payment != 0, "PaymentSplitter: account is not due payment");
        // _totalReleased is the sum of all values in _released.
        // If "_totalReleased += payment" does not overflow, then "_released[account] += payment" cannot overflow.
        _totalReleased += payment;
        unchecked {
            _released[account] += payment;
        }
        AddressUpgradeable.sendValue(account, payment);
        emit PaymentReleased(account, payment);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Triggers a transfer to `account` of the amount of `token` tokens they are owed, according to their
     * percentage of the total shares and their previous withdrawals. `token` must be the address of an IERC20
     * contract.
     */
    function release(IERC20Upgradeable token, address account) public virtual {
        require(_shares[account] > 0, "PaymentSplitter: account has no shares");
        uint256 payment = releasable(token, account);
        require(payment != 0, "PaymentSplitter: account is not due payment");
        // _erc20TotalReleased[token] is the sum of all values in _erc20Released[token].
        // If "_erc20TotalReleased[token] += payment" does not overflow, then "_erc20Released[token][account] += payment"
        // cannot overflow.
        _erc20TotalReleased[token] += payment;
        unchecked {
            _erc20Released[token][account] += payment;
        }
        SafeERC20Upgradeable.safeTransfer(token, account, payment);
        emit ERC20PaymentReleased(token, account, payment);
    }
    /**
     * @dev internal logic for computing the pending payment of an `account` given the token historical balances and
     * already released amounts.
     */
    function _pendingPayment(
        address account,
        uint256 totalReceived,
        uint256 alreadyReleased
    ) private view returns (uint256) {
        return (totalReceived * _shares[account]) / _totalShares - alreadyReleased;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Add a new payee to the contract.
     * @param account The address of the payee to add.
     * @param shares_ The number of shares owned by the payee.
     */
    function _addPayee(address account, uint256 shares_) private {
        require(account != address(0), "PaymentSplitter: account is the zero address");
        require(shares_ > 0, "PaymentSplitter: shares are 0");
        require(_shares[account] == 0, "PaymentSplitter: account already has shares");
        _payees.push(account);
        _shares[account] = shares_;
        _totalShares = _totalShares + shares_;
        emit PayeeAdded(account, shares_);
    }
    /**
     * @dev This empty reserved space is put in place to allow future versions to add new
     * variables without shifting down storage in the inheritance chain.
     * See https://docs.openzeppelin.com/contracts/4.x/upgradeable#storage_gaps
     */
    uint256[43] private __gap;
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.6.0) (interfaces/IERC2981.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
import "../utils/introspection/IERC165Upgradeable.sol";
/**
 * @dev Interface for the NFT Royalty Standard.
 *
 * A standardized way to retrieve royalty payment information for non-fungible tokens (NFTs) to enable universal
 * support for royalty payments across all NFT marketplaces and ecosystem participants.
 *
 * _Available since v4.5._
 */
interface IERC2981Upgradeable is IERC165Upgradeable {
    /**
     * @dev Returns how much royalty is owed and to whom, based on a sale price that may be denominated in any unit of
     * exchange. The royalty amount is denominated and should be paid in that same unit of exchange.
     */
    function royaltyInfo(uint256 tokenId, uint256 salePrice)
        external
        view
        returns (address receiver, uint256 royaltyAmount);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.8.0) (proxy/utils/Initializable.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.2;
import "../../utils/AddressUpgradeable.sol";
/**
 * @dev This is a base contract to aid in writing upgradeable contracts, or any kind of contract that will be deployed
 * behind a proxy. Since proxied contracts do not make use of a constructor, it's common to move constructor logic to an
 * external initializer function, usually called `initialize`. It then becomes necessary to protect this initializer
 * function so it can only be called once. The {initializer} modifier provided by this contract will have this effect.
 *
 * The initialization functions use a version number. Once a version number is used, it is consumed and cannot be
 * reused. This mechanism prevents re-execution of each "step" but allows the creation of new initialization steps in
 * case an upgrade adds a module that needs to be initialized.
 *
 * For example:
 *
 * [.hljs-theme-light.nopadding]
 * ```
 * contract MyToken is ERC20Upgradeable {
 *     function initialize() initializer public {
 *         __ERC20_init("MyToken", "MTK");
 *     }
 * }
 * contract MyTokenV2 is MyToken, ERC20PermitUpgradeable {
 *     function initializeV2() reinitializer(2) public {
 *         __ERC20Permit_init("MyToken");
 *     }
 * }
 * ```
 *
 * TIP: To avoid leaving the proxy in an uninitialized state, the initializer function should be called as early as
 * possible by providing the encoded function call as the `_data` argument to {ERC1967Proxy-constructor}.
 *
 * CAUTION: When used with inheritance, manual care must be taken to not invoke a parent initializer twice, or to ensure
 * that all initializers are idempotent. This is not verified automatically as constructors are by Solidity.
 *
 * [CAUTION]
 * ====
 * Avoid leaving a contract uninitialized.
 *
 * An uninitialized contract can be taken over by an attacker. This applies to both a proxy and its implementation
 * contract, which may impact the proxy. To prevent the implementation contract from being used, you should invoke
 * the {_disableInitializers} function in the constructor to automatically lock it when it is deployed:
 *
 * [.hljs-theme-light.nopadding]
 * ```
 * /// @custom:oz-upgrades-unsafe-allow constructor
 * constructor() {
 *     _disableInitializers();
 * }
 * ```
 * ====
 */
abstract contract Initializable {
    /**
     * @dev Indicates that the contract has been initialized.
     * @custom:oz-retyped-from bool
     */
    uint8 private _initialized;
    /**
     * @dev Indicates that the contract is in the process of being initialized.
     */
    bool private _initializing;
    /**
     * @dev Triggered when the contract has been initialized or reinitialized.
     */
    event Initialized(uint8 version);
    /**
     * @dev A modifier that defines a protected initializer function that can be invoked at most once. In its scope,
     * `onlyInitializing` functions can be used to initialize parent contracts.
     *
     * Similar to `reinitializer(1)`, except that functions marked with `initializer` can be nested in the context of a
     * constructor.
     *
     * Emits an {Initialized} event.
     */
    modifier initializer() {
        bool isTopLevelCall = !_initializing;
        require(
            (isTopLevelCall && _initialized < 1) || (!AddressUpgradeable.isContract(address(this)) && _initialized == 1),
            "Initializable: contract is already initialized"
        );
        _initialized = 1;
        if (isTopLevelCall) {
            _initializing = true;
        }
        _;
        if (isTopLevelCall) {
            _initializing = false;
            emit Initialized(1);
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev A modifier that defines a protected reinitializer function that can be invoked at most once, and only if the
     * contract hasn't been initialized to a greater version before. In its scope, `onlyInitializing` functions can be
     * used to initialize parent contracts.
     *
     * A reinitializer may be used after the original initialization step. This is essential to configure modules that
     * are added through upgrades and that require initialization.
     *
     * When `version` is 1, this modifier is similar to `initializer`, except that functions marked with `reinitializer`
     * cannot be nested. If one is invoked in the context of another, execution will revert.
     *
     * Note that versions can jump in increments greater than 1; this implies that if multiple reinitializers coexist in
     * a contract, executing them in the right order is up to the developer or operator.
     *
     * WARNING: setting the version to 255 will prevent any future reinitialization.
     *
     * Emits an {Initialized} event.
     */
    modifier reinitializer(uint8 version) {
        require(!_initializing && _initialized < version, "Initializable: contract is already initialized");
        _initialized = version;
        _initializing = true;
        _;
        _initializing = false;
        emit Initialized(version);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Modifier to protect an initialization function so that it can only be invoked by functions with the
     * {initializer} and {reinitializer} modifiers, directly or indirectly.
     */
    modifier onlyInitializing() {
        require(_initializing, "Initializable: contract is not initializing");
        _;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Locks the contract, preventing any future reinitialization. This cannot be part of an initializer call.
     * Calling this in the constructor of a contract will prevent that contract from being initialized or reinitialized
     * to any version. It is recommended to use this to lock implementation contracts that are designed to be called
     * through proxies.
     *
     * Emits an {Initialized} event the first time it is successfully executed.
     */
    function _disableInitializers() internal virtual {
        require(!_initializing, "Initializable: contract is initializing");
        if (_initialized < type(uint8).max) {
            _initialized = type(uint8).max;
            emit Initialized(type(uint8).max);
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Internal function that returns the initialized version. Returns `_initialized`
     */
    function _getInitializedVersion() internal view returns (uint8) {
        return _initialized;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Internal function that returns the initialized version. Returns `_initializing`
     */
    function _isInitializing() internal view returns (bool) {
        return _initializing;
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.7.0) (token/common/ERC2981.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
import "../../interfaces/IERC2981Upgradeable.sol";
import "../../utils/introspection/ERC165Upgradeable.sol";
import "../../proxy/utils/Initializable.sol";
/**
 * @dev Implementation of the NFT Royalty Standard, a standardized way to retrieve royalty payment information.
 *
 * Royalty information can be specified globally for all token ids via {_setDefaultRoyalty}, and/or individually for
 * specific token ids via {_setTokenRoyalty}. The latter takes precedence over the first.
 *
 * Royalty is specified as a fraction of sale price. {_feeDenominator} is overridable but defaults to 10000, meaning the
 * fee is specified in basis points by default.
 *
 * IMPORTANT: ERC-2981 only specifies a way to signal royalty information and does not enforce its payment. See
 * https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-2981#optional-royalty-payments[Rationale] in the EIP. Marketplaces are expected to
 * voluntarily pay royalties together with sales, but note that this standard is not yet widely supported.
 *
 * _Available since v4.5._
 */
abstract contract ERC2981Upgradeable is Initializable, IERC2981Upgradeable, ERC165Upgradeable {
    function __ERC2981_init() internal onlyInitializing {
    }
    function __ERC2981_init_unchained() internal onlyInitializing {
    }
    struct RoyaltyInfo {
        address receiver;
        uint96 royaltyFraction;
    }
    RoyaltyInfo private _defaultRoyaltyInfo;
    mapping(uint256 => RoyaltyInfo) private _tokenRoyaltyInfo;
    /**
     * @dev See {IERC165-supportsInterface}.
     */
    function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId) public view virtual override(IERC165Upgradeable, ERC165Upgradeable) returns (bool) {
        return interfaceId == type(IERC2981Upgradeable).interfaceId || super.supportsInterface(interfaceId);
    }
    /**
     * @inheritdoc IERC2981Upgradeable
     */
    function royaltyInfo(uint256 _tokenId, uint256 _salePrice) public view virtual override returns (address, uint256) {
        RoyaltyInfo memory royalty = _tokenRoyaltyInfo[_tokenId];
        if (royalty.receiver == address(0)) {
            royalty = _defaultRoyaltyInfo;
        }
        uint256 royaltyAmount = (_salePrice * royalty.royaltyFraction) / _feeDenominator();
        return (royalty.receiver, royaltyAmount);
    }
    /**
     * @dev The denominator with which to interpret the fee set in {_setTokenRoyalty} and {_setDefaultRoyalty} as a
     * fraction of the sale price. Defaults to 10000 so fees are expressed in basis points, but may be customized by an
     * override.
     */
    function _feeDenominator() internal pure virtual returns (uint96) {
        return 10000;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Sets the royalty information that all ids in this contract will default to.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `receiver` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `feeNumerator` cannot be greater than the fee denominator.
     */
    function _setDefaultRoyalty(address receiver, uint96 feeNumerator) internal virtual {
        require(feeNumerator <= _feeDenominator(), "ERC2981: royalty fee will exceed salePrice");
        require(receiver != address(0), "ERC2981: invalid receiver");
        _defaultRoyaltyInfo = RoyaltyInfo(receiver, feeNumerator);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Removes default royalty information.
     */
    function _deleteDefaultRoyalty() internal virtual {
        delete _defaultRoyaltyInfo;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Sets the royalty information for a specific token id, overriding the global default.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `receiver` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `feeNumerator` cannot be greater than the fee denominator.
     */
    function _setTokenRoyalty(
        uint256 tokenId,
        address receiver,
        uint96 feeNumerator
    ) internal virtual {
        require(feeNumerator <= _feeDenominator(), "ERC2981: royalty fee will exceed salePrice");
        require(receiver != address(0), "ERC2981: Invalid parameters");
        _tokenRoyaltyInfo[tokenId] = RoyaltyInfo(receiver, feeNumerator);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Resets royalty information for the token id back to the global default.
     */
    function _resetTokenRoyalty(uint256 tokenId) internal virtual {
        delete _tokenRoyaltyInfo[tokenId];
    }
    /**
     * @dev This empty reserved space is put in place to allow future versions to add new
     * variables without shifting down storage in the inheritance chain.
     * See https://docs.openzeppelin.com/contracts/4.x/upgradeable#storage_gaps
     */
    uint256[48] private __gap;
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.8.0) (token/ERC1155/ERC1155.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
import "./IERC1155Upgradeable.sol";
import "./IERC1155ReceiverUpgradeable.sol";
import "./extensions/IERC1155MetadataURIUpgradeable.sol";
import "../../utils/AddressUpgradeable.sol";
import "../../utils/ContextUpgradeable.sol";
import "../../utils/introspection/ERC165Upgradeable.sol";
import "../../proxy/utils/Initializable.sol";
/**
 * @dev Implementation of the basic standard multi-token.
 * See https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-1155
 * Originally based on code by Enjin: https://github.com/enjin/erc-1155
 *
 * _Available since v3.1._
 */
contract ERC1155Upgradeable is Initializable, ContextUpgradeable, ERC165Upgradeable, IERC1155Upgradeable, IERC1155MetadataURIUpgradeable {
    using AddressUpgradeable for address;
    // Mapping from token ID to account balances
    mapping(uint256 => mapping(address => uint256)) private _balances;
    // Mapping from account to operator approvals
    mapping(address => mapping(address => bool)) private _operatorApprovals;
    // Used as the URI for all token types by relying on ID substitution, e.g. https://token-cdn-domain/{id}.json
    string private _uri;
    /**
     * @dev See {_setURI}.
     */
    function __ERC1155_init(string memory uri_) internal onlyInitializing {
        __ERC1155_init_unchained(uri_);
    }
    function __ERC1155_init_unchained(string memory uri_) internal onlyInitializing {
        _setURI(uri_);
    }
    /**
     * @dev See {IERC165-supportsInterface}.
     */
    function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId) public view virtual override(ERC165Upgradeable, IERC165Upgradeable) returns (bool) {
        return
            interfaceId == type(IERC1155Upgradeable).interfaceId ||
            interfaceId == type(IERC1155MetadataURIUpgradeable).interfaceId ||
            super.supportsInterface(interfaceId);
    }
    /**
     * @dev See {IERC1155MetadataURI-uri}.
     *
     * This implementation returns the same URI for *all* token types. It relies
     * on the token type ID substitution mechanism
     * https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-1155#metadata[defined in the EIP].
     *
     * Clients calling this function must replace the `\\{id\\}` substring with the
     * actual token type ID.
     */
    function uri(uint256) public view virtual override returns (string memory) {
        return _uri;
    }
    /**
     * @dev See {IERC1155-balanceOf}.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `account` cannot be the zero address.
     */
    function balanceOf(address account, uint256 id) public view virtual override returns (uint256) {
        require(account != address(0), "ERC1155: address zero is not a valid owner");
        return _balances[id][account];
    }
    /**
     * @dev See {IERC1155-balanceOfBatch}.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `accounts` and `ids` must have the same length.
     */
    function balanceOfBatch(address[] memory accounts, uint256[] memory ids)
        public
        view
        virtual
        override
        returns (uint256[] memory)
    {
        require(accounts.length == ids.length, "ERC1155: accounts and ids length mismatch");
        uint256[] memory batchBalances = new uint256[](accounts.length);
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < accounts.length; ++i) {
            batchBalances[i] = balanceOf(accounts[i], ids[i]);
        }
        return batchBalances;
    }
    /**
     * @dev See {IERC1155-setApprovalForAll}.
     */
    function setApprovalForAll(address operator, bool approved) public virtual override {
        _setApprovalForAll(_msgSender(), operator, approved);
    }
    /**
     * @dev See {IERC1155-isApprovedForAll}.
     */
    function isApprovedForAll(address account, address operator) public view virtual override returns (bool) {
        return _operatorApprovals[account][operator];
    }
    /**
     * @dev See {IERC1155-safeTransferFrom}.
     */
    function safeTransferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 id,
        uint256 amount,
        bytes memory data
    ) public virtual override {
        require(
            from == _msgSender() || isApprovedForAll(from, _msgSender()),
            "ERC1155: caller is not token owner or approved"
        );
        _safeTransferFrom(from, to, id, amount, data);
    }
    /**
     * @dev See {IERC1155-safeBatchTransferFrom}.
     */
    function safeBatchTransferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256[] memory ids,
        uint256[] memory amounts,
        bytes memory data
    ) public virtual override {
        require(
            from == _msgSender() || isApprovedForAll(from, _msgSender()),
            "ERC1155: caller is not token owner or approved"
        );
        _safeBatchTransferFrom(from, to, ids, amounts, data);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Transfers `amount` tokens of token type `id` from `from` to `to`.
     *
     * Emits a {TransferSingle} event.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `from` must have a balance of tokens of type `id` of at least `amount`.
     * - If `to` refers to a smart contract, it must implement {IERC1155Receiver-onERC1155Received} and return the
     * acceptance magic value.
     */
    function _safeTransferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 id,
        uint256 amount,
        bytes memory data
    ) internal virtual {
        require(to != address(0), "ERC1155: transfer to the zero address");
        address operator = _msgSender();
        uint256[] memory ids = _asSingletonArray(id);
        uint256[] memory amounts = _asSingletonArray(amount);
        _beforeTokenTransfer(operator, from, to, ids, amounts, data);
        uint256 fromBalance = _balances[id][from];
        require(fromBalance >= amount, "ERC1155: insufficient balance for transfer");
        unchecked {
            _balances[id][from] = fromBalance - amount;
        }
        _balances[id][to] += amount;
        emit TransferSingle(operator, from, to, id, amount);
        _afterTokenTransfer(operator, from, to, ids, amounts, data);
        _doSafeTransferAcceptanceCheck(operator, from, to, id, amount, data);
    }
    /**
     * @dev xref:ROOT:erc1155.adoc#batch-operations[Batched] version of {_safeTransferFrom}.
     *
     * Emits a {TransferBatch} event.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - If `to` refers to a smart contract, it must implement {IERC1155Receiver-onERC1155BatchReceived} and return the
     * acceptance magic value.
     */
    function _safeBatchTransferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256[] memory ids,
        uint256[] memory amounts,
        bytes memory data
    ) internal virtual {
        require(ids.length == amounts.length, "ERC1155: ids and amounts length mismatch");
        require(to != address(0), "ERC1155: transfer to the zero address");
        address operator = _msgSender();
        _beforeTokenTransfer(operator, from, to, ids, amounts, data);
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < ids.length; ++i) {
            uint256 id = ids[i];
            uint256 amount = amounts[i];
            uint256 fromBalance = _balances[id][from];
            require(fromBalance >= amount, "ERC1155: insufficient balance for transfer");
            unchecked {
                _balances[id][from] = fromBalance - amount;
            }
            _balances[id][to] += amount;
        }
        emit TransferBatch(operator, from, to, ids, amounts);
        _afterTokenTransfer(operator, from, to, ids, amounts, data);
        _doSafeBatchTransferAcceptanceCheck(operator, from, to, ids, amounts, data);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Sets a new URI for all token types, by relying on the token type ID
     * substitution mechanism
     * https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-1155#metadata[defined in the EIP].
     *
     * By this mechanism, any occurrence of the `\\{id\\}` substring in either the
     * URI or any of the amounts in the JSON file at said URI will be replaced by
     * clients with the token type ID.
     *
     * For example, the `https://token-cdn-domain/\\{id\\}.json` URI would be
     * interpreted by clients as
     * `https://token-cdn-domain/000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000004cce0.json`
     * for token type ID 0x4cce0.
     *
     * See {uri}.
     *
     * Because these URIs cannot be meaningfully represented by the {URI} event,
     * this function emits no events.
     */
    function _setURI(string memory newuri) internal virtual {
        _uri = newuri;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Creates `amount` tokens of token type `id`, and assigns them to `to`.
     *
     * Emits a {TransferSingle} event.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
     * - If `to` refers to a smart contract, it must implement {IERC1155Receiver-onERC1155Received} and return the
     * acceptance magic value.
     */
    function _mint(
        address to,
        uint256 id,
        uint256 amount,
        bytes memory data
    ) internal virtual {
        require(to != address(0), "ERC1155: mint to the zero address");
        address operator = _msgSender();
        uint256[] memory ids = _asSingletonArray(id);
        uint256[] memory amounts = _asSingletonArray(amount);
        _beforeTokenTransfer(operator, address(0), to, ids, amounts, data);
        _balances[id][to] += amount;
        emit TransferSingle(operator, address(0), to, id, amount);
        _afterTokenTransfer(operator, address(0), to, ids, amounts, data);
        _doSafeTransferAcceptanceCheck(operator, address(0), to, id, amount, data);
    }
    /**
     * @dev xref:ROOT:erc1155.adoc#batch-operations[Batched] version of {_mint}.
     *
     * Emits a {TransferBatch} event.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `ids` and `amounts` must have the same length.
     * - If `to` refers to a smart contract, it must implement {IERC1155Receiver-onERC1155BatchReceived} and return the
     * acceptance magic value.
     */
    function _mintBatch(
        address to,
        uint256[] memory ids,
        uint256[] memory amounts,
        bytes memory data
    ) internal virtual {
        require(to != address(0), "ERC1155: mint to the zero address");
        require(ids.length == amounts.length, "ERC1155: ids and amounts length mismatch");
        address operator = _msgSender();
        _beforeTokenTransfer(operator, address(0), to, ids, amounts, data);
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < ids.length; i++) {
            _balances[ids[i]][to] += amounts[i];
        }
        emit TransferBatch(operator, address(0), to, ids, amounts);
        _afterTokenTransfer(operator, address(0), to, ids, amounts, data);
        _doSafeBatchTransferAcceptanceCheck(operator, address(0), to, ids, amounts, data);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Destroys `amount` tokens of token type `id` from `from`
     *
     * Emits a {TransferSingle} event.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `from` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `from` must have at least `amount` tokens of token type `id`.
     */
    function _burn(
        address from,
        uint256 id,
        uint256 amount
    ) internal virtual {
        require(from != address(0), "ERC1155: burn from the zero address");
        address operator = _msgSender();
        uint256[] memory ids = _asSingletonArray(id);
        uint256[] memory amounts = _asSingletonArray(amount);
        _beforeTokenTransfer(operator, from, address(0), ids, amounts, "");
        uint256 fromBalance = _balances[id][from];
        require(fromBalance >= amount, "ERC1155: burn amount exceeds balance");
        unchecked {
            _balances[id][from] = fromBalance - amount;
        }
        emit TransferSingle(operator, from, address(0), id, amount);
        _afterTokenTransfer(operator, from, address(0), ids, amounts, "");
    }
    /**
     * @dev xref:ROOT:erc1155.adoc#batch-operations[Batched] version of {_burn}.
     *
     * Emits a {TransferBatch} event.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `ids` and `amounts` must have the same length.
     */
    function _burnBatch(
        address from,
        uint256[] memory ids,
        uint256[] memory amounts
    ) internal virtual {
        require(from != address(0), "ERC1155: burn from the zero address");
        require(ids.length == amounts.length, "ERC1155: ids and amounts length mismatch");
        address operator = _msgSender();
        _beforeTokenTransfer(operator, from, address(0), ids, amounts, "");
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < ids.length; i++) {
            uint256 id = ids[i];
            uint256 amount = amounts[i];
            uint256 fromBalance = _balances[id][from];
            require(fromBalance >= amount, "ERC1155: burn amount exceeds balance");
            unchecked {
                _balances[id][from] = fromBalance - amount;
            }
        }
        emit TransferBatch(operator, from, address(0), ids, amounts);
        _afterTokenTransfer(operator, from, address(0), ids, amounts, "");
    }
    /**
     * @dev Approve `operator` to operate on all of `owner` tokens
     *
     * Emits an {ApprovalForAll} event.
     */
    function _setApprovalForAll(
        address owner,
        address operator,
        bool approved
    ) internal virtual {
        require(owner != operator, "ERC1155: setting approval status for self");
        _operatorApprovals[owner][operator] = approved;
        emit ApprovalForAll(owner, operator, approved);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Hook that is called before any token transfer. This includes minting
     * and burning, as well as batched variants.
     *
     * The same hook is called on both single and batched variants. For single
     * transfers, the length of the `ids` and `amounts` arrays will be 1.
     *
     * Calling conditions (for each `id` and `amount` pair):
     *
     * - When `from` and `to` are both non-zero, `amount` of ``from``'s tokens
     * of token type `id` will be  transferred to `to`.
     * - When `from` is zero, `amount` tokens of token type `id` will be minted
     * for `to`.
     * - when `to` is zero, `amount` of ``from``'s tokens of token type `id`
     * will be burned.
     * - `from` and `to` are never both zero.
     * - `ids` and `amounts` have the same, non-zero length.
     *
     * To learn more about hooks, head to xref:ROOT:extending-contracts.adoc#using-hooks[Using Hooks].
     */
    function _beforeTokenTransfer(
        address operator,
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256[] memory ids,
        uint256[] memory amounts,
        bytes memory data
    ) internal virtual {}
    /**
     * @dev Hook that is called after any token transfer. This includes minting
     * and burning, as well as batched variants.
     *
     * The same hook is called on both single and batched variants. For single
     * transfers, the length of the `id` and `amount` arrays will be 1.
     *
     * Calling conditions (for each `id` and `amount` pair):
     *
     * - When `from` and `to` are both non-zero, `amount` of ``from``'s tokens
     * of token type `id` will be  transferred to `to`.
     * - When `from` is zero, `amount` tokens of token type `id` will be minted
     * for `to`.
     * - when `to` is zero, `amount` of ``from``'s tokens of token type `id`
     * will be burned.
     * - `from` and `to` are never both zero.
     * - `ids` and `amounts` have the same, non-zero length.
     *
     * To learn more about hooks, head to xref:ROOT:extending-contracts.adoc#using-hooks[Using Hooks].
     */
    function _afterTokenTransfer(
        address operator,
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256[] memory ids,
        uint256[] memory amounts,
        bytes memory data
    ) internal virtual {}
    function _doSafeTransferAcceptanceCheck(
        address operator,
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 id,
        uint256 amount,
        bytes memory data
    ) private {
        if (to.isContract()) {
            try IERC1155ReceiverUpgradeable(to).onERC1155Received(operator, from, id, amount, data) returns (bytes4 response) {
                if (response != IERC1155ReceiverUpgradeable.onERC1155Received.selector) {
                    revert("ERC1155: ERC1155Receiver rejected tokens");
                }
            } catch Error(string memory reason) {
                revert(reason);
            } catch {
                revert("ERC1155: transfer to non-ERC1155Receiver implementer");
            }
        }
    }
    function _doSafeBatchTransferAcceptanceCheck(
        address operator,
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256[] memory ids,
        uint256[] memory amounts,
        bytes memory data
    ) private {
        if (to.isContract()) {
            try IERC1155ReceiverUpgradeable(to).onERC1155BatchReceived(operator, from, ids, amounts, data) returns (
                bytes4 response
            ) {
                if (response != IERC1155ReceiverUpgradeable.onERC1155BatchReceived.selector) {
                    revert("ERC1155: ERC1155Receiver rejected tokens");
                }
            } catch Error(string memory reason) {
                revert(reason);
            } catch {
                revert("ERC1155: transfer to non-ERC1155Receiver implementer");
            }
        }
    }
    function _asSingletonArray(uint256 element) private pure returns (uint256[] memory) {
        uint256[] memory array = new uint256[](1);
        array[0] = element;
        return array;
    }
    /**
     * @dev This empty reserved space is put in place to allow future versions to add new
     * variables without shifting down storage in the inheritance chain.
     * See https://docs.openzeppelin.com/contracts/4.x/upgradeable#storage_gaps
     */
    uint256[47] private __gap;
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.6.0) (token/ERC1155/extensions/ERC1155Supply.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
import "../ERC1155Upgradeable.sol";
import "../../../proxy/utils/Initializable.sol";
/**
 * @dev Extension of ERC1155 that adds tracking of total supply per id.
 *
 * Useful for scenarios where Fungible and Non-fungible tokens have to be
 * clearly identified. Note: While a totalSupply of 1 might mean the
 * corresponding is an NFT, there is no guarantees that no other token with the
 * same id are not going to be minted.
 */
abstract contract ERC1155SupplyUpgradeable is Initializable, ERC1155Upgradeable {
    function __ERC1155Supply_init() internal onlyInitializing {
    }
    function __ERC1155Supply_init_unchained() internal onlyInitializing {
    }
    mapping(uint256 => uint256) private _totalSupply;
    /**
     * @dev Total amount of tokens in with a given id.
     */
    function totalSupply(uint256 id) public view virtual returns (uint256) {
        return _totalSupply[id];
    }
    /**
     * @dev Indicates whether any token exist with a given id, or not.
     */
    function exists(uint256 id) public view virtual returns (bool) {
        return ERC1155SupplyUpgradeable.totalSupply(id) > 0;
    }
    /**
     * @dev See {ERC1155-_beforeTokenTransfer}.
     */
    function _beforeTokenTransfer(
        address operator,
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256[] memory ids,
        uint256[] memory amounts,
        bytes memory data
    ) internal virtual override {
        super._beforeTokenTransfer(operator, from, to, ids, amounts, data);
        if (from == address(0)) {
            for (uint256 i = 0; i < ids.length; ++i) {
                _totalSupply[ids[i]] += amounts[i];
            }
        }
        if (to == address(0)) {
            for (uint256 i = 0; i < ids.length; ++i) {
                uint256 id = ids[i];
                uint256 amount = amounts[i];
                uint256 supply = _totalSupply[id];
                require(supply >= amount, "ERC1155: burn amount exceeds totalSupply");
                unchecked {
                    _totalSupply[id] = supply - amount;
                }
            }
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev This empty reserved space is put in place to allow future versions to add new
     * variables without shifting down storage in the inheritance chain.
     * See https://docs.openzeppelin.com/contracts/4.x/upgradeable#storage_gaps
     */
    uint256[49] private __gap;
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts v4.4.1 (token/ERC1155/extensions/IERC1155MetadataURI.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
import "../IERC1155Upgradeable.sol";
/**
 * @dev Interface of the optional ERC1155MetadataExtension interface, as defined
 * in the https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-1155#metadata-extensions[EIP].
 *
 * _Available since v3.1._
 */
interface IERC1155MetadataURIUpgradeable is IERC1155Upgradeable {
    /**
     * @dev Returns the URI for token type `id`.
     *
     * If the `\\{id\\}` substring is present in the URI, it must be replaced by
     * clients with the actual token type ID.
     */
    function uri(uint256 id) external view returns (string memory);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.5.0) (token/ERC1155/IERC1155Receiver.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
import "../../utils/introspection/IERC165Upgradeable.sol";
/**
 * @dev _Available since v3.1._
 */
interface IERC1155ReceiverUpgradeable is IERC165Upgradeable {
    /**
     * @dev Handles the receipt of a single ERC1155 token type. This function is
     * called at the end of a `safeTransferFrom` after the balance has been updated.
     *
     * NOTE: To accept the transfer, this must return
     * `bytes4(keccak256("onERC1155Received(address,address,uint256,uint256,bytes)"))`
     * (i.e. 0xf23a6e61, or its own function selector).
     *
     * @param operator The address which initiated the transfer (i.e. msg.sender)
     * @param from The address which previously owned the token
     * @param id The ID of the token being transferred
     * @param value The amount of tokens being transferred
     * @param data Additional data with no specified format
     * @return `bytes4(keccak256("onERC1155Received(address,address,uint256,uint256,bytes)"))` if transfer is allowed
     */
    function onERC1155Received(
        address operator,
        address from,
        uint256 id,
        uint256 value,
        bytes calldata data
    ) external returns (bytes4);
    /**
     * @dev Handles the receipt of a multiple ERC1155 token types. This function
     * is called at the end of a `safeBatchTransferFrom` after the balances have
     * been updated.
     *
     * NOTE: To accept the transfer(s), this must return
     * `bytes4(keccak256("onERC1155BatchReceived(address,address,uint256[],uint256[],bytes)"))`
     * (i.e. 0xbc197c81, or its own function selector).
     *
     * @param operator The address which initiated the batch transfer (i.e. msg.sender)
     * @param from The address which previously owned the token
     * @param ids An array containing ids of each token being transferred (order and length must match values array)
     * @param values An array containing amounts of each token being transferred (order and length must match ids array)
     * @param data Additional data with no specified format
     * @return `bytes4(keccak256("onERC1155BatchReceived(address,address,uint256[],uint256[],bytes)"))` if transfer is allowed
     */
    function onERC1155BatchReceived(
        address operator,
        address from,
        uint256[] calldata ids,
        uint256[] calldata values,
        bytes calldata data
    ) external returns (bytes4);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.7.0) (token/ERC1155/IERC1155.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
import "../../utils/introspection/IERC165Upgradeable.sol";
/**
 * @dev Required interface of an ERC1155 compliant contract, as defined in the
 * https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-1155[EIP].
 *
 * _Available since v3.1._
 */
interface IERC1155Upgradeable is IERC165Upgradeable {
    /**
     * @dev Emitted when `value` tokens of token type `id` are transferred from `from` to `to` by `operator`.
     */
    event TransferSingle(address indexed operator, address indexed from, address indexed to, uint256 id, uint256 value);
    /**
     * @dev Equivalent to multiple {TransferSingle} events, where `operator`, `from` and `to` are the same for all
     * transfers.
     */
    event TransferBatch(
        address indexed operator,
        address indexed from,
        address indexed to,
        uint256[] ids,
        uint256[] values
    );
    /**
     * @dev Emitted when `account` grants or revokes permission to `operator` to transfer their tokens, according to
     * `approved`.
     */
    event ApprovalForAll(address indexed account, address indexed operator, bool approved);
    /**
     * @dev Emitted when the URI for token type `id` changes to `value`, if it is a non-programmatic URI.
     *
     * If an {URI} event was emitted for `id`, the standard
     * https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-1155#metadata-extensions[guarantees] that `value` will equal the value
     * returned by {IERC1155MetadataURI-uri}.
     */
    event URI(string value, uint256 indexed id);
    /**
     * @dev Returns the amount of tokens of token type `id` owned by `account`.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `account` cannot be the zero address.
     */
    function balanceOf(address account, uint256 id) external view returns (uint256);
    /**
     * @dev xref:ROOT:erc1155.adoc#batch-operations[Batched] version of {balanceOf}.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `accounts` and `ids` must have the same length.
     */
    function balanceOfBatch(address[] calldata accounts, uint256[] calldata ids)
        external
        view
        returns (uint256[] memory);
    /**
     * @dev Grants or revokes permission to `operator` to transfer the caller's tokens, according to `approved`,
     *
     * Emits an {ApprovalForAll} event.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `operator` cannot be the caller.
     */
    function setApprovalForAll(address operator, bool approved) external;
    /**
     * @dev Returns true if `operator` is approved to transfer ``account``'s tokens.
     *
     * See {setApprovalForAll}.
     */
    function isApprovedForAll(address account, address operator) external view returns (bool);
    /**
     * @dev Transfers `amount` tokens of token type `id` from `from` to `to`.
     *
     * Emits a {TransferSingle} event.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
     * - If the caller is not `from`, it must have been approved to spend ``from``'s tokens via {setApprovalForAll}.
     * - `from` must have a balance of tokens of type `id` of at least `amount`.
     * - If `to` refers to a smart contract, it must implement {IERC1155Receiver-onERC1155Received} and return the
     * acceptance magic value.
     */
    function safeTransferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 id,
        uint256 amount,
        bytes calldata data
    ) external;
    /**
     * @dev xref:ROOT:erc1155.adoc#batch-operations[Batched] version of {safeTransferFrom}.
     *
     * Emits a {TransferBatch} event.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `ids` and `amounts` must have the same length.
     * - If `to` refers to a smart contract, it must implement {IERC1155Receiver-onERC1155BatchReceived} and return the
     * acceptance magic value.
     */
    function safeBatchTransferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256[] calldata ids,
        uint256[] calldata amounts,
        bytes calldata data
    ) external;
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts v4.4.1 (token/ERC20/extensions/draft-IERC20Permit.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/**
 * @dev Interface of the ERC20 Permit extension allowing approvals to be made via signatures, as defined in
 * https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-2612[EIP-2612].
 *
 * Adds the {permit} method, which can be used to change an account's ERC20 allowance (see {IERC20-allowance}) by
 * presenting a message signed by the account. By not relying on {IERC20-approve}, the token holder account doesn't
 * need to send a transaction, and thus is not required to hold Ether at all.
 */
interface IERC20PermitUpgradeable {
    /**
     * @dev Sets `value` as the allowance of `spender` over ``owner``'s tokens,
     * given ``owner``'s signed approval.
     *
     * IMPORTANT: The same issues {IERC20-approve} has related to transaction
     * ordering also apply here.
     *
     * Emits an {Approval} event.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `spender` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `deadline` must be a timestamp in the future.
     * - `v`, `r` and `s` must be a valid `secp256k1` signature from `owner`
     * over the EIP712-formatted function arguments.
     * - the signature must use ``owner``'s current nonce (see {nonces}).
     *
     * For more information on the signature format, see the
     * https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-2612#specification[relevant EIP
     * section].
     */
    function permit(
        address owner,
        address spender,
        uint256 value,
        uint256 deadline,
        uint8 v,
        bytes32 r,
        bytes32 s
    ) external;
    /**
     * @dev Returns the current nonce for `owner`. This value must be
     * included whenever a signature is generated for {permit}.
     *
     * Every successful call to {permit} increases ``owner``'s nonce by one. This
     * prevents a signature from being used multiple times.
     */
    function nonces(address owner) external view returns (uint256);
    /**
     * @dev Returns the domain separator used in the encoding of the signature for {permit}, as defined by {EIP712}.
     */
    // solhint-disable-next-line func-name-mixedcase
    function DOMAIN_SEPARATOR() external view returns (bytes32);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.6.0) (token/ERC20/IERC20.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/**
 * @dev Interface of the ERC20 standard as defined in the EIP.
 */
interface IERC20Upgradeable {
    /**
     * @dev Emitted when `value` tokens are moved from one account (`from`) to
     * another (`to`).
     *
     * Note that `value` may be zero.
     */
    event Transfer(address indexed from, address indexed to, uint256 value);
    /**
     * @dev Emitted when the allowance of a `spender` for an `owner` is set by
     * a call to {approve}. `value` is the new allowance.
     */
    event Approval(address indexed owner, address indexed spender, uint256 value);
    /**
     * @dev Returns the amount of tokens in existence.
     */
    function totalSupply() external view returns (uint256);
    /**
     * @dev Returns the amount of tokens owned by `account`.
     */
    function balanceOf(address account) external view returns (uint256);
    /**
     * @dev Moves `amount` tokens from the caller's account to `to`.
     *
     * Returns a boolean value indicating whether the operation succeeded.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event.
     */
    function transfer(address to, uint256 amount) external returns (bool);
    /**
     * @dev Returns the remaining number of tokens that `spender` will be
     * allowed to spend on behalf of `owner` through {transferFrom}. This is
     * zero by default.
     *
     * This value changes when {approve} or {transferFrom} are called.
     */
    function allowance(address owner, address spender) external view returns (uint256);
    /**
     * @dev Sets `amount` as the allowance of `spender` over the caller's tokens.
     *
     * Returns a boolean value indicating whether the operation succeeded.
     *
     * IMPORTANT: Beware that changing an allowance with this method brings the risk
     * that someone may use both the old and the new allowance by unfortunate
     * transaction ordering. One possible solution to mitigate this race
     * condition is to first reduce the spender's allowance to 0 and set the
     * desired value afterwards:
     * https://github.com/ethereum/EIPs/issues/20#issuecomment-263524729
     *
     * Emits an {Approval} event.
     */
    function approve(address spender, uint256 amount) external returns (bool);
    /**
     * @dev Moves `amount` tokens from `from` to `to` using the
     * allowance mechanism. `amount` is then deducted from the caller's
     * allowance.
     *
     * Returns a boolean value indicating whether the operation succeeded.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event.
     */
    function transferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 amount
    ) external returns (bool);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.8.0) (token/ERC20/utils/SafeERC20.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
import "../IERC20Upgradeable.sol";
import "../extensions/draft-IERC20PermitUpgradeable.sol";
import "../../../utils/AddressUpgradeable.sol";
/**
 * @title SafeERC20
 * @dev Wrappers around ERC20 operations that throw on failure (when the token
 * contract returns false). Tokens that return no value (and instead revert or
 * throw on failure) are also supported, non-reverting calls are assumed to be
 * successful.
 * To use this library you can add a `using SafeERC20 for IERC20;` statement to your contract,
 * which allows you to call the safe operations as `token.safeTransfer(...)`, etc.
 */
library SafeERC20Upgradeable {
    using AddressUpgradeable for address;
    function safeTransfer(
        IERC20Upgradeable token,
        address to,
        uint256 value
    ) internal {
        _callOptionalReturn(token, abi.encodeWithSelector(token.transfer.selector, to, value));
    }
    function safeTransferFrom(
        IERC20Upgradeable token,
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 value
    ) internal {
        _callOptionalReturn(token, abi.encodeWithSelector(token.transferFrom.selector, from, to, value));
    }
    /**
     * @dev Deprecated. This function has issues similar to the ones found in
     * {IERC20-approve}, and its usage is discouraged.
     *
     * Whenever possible, use {safeIncreaseAllowance} and
     * {safeDecreaseAllowance} instead.
     */
    function safeApprove(
        IERC20Upgradeable token,
        address spender,
        uint256 value
    ) internal {
        // safeApprove should only be called when setting an initial allowance,
        // or when resetting it to zero. To increase and decrease it, use
        // 'safeIncreaseAllowance' and 'safeDecreaseAllowance'
        require(
            (value == 0) || (token.allowance(address(this), spender) == 0),
            "SafeERC20: approve from non-zero to non-zero allowance"
        );
        _callOptionalReturn(token, abi.encodeWithSelector(token.approve.selector, spender, value));
    }
    function safeIncreaseAllowance(
        IERC20Upgradeable token,
        address spender,
        uint256 value
    ) internal {
        uint256 newAllowance = token.allowance(address(this), spender) + value;
        _callOptionalReturn(token, abi.encodeWithSelector(token.approve.selector, spender, newAllowance));
    }
    function safeDecreaseAllowance(
        IERC20Upgradeable token,
        address spender,
        uint256 value
    ) internal {
        unchecked {
            uint256 oldAllowance = token.allowance(address(this), spender);
            require(oldAllowance >= value, "SafeERC20: decreased allowance below zero");
            uint256 newAllowance = oldAllowance - value;
            _callOptionalReturn(token, abi.encodeWithSelector(token.approve.selector, spender, newAllowance));
        }
    }
    function safePermit(
        IERC20PermitUpgradeable token,
        address owner,
        address spender,
        uint256 value,
        uint256 deadline,
        uint8 v,
        bytes32 r,
        bytes32 s
    ) internal {
        uint256 nonceBefore = token.nonces(owner);
        token.permit(owner, spender, value, deadline, v, r, s);
        uint256 nonceAfter = token.nonces(owner);
        require(nonceAfter == nonceBefore + 1, "SafeERC20: permit did not succeed");
    }
    /**
     * @dev Imitates a Solidity high-level call (i.e. a regular function call to a contract), relaxing the requirement
     * on the return value: the return value is optional (but if data is returned, it must not be false).
     * @param token The token targeted by the call.
     * @param data The call data (encoded using abi.encode or one of its variants).
     */
    function _callOptionalReturn(IERC20Upgradeable token, bytes memory data) private {
        // We need to perform a low level call here, to bypass Solidity's return data size checking mechanism, since
        // we're implementing it ourselves. We use {Address-functionCall} to perform this call, which verifies that
        // the target address contains contract code and also asserts for success in the low-level call.
        bytes memory returndata = address(token).functionCall(data, "SafeERC20: low-level call failed");
        if (returndata.length > 0) {
            // Return data is optional
            require(abi.decode(returndata, (bool)), "SafeERC20: ERC20 operation did not succeed");
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.8.0) (utils/Address.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.1;
/**
 * @dev Collection of functions related to the address type
 */
library AddressUpgradeable {
    /**
     * @dev Returns true if `account` is a contract.
     *
     * [IMPORTANT]
     * ====
     * It is unsafe to assume that an address for which this function returns
     * false is an externally-owned account (EOA) and not a contract.
     *
     * Among others, `isContract` will return false for the following
     * types of addresses:
     *
     *  - an externally-owned account
     *  - a contract in construction
     *  - an address where a contract will be created
     *  - an address where a contract lived, but was destroyed
     * ====
     *
     * [IMPORTANT]
     * ====
     * You shouldn't rely on `isContract` to protect against flash loan attacks!
     *
     * Preventing calls from contracts is highly discouraged. It breaks composability, breaks support for smart wallets
     * like Gnosis Safe, and does not provide security since it can be circumvented by calling from a contract
     * constructor.
     * ====
     */
    function isContract(address account) internal view returns (bool) {
        // This method relies on extcodesize/address.code.length, which returns 0
        // for contracts in construction, since the code is only stored at the end
        // of the constructor execution.
        return account.code.length > 0;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Replacement for Solidity's `transfer`: sends `amount` wei to
     * `recipient`, forwarding all available gas and reverting on errors.
     *
     * https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-1884[EIP1884] increases the gas cost
     * of certain opcodes, possibly making contracts go over the 2300 gas limit
     * imposed by `transfer`, making them unable to receive funds via
     * `transfer`. {sendValue} removes this limitation.
     *
     * https://diligence.consensys.net/posts/2019/09/stop-using-soliditys-transfer-now/[Learn more].
     *
     * IMPORTANT: because control is transferred to `recipient`, care must be
     * taken to not create reentrancy vulnerabilities. Consider using
     * {ReentrancyGuard} or the
     * https://solidity.readthedocs.io/en/v0.5.11/security-considerations.html#use-the-checks-effects-interactions-pattern[checks-effects-interactions pattern].
     */
    function sendValue(address payable recipient, uint256 amount) internal {
        require(address(this).balance >= amount, "Address: insufficient balance");
        (bool success, ) = recipient.call{value: amount}("");
        require(success, "Address: unable to send value, recipient may have reverted");
    }
    /**
     * @dev Performs a Solidity function call using a low level `call`. A
     * plain `call` is an unsafe replacement for a function call: use this
     * function instead.
     *
     * If `target` reverts with a revert reason, it is bubbled up by this
     * function (like regular Solidity function calls).
     *
     * Returns the raw returned data. To convert to the expected return value,
     * use https://solidity.readthedocs.io/en/latest/units-and-global-variables.html?highlight=abi.decode#abi-encoding-and-decoding-functions[`abi.decode`].
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `target` must be a contract.
     * - calling `target` with `data` must not revert.
     *
     * _Available since v3.1._
     */
    function functionCall(address target, bytes memory data) internal returns (bytes memory) {
        return functionCallWithValue(target, data, 0, "Address: low-level call failed");
    }
    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-}[`functionCall`], but with
     * `errorMessage` as a fallback revert reason when `target` reverts.
     *
     * _Available since v3.1._
     */
    function functionCall(
        address target,
        bytes memory data,
        string memory errorMessage
    ) internal returns (bytes memory) {
        return functionCallWithValue(target, data, 0, errorMessage);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-}[`functionCall`],
     * but also transferring `value` wei to `target`.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - the calling contract must have an ETH balance of at least `value`.
     * - the called Solidity function must be `payable`.
     *
     * _Available since v3.1._
     */
    function functionCallWithValue(
        address target,
        bytes memory data,
        uint256 value
    ) internal returns (bytes memory) {
        return functionCallWithValue(target, data, value, "Address: low-level call with value failed");
    }
    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCallWithValue-address-bytes-uint256-}[`functionCallWithValue`], but
     * with `errorMessage` as a fallback revert reason when `target` reverts.
     *
     * _Available since v3.1._
     */
    function functionCallWithValue(
        address target,
        bytes memory data,
        uint256 value,
        string memory errorMessage
    ) internal returns (bytes memory) {
        require(address(this).balance >= value, "Address: insufficient balance for call");
        (bool success, bytes memory returndata) = target.call{value: value}(data);
        return verifyCallResultFromTarget(target, success, returndata, errorMessage);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-}[`functionCall`],
     * but performing a static call.
     *
     * _Available since v3.3._
     */
    function functionStaticCall(address target, bytes memory data) internal view returns (bytes memory) {
        return functionStaticCall(target, data, "Address: low-level static call failed");
    }
    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-string-}[`functionCall`],
     * but performing a static call.
     *
     * _Available since v3.3._
     */
    function functionStaticCall(
        address target,
        bytes memory data,
        string memory errorMessage
    ) internal view returns (bytes memory) {
        (bool success, bytes memory returndata) = target.staticcall(data);
        return verifyCallResultFromTarget(target, success, returndata, errorMessage);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Tool to verify that a low level call to smart-contract was successful, and revert (either by bubbling
     * the revert reason or using the provided one) in case of unsuccessful call or if target was not a contract.
     *
     * _Available since v4.8._
     */
    function verifyCallResultFromTarget(
        address target,
        bool success,
        bytes memory returndata,
        string memory errorMessage
    ) internal view returns (bytes memory) {
        if (success) {
            if (returndata.length == 0) {
                // only check isContract if the call was successful and the return data is empty
                // otherwise we already know that it was a contract
                require(isContract(target), "Address: call to non-contract");
            }
            return returndata;
        } else {
            _revert(returndata, errorMessage);
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Tool to verify that a low level call was successful, and revert if it wasn't, either by bubbling the
     * revert reason or using the provided one.
     *
     * _Available since v4.3._
     */
    function verifyCallResult(
        bool success,
        bytes memory returndata,
        string memory errorMessage
    ) internal pure returns (bytes memory) {
        if (success) {
            return returndata;
        } else {
            _revert(returndata, errorMessage);
        }
    }
    function _revert(bytes memory returndata, string memory errorMessage) private pure {
        // Look for revert reason and bubble it up if present
        if (returndata.length > 0) {
            // The easiest way to bubble the revert reason is using memory via assembly
            /// @solidity memory-safe-assembly
            assembly {
                let returndata_size := mload(returndata)
                revert(add(32, returndata), returndata_size)
            }
        } else {
            revert(errorMessage);
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts v4.4.1 (utils/Context.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
import "../proxy/utils/Initializable.sol";
/**
 * @dev Provides information about the current execution context, including the
 * sender of the transaction and its data. While these are generally available
 * via msg.sender and msg.data, they should not be accessed in such a direct
 * manner, since when dealing with meta-transactions the account sending and
 * paying for execution may not be the actual sender (as far as an application
 * is concerned).
 *
 * This contract is only required for intermediate, library-like contracts.
 */
abstract contract ContextUpgradeable is Initializable {
    function __Context_init() internal onlyInitializing {
    }
    function __Context_init_unchained() internal onlyInitializing {
    }
    function _msgSender() internal view virtual returns (address) {
        return msg.sender;
    }
    function _msgData() internal view virtual returns (bytes calldata) {
        return msg.data;
    }
    /**
     * @dev This empty reserved space is put in place to allow future versions to add new
     * variables without shifting down storage in the inheritance chain.
     * See https://docs.openzeppelin.com/contracts/4.x/upgradeable#storage_gaps
     */
    uint256[50] private __gap;
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts v4.4.1 (utils/introspection/ERC165.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
import "./IERC165Upgradeable.sol";
import "../../proxy/utils/Initializable.sol";
/**
 * @dev Implementation of the {IERC165} interface.
 *
 * Contracts that want to implement ERC165 should inherit from this contract and override {supportsInterface} to check
 * for the additional interface id that will be supported. For example:
 *
 * ```solidity
 * function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId) public view virtual override returns (bool) {
 *     return interfaceId == type(MyInterface).interfaceId || super.supportsInterface(interfaceId);
 * }
 * ```
 *
 * Alternatively, {ERC165Storage} provides an easier to use but more expensive implementation.
 */
abstract contract ERC165Upgradeable is Initializable, IERC165Upgradeable {
    function __ERC165_init() internal onlyInitializing {
    }
    function __ERC165_init_unchained() internal onlyInitializing {
    }
    /**
     * @dev See {IERC165-supportsInterface}.
     */
    function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId) public view virtual override returns (bool) {
        return interfaceId == type(IERC165Upgradeable).interfaceId;
    }
    /**
     * @dev This empty reserved space is put in place to allow future versions to add new
     * variables without shifting down storage in the inheritance chain.
     * See https://docs.openzeppelin.com/contracts/4.x/upgradeable#storage_gaps
     */
    uint256[50] private __gap;
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts v4.4.1 (utils/introspection/IERC165.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/**
 * @dev Interface of the ERC165 standard, as defined in the
 * https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-165[EIP].
 *
 * Implementers can declare support of contract interfaces, which can then be
 * queried by others ({ERC165Checker}).
 *
 * For an implementation, see {ERC165}.
 */
interface IERC165Upgradeable {
    /**
     * @dev Returns true if this contract implements the interface defined by
     * `interfaceId`. See the corresponding
     * https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-165#how-interfaces-are-identified[EIP section]
     * to learn more about how these ids are created.
     *
     * This function call must use less than 30 000 gas.
     */
    function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId) external view returns (bool);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.8.0) (access/AccessControl.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
import "./IAccessControl.sol";
import "../utils/Context.sol";
import "../utils/Strings.sol";
import "../utils/introspection/ERC165.sol";
/**
 * @dev Contract module that allows children to implement role-based access
 * control mechanisms. This is a lightweight version that doesn't allow enumerating role
 * members except through off-chain means by accessing the contract event logs. Some
 * applications may benefit from on-chain enumerability, for those cases see
 * {AccessControlEnumerable}.
 *
 * Roles are referred to by their `bytes32` identifier. These should be exposed
 * in the external API and be unique. The best way to achieve this is by
 * using `public constant` hash digests:
 *
 * ```
 * bytes32 public constant MY_ROLE = keccak256("MY_ROLE");
 * ```
 *
 * Roles can be used to represent a set of permissions. To restrict access to a
 * function call, use {hasRole}:
 *
 * ```
 * function foo() public {
 *     require(hasRole(MY_ROLE, msg.sender));
 *     ...
 * }
 * ```
 *
 * Roles can be granted and revoked dynamically via the {grantRole} and
 * {revokeRole} functions. Each role has an associated admin role, and only
 * accounts that have a role's admin role can call {grantRole} and {revokeRole}.
 *
 * By default, the admin role for all roles is `DEFAULT_ADMIN_ROLE`, which means
 * that only accounts with this role will be able to grant or revoke other
 * roles. More complex role relationships can be created by using
 * {_setRoleAdmin}.
 *
 * WARNING: The `DEFAULT_ADMIN_ROLE` is also its own admin: it has permission to
 * grant and revoke this role. Extra precautions should be taken to secure
 * accounts that have been granted it.
 */
abstract contract AccessControl is Context, IAccessControl, ERC165 {
    struct RoleData {
        mapping(address => bool) members;
        bytes32 adminRole;
    }
    mapping(bytes32 => RoleData) private _roles;
    bytes32 public constant DEFAULT_ADMIN_ROLE = 0x00;
    /**
     * @dev Modifier that checks that an account has a specific role. Reverts
     * with a standardized message including the required role.
     *
     * The format of the revert reason is given by the following regular expression:
     *
     *  /^AccessControl: account (0x[0-9a-f]{40}) is missing role (0x[0-9a-f]{64})$/
     *
     * _Available since v4.1._
     */
    modifier onlyRole(bytes32 role) {
        _checkRole(role);
        _;
    }
    /**
     * @dev See {IERC165-supportsInterface}.
     */
    function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId) public view virtual override returns (bool) {
        return interfaceId == type(IAccessControl).interfaceId || super.supportsInterface(interfaceId);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns `true` if `account` has been granted `role`.
     */
    function hasRole(bytes32 role, address account) public view virtual override returns (bool) {
        return _roles[role].members[account];
    }
    /**
     * @dev Revert with a standard message if `_msgSender()` is missing `role`.
     * Overriding this function changes the behavior of the {onlyRole} modifier.
     *
     * Format of the revert message is described in {_checkRole}.
     *
     * _Available since v4.6._
     */
    function _checkRole(bytes32 role) internal view virtual {
        _checkRole(role, _msgSender());
    }
    /**
     * @dev Revert with a standard message if `account` is missing `role`.
     *
     * The format of the revert reason is given by the following regular expression:
     *
     *  /^AccessControl: account (0x[0-9a-f]{40}) is missing role (0x[0-9a-f]{64})$/
     */
    function _checkRole(bytes32 role, address account) internal view virtual {
        if (!hasRole(role, account)) {
            revert(
                string(
                    abi.encodePacked(
                        "AccessControl: account ",
                        Strings.toHexString(account),
                        " is missing role ",
                        Strings.toHexString(uint256(role), 32)
                    )
                )
            );
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the admin role that controls `role`. See {grantRole} and
     * {revokeRole}.
     *
     * To change a role's admin, use {_setRoleAdmin}.
     */
    function getRoleAdmin(bytes32 role) public view virtual override returns (bytes32) {
        return _roles[role].adminRole;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Grants `role` to `account`.
     *
     * If `account` had not been already granted `role`, emits a {RoleGranted}
     * event.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - the caller must have ``role``'s admin role.
     *
     * May emit a {RoleGranted} event.
     */
    function grantRole(bytes32 role, address account) public virtual override onlyRole(getRoleAdmin(role)) {
        _grantRole(role, account);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Revokes `role` from `account`.
     *
     * If `account` had been granted `role`, emits a {RoleRevoked} event.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - the caller must have ``role``'s admin role.
     *
     * May emit a {RoleRevoked} event.
     */
    function revokeRole(bytes32 role, address account) public virtual override onlyRole(getRoleAdmin(role)) {
        _revokeRole(role, account);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Revokes `role` from the calling account.
     *
     * Roles are often managed via {grantRole} and {revokeRole}: this function's
     * purpose is to provide a mechanism for accounts to lose their privileges
     * if they are compromised (such as when a trusted device is misplaced).
     *
     * If the calling account had been revoked `role`, emits a {RoleRevoked}
     * event.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - the caller must be `account`.
     *
     * May emit a {RoleRevoked} event.
     */
    function renounceRole(bytes32 role, address account) public virtual override {
        require(account == _msgSender(), "AccessControl: can only renounce roles for self");
        _revokeRole(role, account);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Grants `role` to `account`.
     *
     * If `account` had not been already granted `role`, emits a {RoleGranted}
     * event. Note that unlike {grantRole}, this function doesn't perform any
     * checks on the calling account.
     *
     * May emit a {RoleGranted} event.
     *
     * [WARNING]
     * ====
     * This function should only be called from the constructor when setting
     * up the initial roles for the system.
     *
     * Using this function in any other way is effectively circumventing the admin
     * system imposed by {AccessControl}.
     * ====
     *
     * NOTE: This function is deprecated in favor of {_grantRole}.
     */
    function _setupRole(bytes32 role, address account) internal virtual {
        _grantRole(role, account);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Sets `adminRole` as ``role``'s admin role.
     *
     * Emits a {RoleAdminChanged} event.
     */
    function _setRoleAdmin(bytes32 role, bytes32 adminRole) internal virtual {
        bytes32 previousAdminRole = getRoleAdmin(role);
        _roles[role].adminRole = adminRole;
        emit RoleAdminChanged(role, previousAdminRole, adminRole);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Grants `role` to `account`.
     *
     * Internal function without access restriction.
     *
     * May emit a {RoleGranted} event.
     */
    function _grantRole(bytes32 role, address account) internal virtual {
        if (!hasRole(role, account)) {
            _roles[role].members[account] = true;
            emit RoleGranted(role, account, _msgSender());
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Revokes `role` from `account`.
     *
     * Internal function without access restriction.
     *
     * May emit a {RoleRevoked} event.
     */
    function _revokeRole(bytes32 role, address account) internal virtual {
        if (hasRole(role, account)) {
            _roles[role].members[account] = false;
            emit RoleRevoked(role, account, _msgSender());
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts v4.4.1 (access/IAccessControl.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/**
 * @dev External interface of AccessControl declared to support ERC165 detection.
 */
interface IAccessControl {
    /**
     * @dev Emitted when `newAdminRole` is set as ``role``'s admin role, replacing `previousAdminRole`
     *
     * `DEFAULT_ADMIN_ROLE` is the starting admin for all roles, despite
     * {RoleAdminChanged} not being emitted signaling this.
     *
     * _Available since v3.1._
     */
    event RoleAdminChanged(bytes32 indexed role, bytes32 indexed previousAdminRole, bytes32 indexed newAdminRole);
    /**
     * @dev Emitted when `account` is granted `role`.
     *
     * `sender` is the account that originated the contract call, an admin role
     * bearer except when using {AccessControl-_setupRole}.
     */
    event RoleGranted(bytes32 indexed role, address indexed account, address indexed sender);
    /**
     * @dev Emitted when `account` is revoked `role`.
     *
     * `sender` is the account that originated the contract call:
     *   - if using `revokeRole`, it is the admin role bearer
     *   - if using `renounceRole`, it is the role bearer (i.e. `account`)
     */
    event RoleRevoked(bytes32 indexed role, address indexed account, address indexed sender);
    /**
     * @dev Returns `true` if `account` has been granted `role`.
     */
    function hasRole(bytes32 role, address account) external view returns (bool);
    /**
     * @dev Returns the admin role that controls `role`. See {grantRole} and
     * {revokeRole}.
     *
     * To change a role's admin, use {AccessControl-_setRoleAdmin}.
     */
    function getRoleAdmin(bytes32 role) external view returns (bytes32);
    /**
     * @dev Grants `role` to `account`.
     *
     * If `account` had not been already granted `role`, emits a {RoleGranted}
     * event.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - the caller must have ``role``'s admin role.
     */
    function grantRole(bytes32 role, address account) external;
    /**
     * @dev Revokes `role` from `account`.
     *
     * If `account` had been granted `role`, emits a {RoleRevoked} event.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - the caller must have ``role``'s admin role.
     */
    function revokeRole(bytes32 role, address account) external;
    /**
     * @dev Revokes `role` from the calling account.
     *
     * Roles are often managed via {grantRole} and {revokeRole}: this function's
     * purpose is to provide a mechanism for accounts to lose their privileges
     * if they are compromised (such as when a trusted device is misplaced).
     *
     * If the calling account had been granted `role`, emits a {RoleRevoked}
     * event.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - the caller must be `account`.
     */
    function renounceRole(bytes32 role, address account) external;
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.8.0) (proxy/Clones.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/**
 * @dev https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-1167[EIP 1167] is a standard for
 * deploying minimal proxy contracts, also known as "clones".
 *
 * > To simply and cheaply clone contract functionality in an immutable way, this standard specifies
 * > a minimal bytecode implementation that delegates all calls to a known, fixed address.
 *
 * The library includes functions to deploy a proxy using either `create` (traditional deployment) or `create2`
 * (salted deterministic deployment). It also includes functions to predict the addresses of clones deployed using the
 * deterministic method.
 *
 * _Available since v3.4._
 */
library Clones {
    /**
     * @dev Deploys and returns the address of a clone that mimics the behaviour of `implementation`.
     *
     * This function uses the create opcode, which should never revert.
     */
    function clone(address implementation) internal returns (address instance) {
        /// @solidity memory-safe-assembly
        assembly {
            // Cleans the upper 96 bits of the `implementation` word, then packs the first 3 bytes
            // of the `implementation` address with the bytecode before the address.
            mstore(0x00, or(shr(0xe8, shl(0x60, implementation)), 0x3d602d80600a3d3981f3363d3d373d3d3d363d73000000))
            // Packs the remaining 17 bytes of `implementation` with the bytecode after the address.
            mstore(0x20, or(shl(0x78, implementation), 0x5af43d82803e903d91602b57fd5bf3))
            instance := create(0, 0x09, 0x37)
        }
        require(instance != address(0), "ERC1167: create failed");
    }
    /**
     * @dev Deploys and returns the address of a clone that mimics the behaviour of `implementation`.
     *
     * This function uses the create2 opcode and a `salt` to deterministically deploy
     * the clone. Using the same `implementation` and `salt` multiple time will revert, since
     * the clones cannot be deployed twice at the same address.
     */
    function cloneDeterministic(address implementation, bytes32 salt) internal returns (address instance) {
        /// @solidity memory-safe-assembly
        assembly {
            // Cleans the upper 96 bits of the `implementation` word, then packs the first 3 bytes
            // of the `implementation` address with the bytecode before the address.
            mstore(0x00, or(shr(0xe8, shl(0x60, implementation)), 0x3d602d80600a3d3981f3363d3d373d3d3d363d73000000))
            // Packs the remaining 17 bytes of `implementation` with the bytecode after the address.
            mstore(0x20, or(shl(0x78, implementation), 0x5af43d82803e903d91602b57fd5bf3))
            instance := create2(0, 0x09, 0x37, salt)
        }
        require(instance != address(0), "ERC1167: create2 failed");
    }
    /**
     * @dev Computes the address of a clone deployed using {Clones-cloneDeterministic}.
     */
    function predictDeterministicAddress(
        address implementation,
        bytes32 salt,
        address deployer
    ) internal pure returns (address predicted) {
        /// @solidity memory-safe-assembly
        assembly {
            let ptr := mload(0x40)
            mstore(add(ptr, 0x38), deployer)
            mstore(add(ptr, 0x24), 0x5af43d82803e903d91602b57fd5bf3ff)
            mstore(add(ptr, 0x14), implementation)
            mstore(ptr, 0x3d602d80600a3d3981f3363d3d373d3d3d363d73)
            mstore(add(ptr, 0x58), salt)
            mstore(add(ptr, 0x78), keccak256(add(ptr, 0x0c), 0x37))
            predicted := keccak256(add(ptr, 0x43), 0x55)
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Computes the address of a clone deployed using {Clones-cloneDeterministic}.
     */
    function predictDeterministicAddress(address implementation, bytes32 salt)
        internal
        view
        returns (address predicted)
    {
        return predictDeterministicAddress(implementation, salt, address(this));
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts v4.4.1 (utils/Context.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/**
 * @dev Provides information about the current execution context, including the
 * sender of the transaction and its data. While these are generally available
 * via msg.sender and msg.data, they should not be accessed in such a direct
 * manner, since when dealing with meta-transactions the account sending and
 * paying for execution may not be the actual sender (as far as an application
 * is concerned).
 *
 * This contract is only required for intermediate, library-like contracts.
 */
abstract contract Context {
    function _msgSender() internal view virtual returns (address) {
        return msg.sender;
    }
    function _msgData() internal view virtual returns (bytes calldata) {
        return msg.data;
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.8.0) (utils/cryptography/MerkleProof.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/**
 * @dev These functions deal with verification of Merkle Tree proofs.
 *
 * The tree and the proofs can be generated using our
 * https://github.com/OpenZeppelin/merkle-tree[JavaScript library].
 * You will find a quickstart guide in the readme.
 *
 * WARNING: You should avoid using leaf values that are 64 bytes long prior to
 * hashing, or use a hash function other than keccak256 for hashing leaves.
 * This is because the concatenation of a sorted pair of internal nodes in
 * the merkle tree could be reinterpreted as a leaf value.
 * OpenZeppelin's JavaScript library generates merkle trees that are safe
 * against this attack out of the box.
 */
library MerkleProof {
    /**
     * @dev Returns true if a `leaf` can be proved to be a part of a Merkle tree
     * defined by `root`. For this, a `proof` must be provided, containing
     * sibling hashes on the branch from the leaf to the root of the tree. Each
     * pair of leaves and each pair of pre-images are assumed to be sorted.
     */
    function verify(
        bytes32[] memory proof,
        bytes32 root,
        bytes32 leaf
    ) internal pure returns (bool) {
        return processProof(proof, leaf) == root;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Calldata version of {verify}
     *
     * _Available since v4.7._
     */
    function verifyCalldata(
        bytes32[] calldata proof,
        bytes32 root,
        bytes32 leaf
    ) internal pure returns (bool) {
        return processProofCalldata(proof, leaf) == root;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the rebuilt hash obtained by traversing a Merkle tree up
     * from `leaf` using `proof`. A `proof` is valid if and only if the rebuilt
     * hash matches the root of the tree. When processing the proof, the pairs
     * of leafs & pre-images are assumed to be sorted.
     *
     * _Available since v4.4._
     */
    function processProof(bytes32[] memory proof, bytes32 leaf) internal pure returns (bytes32) {
        bytes32 computedHash = leaf;
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < proof.length; i++) {
            computedHash = _hashPair(computedHash, proof[i]);
        }
        return computedHash;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Calldata version of {processProof}
     *
     * _Available since v4.7._
     */
    function processProofCalldata(bytes32[] calldata proof, bytes32 leaf) internal pure returns (bytes32) {
        bytes32 computedHash = leaf;
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < proof.length; i++) {
            computedHash = _hashPair(computedHash, proof[i]);
        }
        return computedHash;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns true if the `leaves` can be simultaneously proven to be a part of a merkle tree defined by
     * `root`, according to `proof` and `proofFlags` as described in {processMultiProof}.
     *
     * CAUTION: Not all merkle trees admit multiproofs. See {processMultiProof} for details.
     *
     * _Available since v4.7._
     */
    function multiProofVerify(
        bytes32[] memory proof,
        bool[] memory proofFlags,
        bytes32 root,
        bytes32[] memory leaves
    ) internal pure returns (bool) {
        return processMultiProof(proof, proofFlags, leaves) == root;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Calldata version of {multiProofVerify}
     *
     * CAUTION: Not all merkle trees admit multiproofs. See {processMultiProof} for details.
     *
     * _Available since v4.7._
     */
    function multiProofVerifyCalldata(
        bytes32[] calldata proof,
        bool[] calldata proofFlags,
        bytes32 root,
        bytes32[] memory leaves
    ) internal pure returns (bool) {
        return processMultiProofCalldata(proof, proofFlags, leaves) == root;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the root of a tree reconstructed from `leaves` and sibling nodes in `proof`. The reconstruction
     * proceeds by incrementally reconstructing all inner nodes by combining a leaf/inner node with either another
     * leaf/inner node or a proof sibling node, depending on whether each `proofFlags` item is true or false
     * respectively.
     *
     * CAUTION: Not all merkle trees admit multiproofs. To use multiproofs, it is sufficient to ensure that: 1) the tree
     * is complete (but not necessarily perfect), 2) the leaves to be proven are in the opposite order they are in the
     * tree (i.e., as seen from right to left starting at the deepest layer and continuing at the next layer).
     *
     * _Available since v4.7._
     */
    function processMultiProof(
        bytes32[] memory proof,
        bool[] memory proofFlags,
        bytes32[] memory leaves
    ) internal pure returns (bytes32 merkleRoot) {
        // This function rebuild the root hash by traversing the tree up from the leaves. The root is rebuilt by
        // consuming and producing values on a queue. The queue starts with the `leaves` array, then goes onto the
        // `hashes` array. At the end of the process, the last hash in the `hashes` array should contain the root of
        // the merkle tree.
        uint256 leavesLen = leaves.length;
        uint256 totalHashes = proofFlags.length;
        // Check proof validity.
        require(leavesLen + proof.length - 1 == totalHashes, "MerkleProof: invalid multiproof");
        // The xxxPos values are "pointers" to the next value to consume in each array. All accesses are done using
        // `xxx[xxxPos++]`, which return the current value and increment the pointer, thus mimicking a queue's "pop".
        bytes32[] memory hashes = new bytes32[](totalHashes);
        uint256 leafPos = 0;
        uint256 hashPos = 0;
        uint256 proofPos = 0;
        // At each step, we compute the next hash using two values:
        // - a value from the "main queue". If not all leaves have been consumed, we get the next leaf, otherwise we
        //   get the next hash.
        // - depending on the flag, either another value for the "main queue" (merging branches) or an element from the
        //   `proof` array.
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < totalHashes; i++) {
            bytes32 a = leafPos < leavesLen ? leaves[leafPos++] : hashes[hashPos++];
            bytes32 b = proofFlags[i] ? leafPos < leavesLen ? leaves[leafPos++] : hashes[hashPos++] : proof[proofPos++];
            hashes[i] = _hashPair(a, b);
        }
        if (totalHashes > 0) {
            return hashes[totalHashes - 1];
        } else if (leavesLen > 0) {
            return leaves[0];
        } else {
            return proof[0];
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Calldata version of {processMultiProof}.
     *
     * CAUTION: Not all merkle trees admit multiproofs. See {processMultiProof} for details.
     *
     * _Available since v4.7._
     */
    function processMultiProofCalldata(
        bytes32[] calldata proof,
        bool[] calldata proofFlags,
        bytes32[] memory leaves
    ) internal pure returns (bytes32 merkleRoot) {
        // This function rebuild the root hash by traversing the tree up from the leaves. The root is rebuilt by
        // consuming and producing values on a queue. The queue starts with the `leaves` array, then goes onto the
        // `hashes` array. At the end of the process, the last hash in the `hashes` array should contain the root of
        // the merkle tree.
        uint256 leavesLen = leaves.length;
        uint256 totalHashes = proofFlags.length;
        // Check proof validity.
        require(leavesLen + proof.length - 1 == totalHashes, "MerkleProof: invalid multiproof");
        // The xxxPos values are "pointers" to the next value to consume in each array. All accesses are done using
        // `xxx[xxxPos++]`, which return the current value and increment the pointer, thus mimicking a queue's "pop".
        bytes32[] memory hashes = new bytes32[](totalHashes);
        uint256 leafPos = 0;
        uint256 hashPos = 0;
        uint256 proofPos = 0;
        // At each step, we compute the next hash using two values:
        // - a value from the "main queue". If not all leaves have been consumed, we get the next leaf, otherwise we
        //   get the next hash.
        // - depending on the flag, either another value for the "main queue" (merging branches) or an element from the
        //   `proof` array.
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < totalHashes; i++) {
            bytes32 a = leafPos < leavesLen ? leaves[leafPos++] : hashes[hashPos++];
            bytes32 b = proofFlags[i] ? leafPos < leavesLen ? leaves[leafPos++] : hashes[hashPos++] : proof[proofPos++];
            hashes[i] = _hashPair(a, b);
        }
        if (totalHashes > 0) {
            return hashes[totalHashes - 1];
        } else if (leavesLen > 0) {
            return leaves[0];
        } else {
            return proof[0];
        }
    }
    function _hashPair(bytes32 a, bytes32 b) private pure returns (bytes32) {
        return a < b ? _efficientHash(a, b) : _efficientHash(b, a);
    }
    function _efficientHash(bytes32 a, bytes32 b) private pure returns (bytes32 value) {
        /// @solidity memory-safe-assembly
        assembly {
            mstore(0x00, a)
            mstore(0x20, b)
            value := keccak256(0x00, 0x40)
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts v4.4.1 (utils/introspection/ERC165.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
import "./IERC165.sol";
/**
 * @dev Implementation of the {IERC165} interface.
 *
 * Contracts that want to implement ERC165 should inherit from this contract and override {supportsInterface} to check
 * for the additional interface id that will be supported. For example:
 *
 * ```solidity
 * function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId) public view virtual override returns (bool) {
 *     return interfaceId == type(MyInterface).interfaceId || super.supportsInterface(interfaceId);
 * }
 * ```
 *
 * Alternatively, {ERC165Storage} provides an easier to use but more expensive implementation.
 */
abstract contract ERC165 is IERC165 {
    /**
     * @dev See {IERC165-supportsInterface}.
     */
    function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId) public view virtual override returns (bool) {
        return interfaceId == type(IERC165).interfaceId;
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts v4.4.1 (utils/introspection/IERC165.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/**
 * @dev Interface of the ERC165 standard, as defined in the
 * https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-165[EIP].
 *
 * Implementers can declare support of contract interfaces, which can then be
 * queried by others ({ERC165Checker}).
 *
 * For an implementation, see {ERC165}.
 */
interface IERC165 {
    /**
     * @dev Returns true if this contract implements the interface defined by
     * `interfaceId`. See the corresponding
     * https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-165#how-interfaces-are-identified[EIP section]
     * to learn more about how these ids are created.
     *
     * This function call must use less than 30 000 gas.
     */
    function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId) external view returns (bool);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.8.0) (utils/math/Math.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/**
 * @dev Standard math utilities missing in the Solidity language.
 */
library Math {
    enum Rounding {
        Down, // Toward negative infinity
        Up, // Toward infinity
        Zero // Toward zero
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the largest of two numbers.
     */
    function max(uint256 a, uint256 b) internal pure returns (uint256) {
        return a > b ? a : b;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the smallest of two numbers.
     */
    function min(uint256 a, uint256 b) internal pure returns (uint256) {
        return a < b ? a : b;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the average of two numbers. The result is rounded towards
     * zero.
     */
    function average(uint256 a, uint256 b) internal pure returns (uint256) {
        // (a + b) / 2 can overflow.
        return (a & b) + (a ^ b) / 2;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the ceiling of the division of two numbers.
     *
     * This differs from standard division with `/` in that it rounds up instead
     * of rounding down.
     */
    function ceilDiv(uint256 a, uint256 b) internal pure returns (uint256) {
        // (a + b - 1) / b can overflow on addition, so we distribute.
        return a == 0 ? 0 : (a - 1) / b + 1;
    }
    /**
     * @notice Calculates floor(x * y / denominator) with full precision. Throws if result overflows a uint256 or denominator == 0
     * @dev Original credit to Remco Bloemen under MIT license (https://xn--2-umb.com/21/muldiv)
     * with further edits by Uniswap Labs also under MIT license.
     */
    function mulDiv(
        uint256 x,
        uint256 y,
        uint256 denominator
    ) internal pure returns (uint256 result) {
        unchecked {
            // 512-bit multiply [prod1 prod0] = x * y. Compute the product mod 2^256 and mod 2^256 - 1, then use
            // use the Chinese Remainder Theorem to reconstruct the 512 bit result. The result is stored in two 256
            // variables such that product = prod1 * 2^256 + prod0.
            uint256 prod0; // Least significant 256 bits of the product
            uint256 prod1; // Most significant 256 bits of the product
            assembly {
                let mm := mulmod(x, y, not(0))
                prod0 := mul(x, y)
                prod1 := sub(sub(mm, prod0), lt(mm, prod0))
            }
            // Handle non-overflow cases, 256 by 256 division.
            if (prod1 == 0) {
                return prod0 / denominator;
            }
            // Make sure the result is less than 2^256. Also prevents denominator == 0.
            require(denominator > prod1);
            ///////////////////////////////////////////////
            // 512 by 256 division.
            ///////////////////////////////////////////////
            // Make division exact by subtracting the remainder from [prod1 prod0].
            uint256 remainder;
            assembly {
                // Compute remainder using mulmod.
                remainder := mulmod(x, y, denominator)
                // Subtract 256 bit number from 512 bit number.
                prod1 := sub(prod1, gt(remainder, prod0))
                prod0 := sub(prod0, remainder)
            }
            // Factor powers of two out of denominator and compute largest power of two divisor of denominator. Always >= 1.
            // See https://cs.stackexchange.com/q/138556/92363.
            // Does not overflow because the denominator cannot be zero at this stage in the function.
            uint256 twos = denominator & (~denominator + 1);
            assembly {
                // Divide denominator by twos.
                denominator := div(denominator, twos)
                // Divide [prod1 prod0] by twos.
                prod0 := div(prod0, twos)
                // Flip twos such that it is 2^256 / twos. If twos is zero, then it becomes one.
                twos := add(div(sub(0, twos), twos), 1)
            }
            // Shift in bits from prod1 into prod0.
            prod0 |= prod1 * twos;
            // Invert denominator mod 2^256. Now that denominator is an odd number, it has an inverse modulo 2^256 such
            // that denominator * inv = 1 mod 2^256. Compute the inverse by starting with a seed that is correct for
            // four bits. That is, denominator * inv = 1 mod 2^4.
            uint256 inverse = (3 * denominator) ^ 2;
            // Use the Newton-Raphson iteration to improve the precision. Thanks to Hensel's lifting lemma, this also works
            // in modular arithmetic, doubling the correct bits in each step.
            inverse *= 2 - denominator * inverse; // inverse mod 2^8
            inverse *= 2 - denominator * inverse; // inverse mod 2^16
            inverse *= 2 - denominator * inverse; // inverse mod 2^32
            inverse *= 2 - denominator * inverse; // inverse mod 2^64
            inverse *= 2 - denominator * inverse; // inverse mod 2^128
            inverse *= 2 - denominator * inverse; // inverse mod 2^256
            // Because the division is now exact we can divide by multiplying with the modular inverse of denominator.
            // This will give us the correct result modulo 2^256. Since the preconditions guarantee that the outcome is
            // less than 2^256, this is the final result. We don't need to compute the high bits of the result and prod1
            // is no longer required.
            result = prod0 * inverse;
            return result;
        }
    }
    /**
     * @notice Calculates x * y / denominator with full precision, following the selected rounding direction.
     */
    function mulDiv(
        uint256 x,
        uint256 y,
        uint256 denominator,
        Rounding rounding
    ) internal pure returns (uint256) {
        uint256 result = mulDiv(x, y, denominator);
        if (rounding == Rounding.Up && mulmod(x, y, denominator) > 0) {
            result += 1;
        }
        return result;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the square root of a number. If the number is not a perfect square, the value is rounded down.
     *
     * Inspired by Henry S. Warren, Jr.'s "Hacker's Delight" (Chapter 11).
     */
    function sqrt(uint256 a) internal pure returns (uint256) {
        if (a == 0) {
            return 0;
        }
        // For our first guess, we get the biggest power of 2 which is smaller than the square root of the target.
        //
        // We know that the "msb" (most significant bit) of our target number `a` is a power of 2 such that we have
        // `msb(a) <= a < 2*msb(a)`. This value can be written `msb(a)=2**k` with `k=log2(a)`.
        //
        // This can be rewritten `2**log2(a) <= a < 2**(log2(a) + 1)`
        // → `sqrt(2**k) <= sqrt(a) < sqrt(2**(k+1))`
        // → `2**(k/2) <= sqrt(a) < 2**((k+1)/2) <= 2**(k/2 + 1)`
        //
        // Consequently, `2**(log2(a) / 2)` is a good first approximation of `sqrt(a)` with at least 1 correct bit.
        uint256 result = 1 << (log2(a) >> 1);
        // At this point `result` is an estimation with one bit of precision. We know the true value is a uint128,
        // since it is the square root of a uint256. Newton's method converges quadratically (precision doubles at
        // every iteration). We thus need at most 7 iteration to turn our partial result with one bit of precision
        // into the expected uint128 result.
        unchecked {
            result = (result + a / result) >> 1;
            result = (result + a / result) >> 1;
            result = (result + a / result) >> 1;
            result = (result + a / result) >> 1;
            result = (result + a / result) >> 1;
            result = (result + a / result) >> 1;
            result = (result + a / result) >> 1;
            return min(result, a / result);
        }
    }
    /**
     * @notice Calculates sqrt(a), following the selected rounding direction.
     */
    function sqrt(uint256 a, Rounding rounding) internal pure returns (uint256) {
        unchecked {
            uint256 result = sqrt(a);
            return result + (rounding == Rounding.Up && result * result < a ? 1 : 0);
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Return the log in base 2, rounded down, of a positive value.
     * Returns 0 if given 0.
     */
    function log2(uint256 value) internal pure returns (uint256) {
        uint256 result = 0;
        unchecked {
            if (value >> 128 > 0) {
                value >>= 128;
                result += 128;
            }
            if (value >> 64 > 0) {
                value >>= 64;
                result += 64;
            }
            if (value >> 32 > 0) {
                value >>= 32;
                result += 32;
            }
            if (value >> 16 > 0) {
                value >>= 16;
                result += 16;
            }
            if (value >> 8 > 0) {
                value >>= 8;
                result += 8;
            }
            if (value >> 4 > 0) {
                value >>= 4;
                result += 4;
            }
            if (value >> 2 > 0) {
                value >>= 2;
                result += 2;
            }
            if (value >> 1 > 0) {
                result += 1;
            }
        }
        return result;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Return the log in base 2, following the selected rounding direction, of a positive value.
     * Returns 0 if given 0.
     */
    function log2(uint256 value, Rounding rounding) internal pure returns (uint256) {
        unchecked {
            uint256 result = log2(value);
            return result + (rounding == Rounding.Up && 1 << result < value ? 1 : 0);
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Return the log in base 10, rounded down, of a positive value.
     * Returns 0 if given 0.
     */
    function log10(uint256 value) internal pure returns (uint256) {
        uint256 result = 0;
        unchecked {
            if (value >= 10**64) {
                value /= 10**64;
                result += 64;
            }
            if (value >= 10**32) {
                value /= 10**32;
                result += 32;
            }
            if (value >= 10**16) {
                value /= 10**16;
                result += 16;
            }
            if (value >= 10**8) {
                value /= 10**8;
                result += 8;
            }
            if (value >= 10**4) {
                value /= 10**4;
                result += 4;
            }
            if (value >= 10**2) {
                value /= 10**2;
                result += 2;
            }
            if (value >= 10**1) {
                result += 1;
            }
        }
        return result;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Return the log in base 10, following the selected rounding direction, of a positive value.
     * Returns 0 if given 0.
     */
    function log10(uint256 value, Rounding rounding) internal pure returns (uint256) {
        unchecked {
            uint256 result = log10(value);
            return result + (rounding == Rounding.Up && 10**result < value ? 1 : 0);
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Return the log in base 256, rounded down, of a positive value.
     * Returns 0 if given 0.
     *
     * Adding one to the result gives the number of pairs of hex symbols needed to represent `value` as a hex string.
     */
    function log256(uint256 value) internal pure returns (uint256) {
        uint256 result = 0;
        unchecked {
            if (value >> 128 > 0) {
                value >>= 128;
                result += 16;
            }
            if (value >> 64 > 0) {
                value >>= 64;
                result += 8;
            }
            if (value >> 32 > 0) {
                value >>= 32;
                result += 4;
            }
            if (value >> 16 > 0) {
                value >>= 16;
                result += 2;
            }
            if (value >> 8 > 0) {
                result += 1;
            }
        }
        return result;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Return the log in base 10, following the selected rounding direction, of a positive value.
     * Returns 0 if given 0.
     */
    function log256(uint256 value, Rounding rounding) internal pure returns (uint256) {
        unchecked {
            uint256 result = log256(value);
            return result + (rounding == Rounding.Up && 1 << (result * 8) < value ? 1 : 0);
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.8.0) (utils/Strings.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
import "./math/Math.sol";
/**
 * @dev String operations.
 */
library Strings {
    bytes16 private constant _SYMBOLS = "0123456789abcdef";
    uint8 private constant _ADDRESS_LENGTH = 20;
    /**
     * @dev Converts a `uint256` to its ASCII `string` decimal representation.
     */
    function toString(uint256 value) internal pure returns (string memory) {
        unchecked {
            uint256 length = Math.log10(value) + 1;
            string memory buffer = new string(length);
            uint256 ptr;
            /// @solidity memory-safe-assembly
            assembly {
                ptr := add(buffer, add(32, length))
            }
            while (true) {
                ptr--;
                /// @solidity memory-safe-assembly
                assembly {
                    mstore8(ptr, byte(mod(value, 10), _SYMBOLS))
                }
                value /= 10;
                if (value == 0) break;
            }
            return buffer;
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Converts a `uint256` to its ASCII `string` hexadecimal representation.
     */
    function toHexString(uint256 value) internal pure returns (string memory) {
        unchecked {
            return toHexString(value, Math.log256(value) + 1);
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Converts a `uint256` to its ASCII `string` hexadecimal representation with fixed length.
     */
    function toHexString(uint256 value, uint256 length) internal pure returns (string memory) {
        bytes memory buffer = new bytes(2 * length + 2);
        buffer[0] = "0";
        buffer[1] = "x";
        for (uint256 i = 2 * length + 1; i > 1; --i) {
            buffer[i] = _SYMBOLS[value & 0xf];
            value >>= 4;
        }
        require(value == 0, "Strings: hex length insufficient");
        return string(buffer);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Converts an `address` with fixed length of 20 bytes to its not checksummed ASCII `string` hexadecimal representation.
     */
    function toHexString(address addr) internal pure returns (string memory) {
        return toHexString(uint256(uint160(addr)), _ADDRESS_LENGTH);
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.17;
import "@openzeppelin/contracts-upgradeable/token/ERC1155/extensions/ERC1155SupplyUpgradeable.sol";
import "@openzeppelin/contracts-upgradeable/access/OwnableUpgradeable.sol";
import "@openzeppelin/contracts/utils/cryptography/MerkleProof.sol";
import "@openzeppelin/contracts-upgradeable/utils/AddressUpgradeable.sol";
import "@openzeppelin/contracts-upgradeable/token/common/ERC2981Upgradeable.sol";
import "operator-filter-registry/src/upgradeable/OperatorFiltererUpgradeable.sol";
import "./ICommon.sol";
struct TokenSettings {
    /// @dev total number of tokens that can be minted
    uint32 maxSupply;
    /// @dev total number of tokens that can be minted per wallet
    uint32 maxPerWallet;
    /// @dev tracks the total amount that have been minted
    uint32 amountMinted;
    /// @dev merkle root associated with claiming the token, otherwise bytes32(0)
    bytes32 merkleRoot;
    /// @dev timestamp of when the token can be minted
    uint32 mintStart;
    /// @dev timestamp of when the token can no longer be minted
    uint32 mintEnd;
    /// @dev price for the phase
    uint256 price;
    /// @dev uuid of the token within the Bueno ecosystem
    string uuid;
    /// @dev optional revenue splitting settings
    PaymentSplitterSettings paymentSplitterSettings;
}
struct TokenData {
    TokenSettings settings;
    uint256 index;
}
error TokenSettingsLocked();
error TokenAlreadyExists();
error InvalidPaymentSplitterSettings();
error TooManyTokens();
error InvalidToken();
error MintNotActive();
error InvalidMintDates();
/// @author Bueno.art
/// @title ERC-1155 "Drops" contract (v3)
contract Bueno1155Drop is
    ERC1155SupplyUpgradeable,
    OwnableUpgradeable,
    ERC2981Upgradeable,
    OperatorFiltererUpgradeable
{
    string public name;
    string public symbol;
    uint256 private _currentTokenId;
    bool private allowBurning;
    /// @dev maps the token ID (eg 1, 2 ...n) to the token's minting settings
    mapping(uint256 => TokenSettings) private _tokens;
    /// @dev track how many mints a particular wallet has made for a given token
    mapping(uint256 => mapping(address => uint64))
        private _mintBalanceByTokenId;
    /// @dev track how much revenue each payee has earned
    mapping(address => uint256) private _revenueByAddress;
    /// @dev track how much revenue has been released to each address
    mapping(address => uint256) private _released;
    /// @dev track how much revenue has been released in total
    uint256 private _totalReleased;
    /// @dev "fallback" payment splitter settings in case token-level settings aren't specified
    PaymentSplitterSettings private _fallbackPaymentSplitterSettings;
    event RoyaltyUpdated(address royaltyAddress, uint96 royaltyAmount);
    event TokenRoyaltyUpdated(
        uint256 tokenId,
        address royaltyAddress,
        uint96 royaltyAmount
    );
    event TokenCreated(string indexed uuid, uint256 indexed tokenId);
    event BurnStatusChanged(bool burnActive);
    event TokensAirdropped(uint256 numRecipients, uint256 numTokens);
    event TokenBurned(address indexed owner, uint256 tokenId, uint256 amount);
    event PaymentReleased(address to, uint256 amount);
    event TokenSettingsUpdated(uint256 tokenId);
    event RevenueSettingsUpdated(uint256 tokenId);
    event FallbackRevenueSettingsUpdated();
    event TokensMinted(address indexed to, uint256 tokenId, uint256 quantity);
    event TokenSupplyCapped(uint256 tokenId, uint256 maxSupply);
    /// @custom:oz-upgrades-unsafe-allow constructor
    constructor() {
        _disableInitializers();
    }
    function initialize(
        string memory _name,
        string memory _symbol,
        string memory _baseUri,
        TokenSettings[] calldata _tokenSettings,
        RoyaltySettings calldata _royaltySettings,
        PaymentSplitterSettings calldata _paymentSplitterSettings,
        bool _allowBurning,
        address _deployer,
        address _operatorFilter
    ) public initializer {
        __ERC1155_init(_baseUri);
        __Ownable_init();
        uint256 numTokens = _tokenSettings.length;
        // set a reasonable maximum here so we don't run out of gas
        if (numTokens > 100) {
            revert TooManyTokens();
        }
        // verify fallback (contract-level) payment splitter settings
        _verifyPaymentSplitterSettings(_paymentSplitterSettings);
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < numTokens; ) {
            // verify token-level payment splitter settings, if present
            if (_tokenSettings[i].paymentSplitterSettings.payees.length > 0) {
                _verifyPaymentSplitterSettings(
                    _tokenSettings[i].paymentSplitterSettings
                );
            }
            _verifyMintingTime(
                _tokenSettings[i].mintStart,
                _tokenSettings[i].mintEnd
            );
            _tokens[i] = _tokenSettings[i];
            // this value should always be 0 for new tokens
            _tokens[i].amountMinted = 0;
            emit TokenCreated(_tokenSettings[i].uuid, i);
            // numTokens has a maximum value of 2^256 - 1
            unchecked {
                ++i;
            }
        }
        _currentTokenId = numTokens;
        _fallbackPaymentSplitterSettings = _paymentSplitterSettings;
        name = _name;
        symbol = _symbol;
        allowBurning = _allowBurning;
        _setDefaultRoyalty(
            _royaltySettings.royaltyAddress,
            _royaltySettings.royaltyAmount
        );
        _transferOwnership(_deployer);
        OperatorFiltererUpgradeable.__OperatorFilterer_init(
            _operatorFilter,
            _operatorFilter == address(0) ? false : true // only subscribe if a filter is provided
        );
    }
    /*//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
                           CREATOR FUNCTIONS
    //////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////*/
    /**
     * @notice Create a new token to be minted with the provided settings.
     */
    function createDropToken(
        TokenSettings calldata settings
    ) external onlyOwner {
        if (settings.paymentSplitterSettings.payees.length > 0) {
            _verifyPaymentSplitterSettings(settings.paymentSplitterSettings);
        }
        _verifyMintingTime(settings.mintStart, settings.mintEnd);
        uint256 id = _currentTokenId;
        _tokens[id] = settings;
        // this value should always be 0 for new tokens
        _tokens[id].amountMinted = 0;
        ++_currentTokenId;
        emit TokenCreated(settings.uuid, id);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Create multiple tokens to be minted with the provided settings.
     */
    function createDropTokens(
        TokenSettings[] calldata tokenSettings
    ) external onlyOwner {
        uint256 numTokens = tokenSettings.length;
        uint256 currentTokenId = _currentTokenId;
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < numTokens; ) {
            if (tokenSettings[i].paymentSplitterSettings.payees.length > 0) {
                _verifyPaymentSplitterSettings(
                    tokenSettings[i].paymentSplitterSettings
                );
            }
            TokenSettings memory settings = tokenSettings[i];
            _verifyMintingTime(settings.mintStart, settings.mintEnd);
            uint256 id = currentTokenId;
            // this value should always be 0 for new tokens
            settings.amountMinted = 0;
            _tokens[id] = settings;
            ++currentTokenId;
            // numTokens has a maximum value of 2^256 - 1
            unchecked {
                ++i;
            }
            emit TokenCreated(settings.uuid, id);
        }
        _currentTokenId = currentTokenId;
    }
    /**
     * @notice Update the settings for a token. Certain settings cannot be changed once a token has been minted.
     */
    function updateTokenSettingsByIndex(
        uint256 id,
        TokenSettings calldata settings
    ) external onlyOwner {
        // cannot edit a token larger than the current token ID
        if (id >= _currentTokenId) {
            revert InvalidToken();
        }
        TokenSettings memory token = _tokens[id];
        uint32 existingAmountMinted = token.amountMinted;
        PaymentSplitterSettings memory existingPaymentSplitterSettings = token
            .paymentSplitterSettings;
        // Once a token has been minted, it's not possible to change the supply & start/end times
        if (
            existingAmountMinted > 0 &&
            (settings.maxSupply != token.maxSupply ||
                settings.mintStart != token.mintStart ||
                settings.mintEnd != token.mintEnd)
        ) {
            revert TokenSettingsLocked();
        }
        _verifyMintingTime(settings.mintStart, settings.mintEnd);
        _tokens[id] = settings;
        // it's not possible to update how many have been claimed, but it's part of the TokenSettings struct
        // ignore any value that is passed in and use the existing value
        _tokens[id].amountMinted = existingAmountMinted;
        // payment splitter settings can only be updated via `updatePaymentSplitterSettingsByIndex`
        _tokens[id].paymentSplitterSettings = existingPaymentSplitterSettings;
        emit TokenSettingsUpdated(id);
    }
    function updatePaymentSplitterSettingsByIndex(
        uint256 id,
        PaymentSplitterSettings calldata settings
    ) external onlyOwner {
        // cannot edit a token larger than the current token ID
        if (id >= _currentTokenId) {
            revert InvalidToken();
        }
        // revenue split cannot be changed once a token is minted
        if (_tokens[id].amountMinted > 0) {
            revert TokenSettingsLocked();
        }
        _verifyPaymentSplitterSettings(settings);
        _tokens[id].paymentSplitterSettings = settings;
        emit RevenueSettingsUpdated(id);
    }
    function updateFallbackPaymentSplitterSettings(
        PaymentSplitterSettings calldata settings
    ) external onlyOwner {
        _verifyPaymentSplitterSettings(settings);
        _fallbackPaymentSplitterSettings = settings;
        emit FallbackRevenueSettingsUpdated();
    }
    function _verifyMintingTime(uint32 mintStart, uint32 mintEnd) private view {
        if (mintEnd > 0) {
            // mint end must be after mint start
            if (mintEnd < mintStart) {
                revert InvalidMintDates();
            }
            // mint end must be in the future
            if (mintEnd < block.timestamp) {
                revert InvalidMintDates();
            }
        }
    }
    function _verifyPaymentSplitterSettings(
        PaymentSplitterSettings calldata settings
    ) private pure {
        uint256 shareTotal;
        uint256 numPayees = settings.payees.length;
        // we discourage using the payment splitter for more than 4 payees, as it's not gas efficient for minting
        // more advanced use-cases should consider a multi-sig payee
        if (numPayees != settings.shares.length || numPayees > 4) {
            revert InvalidPaymentSplitterSettings();
        }
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < numPayees; ) {
            uint256 shares = settings.shares[i];
            if (shares == 0) {
                revert InvalidPaymentSplitterSettings();
            }
            shareTotal += shares;
            // this can't overflow as numPayees is capped at 4
            unchecked {
                ++i;
            }
        }
        if (shareTotal != 100) {
            revert InvalidPaymentSplitterSettings();
        }
    }
    /**
     * @notice Perform a batch airdrop of tokens to a list of recipients
     */
    function airdropToken(
        uint256 id,
        uint32[] calldata quantities,
        address[] calldata recipients
    ) external onlyOwner {
        if (id >= _currentTokenId) {
            revert InvalidToken();
        }
        uint256 numRecipients = recipients.length;
        uint256 totalAirdropped;
        if (numRecipients != quantities.length) revert InvalidAirdrop();
        TokenSettings storage token = _tokens[id];
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < numRecipients; ) {
            uint32 updatedAmountMinted = token.amountMinted + quantities[i];
            if (token.maxSupply > 0 && updatedAmountMinted > token.maxSupply) {
                revert SoldOut();
            }
            // airdrops are not subject to the per-wallet mint limits,
            // but we track how much is minted
            token.amountMinted = updatedAmountMinted;
            totalAirdropped += quantities[i];
            _mint(recipients[i], id, quantities[i], "");
            // numRecipients has a maximum value of 2^256 - 1
            unchecked {
                ++i;
            }
        }
        emit TokensAirdropped(numRecipients, totalAirdropped);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Release funds for a particular payee
     */
    function release(address payee) public {
        uint256 amount = releasable(payee);
        if (amount > 0) {
            _totalReleased += amount;
            // If "_totalReleased += amount" does not overflow, then "_released[payee] += amount" cannot overflow.
            unchecked {
                _released[payee] += amount;
            }
            AddressUpgradeable.sendValue(payable(payee), amount);
            emit PaymentReleased(payee, amount);
        }
    }
    /**
     * @notice Release funds for specified payees
     * @dev This is a convenience method to calling release() for each payee
     */
    function releaseBatch(address[] calldata payees) external {
        uint256 numPayees = payees.length;
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < numPayees; ) {
            release(payees[i]);
            // this can't overflow as numPayees is capped at 4
            unchecked {
                ++i;
            }
        }
    }
    /**
     * @notice Update the default royalty settings (EIP-2981) for the contract.
     */
    function setRoyaltyInfo(
        address receiver,
        uint96 feeBasisPoints
    ) external onlyOwner {
        _setDefaultRoyalty(receiver, feeBasisPoints);
        emit RoyaltyUpdated(receiver, feeBasisPoints);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Update the royalty settings (EIP-2981) for the token.
     */
    function setTokenRoyaltyInfo(
        uint256 tokenId,
        address receiver,
        uint96 feeBasisPoints
    ) external onlyOwner {
        _setTokenRoyalty(tokenId, receiver, feeBasisPoints);
        emit TokenRoyaltyUpdated(tokenId, receiver, feeBasisPoints);
    }
    /**
     * @notice If enabled, the token can be burned, for approved operators.
     * @dev The burn method will revert unless this is enabled
     */
    function toggleBurning() external onlyOwner {
        allowBurning = !allowBurning;
        emit BurnStatusChanged(allowBurning);
    }
    /**
     * @dev See {ERC1155Upgradeable-_setURI}
     */
    function setUri(string calldata uri) external onlyOwner {
        _setURI(uri);
    }
    /**
     * @notice This function can only be called for tokens with supply. Calling this function will set the max supply
     * of a token to the current amount minted. This cannot be reversed.
     */
    function capSupplyAtIndex(uint256 id) external onlyOwner {
        TokenSettings storage token = _tokens[id];
        // only limited edition tokens can be capped
        if (token.maxSupply == 0) {
            revert InvalidToken();
        }
        token.maxSupply = token.amountMinted;
        emit TokenSupplyCapped(id, token.maxSupply);
    }
    /*//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
                           MINTING FUNCTIONS
    //////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////*/
    /**
     * @notice Mint a token to the sender
     */
    function mintToken(uint256 id, uint32 quantity) external payable {
        TokenSettings memory token = _tokens[id];
        if (token.merkleRoot != bytes32(0)) {
            revert InvalidMintFunction();
        }
        _mintAfterChecks(
            msg.sender,
            msg.value,
            id,
            quantity,
            token.maxPerWallet
        );
    }
    /**
     * @notice Mint a token to a specific address
     * @dev Useful in case the recipient of the tokens is not the sender (gifting, fiat checkout, etc)
     */
    function mintTokenTo(
        address account,
        uint256 id,
        uint32 quantity
    ) external payable {
        TokenSettings memory token = _tokens[id];
        if (token.merkleRoot != bytes32(0)) {
            revert InvalidMintFunction();
        }
        _mintAfterChecks(account, msg.value, id, quantity, token.maxPerWallet);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Mint a token that has an allowlist associated with it.
     * @dev maxQuantity is encoded as part of the proof, and is a way to associate variable quantities with each allowlisted wallet
     */
    function mintTokenAllowlist(
        uint256 id,
        uint32 quantity,
        uint32 maxQuantity,
        bytes32[] calldata proof
    ) external payable {
        bytes32 merkleRoot = _tokens[id].merkleRoot;
        if (merkleRoot == bytes32(0)) {
            revert InvalidMintFunction();
        }
        if (
            !MerkleProof.verify(
                proof,
                merkleRoot,
                keccak256(abi.encodePacked(msg.sender, maxQuantity))
            )
        ) {
            revert InvalidProof();
        }
        _mintAfterChecks(msg.sender, msg.value, id, quantity, maxQuantity);
    }
    function _mintAfterChecks(
        address account,
        uint256 balance,
        uint256 id,
        uint32 quantity,
        uint32 maxQuantity
    ) private {
        if (id >= _currentTokenId) {
            revert InvalidToken();
        }
        TokenSettings storage token = _tokens[id];
        if (balance != token.price * quantity) {
            revert InvalidPrice();
        }
        if (
            token.maxSupply > 0 &&
            token.amountMinted + quantity > token.maxSupply
        ) {
            revert SoldOut();
        }
        if (
            maxQuantity > 0 &&
            // maxQuantity is either the token-level maxPerWallet, or the maxQuantity passed in from the allowlist mint function
            // if the latter, the value is provided by the user, but is first checked against the merkle tree
            _mintBalanceByTokenId[id][account] + quantity > maxQuantity
        ) {
            revert ExceedMaxPerWallet();
        }
        if (token.mintStart > 0 && block.timestamp < token.mintStart) {
            revert MintNotActive();
        }
        if (token.mintEnd > 0 && block.timestamp > token.mintEnd) {
            revert MintNotActive();
        }
        // we only need to proceed if this is a revenue generating mint
        if (balance > 0) {
            uint256 numPayees = token.paymentSplitterSettings.payees.length;
            if (numPayees > 0) {
                // if we have token-level payment splitter settings, use those
                calculateRevenueSplit(balance, token.paymentSplitterSettings);
            } else {
                // otherwise, fallback to the contract-level payment splitter settings
                calculateRevenueSplit(
                    balance,
                    _fallbackPaymentSplitterSettings
                );
            }
        }
        token.amountMinted += quantity;
        _mintBalanceByTokenId[id][account] += quantity;
        _mint(account, id, quantity, "");
        emit TokensMinted(account, id, quantity);
    }
    function calculateRevenueSplit(
        uint256 value,
        PaymentSplitterSettings storage paymentSplitterSettings
    ) private {
        uint256 numPayees = paymentSplitterSettings.payees.length;
        // each token can have different payment splitter settings, and price can change while mint is occurring
        // therefore we need to do some revenue accounting at the time of mint based on the price paid
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < numPayees; ) {
            address payee = paymentSplitterSettings.payees[i];
            uint256 amount = ((value * paymentSplitterSettings.shares[i]) /
                100);
            _revenueByAddress[payee] += amount;
            // this can't overflow as numPayees is capped at 4
            unchecked {
                ++i;
            }
        }
    }
    /**
     * @notice Burn a token, if the contract allows for it
     */
    function burn(uint256 id, uint256 amount) external {
        if (!allowBurning) {
            revert BurningNotAllowed();
        }
        _burn(msg.sender, id, amount);
        emit TokenBurned(msg.sender, id, amount);
    }
    /*//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
                             VIEW FUNCTIONS
    //////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////*/
    /**
     * @notice Get the token data based on it's ID (1, 2, etc)
     */
    function getTokenSettingsByTokenId(
        uint256 id
    ) external view returns (TokenSettings memory) {
        return _tokens[id];
    }
    /**
     * @notice Retrieve the fallback payment splitter config (used if a token doesn't have it's own payment splitter settings)
     */
    function getFallbackPaymentSplitterSettings()
        external
        view
        returns (PaymentSplitterSettings memory)
    {
        return _fallbackPaymentSplitterSettings;
    }
    /**
     * @notice Get the token data for all tokens associated with the contract
     */
    function getAllTokenData() external view returns (TokenData[] memory) {
        uint256 numTokens = _currentTokenId;
        TokenData[] memory tokens = new TokenData[](numTokens);
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < numTokens; i++) {
            tokens[i].settings = _tokens[i];
            tokens[i].index = i;
        }
        return tokens;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Getter for the amount of Ether already released to a payee.
     */
    function released(address account) public view returns (uint256) {
        return _released[account];
    }
    /**
     * @dev Getter for the total amount of Ether already released.
     */
    function totalReleased() external view returns (uint256) {
        return _totalReleased;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Getter for the amount of payee's releasable Ether.
     */
    function releasable(address account) public view returns (uint256) {
        return _revenueByAddress[account] - released(account);
    }
    /**
     * @dev See {IERC165-supportsInterface}.
     */
    function supportsInterface(
        bytes4 interfaceId
    )
        public
        view
        virtual
        override(ERC1155Upgradeable, ERC2981Upgradeable)
        returns (bool)
    {
        return super.supportsInterface(interfaceId);
    }
    /*//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
                      OPERATOR REGISTRY OVERRIDES
    //////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////*/
    function setApprovalForAll(
        address operator,
        bool approved
    ) public override onlyAllowedOperatorApproval(operator) {
        super.setApprovalForAll(operator, approved);
    }
    /**
     * @dev See {IERC1155-safeTransferFrom}.
     */
    function safeTransferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId,
        uint256 amount,
        bytes memory data
    ) public override onlyAllowedOperator(from) {
        super.safeTransferFrom(from, to, tokenId, amount, data);
    }
    /**
     * @dev See {IERC1155-safeBatchTransferFrom}.
     */
    function safeBatchTransferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256[] memory ids,
        uint256[] memory amounts,
        bytes memory data
    ) public virtual override onlyAllowedOperator(from) {
        super.safeBatchTransferFrom(from, to, ids, amounts, data);
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.17;
import "erc721a-upgradeable/contracts/extensions/ERC721AQueryableUpgradeable.sol";
import "@openzeppelin/contracts-upgradeable/access/OwnableUpgradeable.sol";
import "@openzeppelin/contracts-upgradeable/token/common/ERC2981Upgradeable.sol";
import "@openzeppelin/contracts/utils/cryptography/MerkleProof.sol";
import "@openzeppelin/contracts-upgradeable/finance/PaymentSplitterUpgradeable.sol";
import "operator-filter-registry/src/upgradeable/OperatorFiltererUpgradeable.sol";
import "./ICommon.sol";
struct PhaseSettings {
    /// @dev phase supply. This can be released to public by ending the phase.
    uint64 maxSupply;
    /// @dev tracks the total amount minted in the phase
    uint64 amountMinted;
    /// @dev wallet maximum for the phase
    uint64 maxPerWallet;
    /// @dev merkle root for the phase (if applicable, otherwise bytes32(0))
    bytes32 merkleRoot;
    /// @dev whether the phase is active
    bool isActive;
    /// @dev price for the phase (or free if 0)
    uint256 price;
}
struct BaseSettings {
    /// @dev public sale supply. ending a phase will carry supply into this value
    uint64 maxSupply;
    /// @dev global wallet maximum across all phases (including public)
    uint64 maxPerWallet;
    /// @dev tracks the total amount minted in the public sale
    uint64 amountMinted;
    /// @dev price for the public sale (or free if 0)
    uint256 price;
}
struct SaleState {
    uint64 numPhases;
    mapping(uint256 => PhaseSettings) phases;
}
error PhaseNotActive();
error InvalidPhase();
error PhaseNotEnded();
/// @author Bueno.art
/// @title ERC-721 Multi-Phase Drop Contract (v3)
contract Bueno721Drop is
    ERC721AQueryableUpgradeable,
    OwnableUpgradeable,
    ERC2981Upgradeable,
    PaymentSplitterUpgradeable,
    OperatorFiltererUpgradeable
{
    string public _baseTokenURI;
    SaleState public saleState;
    BaseSettings public baseSettings;
    uint256 public maxSupply;
    address[] public withdrawAddresses;
    mapping(address => mapping(uint256 => uint64)) private amountMintedForPhase;
    bool public isPublicActive;
    bool private allowBurning;
    event TokensMinted(address indexed to, uint256 quantity);
    event TokenBurned(address indexed owner, uint256 tokenId);
    event TokensAirdropped(uint256 numRecipients, uint256 numTokens);
    event PhasesActivated(uint256[] phaseIds, bool activatedPublic);
    event PhasesPaused(uint256[] phaseIds, bool pausedPublic);
    event PhaseEnded(uint256 phaseIds);
    event BurnStatusChanged(bool burnActive);
    event PhaseSettingsUpdated(uint256 phaseId, PhaseSettings settings);
    event BaseSettingsUpdated(BaseSettings settings);
    event BaseURIUpdated(string baseURI);
    event RoyaltyUpdated(address royaltyAddress, uint96 royaltyAmount);
    /// @custom:oz-upgrades-unsafe-allow constructor
    constructor() {
        _disableInitializers();
    }
    function initialize(
        string memory _name,
        string memory _symbol,
        string memory _baseUri,
        RoyaltySettings calldata _royaltySettings,
        PhaseSettings[] calldata _phases,
        BaseSettings calldata _baseSettings,
        PaymentSplitterSettings calldata _paymentSplitterSettings,
        uint256 _maxIntendedSupply,
        bool _allowBurning,
        address _deployer,
        address _operatorFilter
    ) public initializerERC721A initializer {
        __ERC721A_init(_name, _symbol);
        __Ownable_init();
        __PaymentSplitter_init(
            _paymentSplitterSettings.payees,
            _paymentSplitterSettings.shares
        );
        uint64 numPhases = uint64(_phases.length);
        uint256 supplyValidationCount = _baseSettings.maxSupply;
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < numPhases; ) {
            saleState.phases[i] = _phases[i];
            supplyValidationCount += _phases[i].maxSupply;
            // numPhases has a maximum value of 2^64 - 1
            unchecked {
                ++i;
            }
        }
        require(
            supplyValidationCount == _maxIntendedSupply,
            "Supply of all phases must equal maxIntendedSupply"
        );
        _baseTokenURI = _baseUri;
        withdrawAddresses = _paymentSplitterSettings.payees;
        saleState.numPhases = numPhases;
        baseSettings = _baseSettings;
        allowBurning = _allowBurning;
        maxSupply = _maxIntendedSupply;
        _setDefaultRoyalty(
            _royaltySettings.royaltyAddress,
            _royaltySettings.royaltyAmount
        );
        transferOwnership(_deployer);
        OperatorFiltererUpgradeable.__OperatorFilterer_init(
            _operatorFilter,
            _operatorFilter == address(0) ? false : true // only subscribe if a filter is provided
        );
    }
    // ========= EXTERNAL MINTING METHODS =========
    /**
     * @notice Mint tokens for an allowlisted phase
     * @dev Calling this function for a phase that doesn't have an allowlist will fail
     */
    function mintPhaseAllowlist(
        uint256 phaseIndex,
        uint64 quantity,
        uint32 maxQuantity,
        bytes32[] calldata proof
    ) external payable {
        uint64 updatedAmountMinted = _checkAllowlistPhaseMintConditions(
            quantity,
            maxQuantity,
            proof,
            phaseIndex,
            msg.value
        );
        _mintPhaseTo(msg.sender, quantity, phaseIndex, updatedAmountMinted);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Mint tokens for a non-allowlist phase.
     * @dev Calling this function for a phase that has an allowlist will fail
     */
    function mintPhase(uint256 phaseIndex, uint64 quantity) external payable {
        uint64 updatedAmountMinted = _checkPhaseMintConditions(
            msg.sender,
            quantity,
            phaseIndex,
            msg.value
        );
        _mintPhaseTo(msg.sender, quantity, phaseIndex, updatedAmountMinted);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Mint a token to a specific address from a non-allowlisted sale phase
     * @dev Useful in case the recipient of the tokens is not the sender (gifting, fiat checkout, etc)
     */
    function mintPhaseTo(
        address account,
        uint256 phaseIndex,
        uint64 quantity
    ) external payable {
        uint64 updatedAmountMinted = _checkPhaseMintConditions(
            account,
            quantity,
            phaseIndex,
            msg.value
        );
        _mintPhaseTo(account, quantity, phaseIndex, updatedAmountMinted);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Mint tokens for a given phase
     * @param account The address to mint the tokens to
     * @param quantity The number of tokens to mint
     * @param phaseIndex The index of the phase to mint from
     * @param updatedAmountMinted The updated amount minted for the phase
     */
    function _mintPhaseTo(
        address account,
        uint64 quantity,
        uint256 phaseIndex,
        uint64 updatedAmountMinted
    ) internal {
        _checkGlobalPerWalletMax(account, quantity);
        saleState.phases[phaseIndex].amountMinted += quantity;
        amountMintedForPhase[account][phaseIndex] = updatedAmountMinted;
        _mint(account, quantity);
        emit TokensMinted(account, quantity);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Mint tokens in the public sale
     */
    function mintPublic(uint64 quantity) external payable {
        _mintPublicTo(msg.sender, quantity);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Mint a token to a specific address from the public sale
     * @dev Useful in case the recipient of the tokens is not the sender (gifting, fiat checkout, etc)
     */
    function mintPublicTo(address account, uint64 quantity) external payable {
        _mintPublicTo(account, quantity);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Mint tokens in the public sale
     * @param account The address to mint the tokens to
     * @param quantity The number of tokens to mint
     */
    function _mintPublicTo(address account, uint64 quantity) internal {
        uint64 updatedAmountMinted = _checkPublicMintConditions(
            quantity,
            msg.value
        );
        _checkGlobalPerWalletMax(account, quantity);
        baseSettings.amountMinted = updatedAmountMinted;
        _mint(account, quantity);
        emit TokensMinted(account, quantity);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Mint tokens in all possible phases (including public sale)
     */
    function mintBatch(
        uint64[] calldata quantities,
        uint32[] calldata maxQuantities,
        bytes32[][] calldata proofs,
        uint256[] calldata phaseIndices,
        uint64 publicQuantity
    ) external payable {
        uint256 phaseLength = phaseIndices.length;
        if (
            phaseLength > saleState.numPhases ||
            phaseLength != quantities.length ||
            phaseLength != proofs.length ||
            phaseLength != maxQuantities.length
        ) {
            revert InvalidPhase();
        }
        uint256 balance = msg.value;
        uint256 quantityToMint;
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < phaseLength; ) {
            uint64 updatedAmount;
            uint256 phaseIndex = phaseIndices[i];
            uint64 quantity = quantities[i];
            uint32 maxQuantity = maxQuantities[i];
            bytes32[] calldata proof = proofs[i];
            PhaseSettings storage phase = saleState.phases[phaseIndex];
            uint256 priceForPhase = phase.price * quantity;
            // Since price is strictly checked in the _check* functions below,
            // we have an additional check here to ensure that the balance doesn't underflow
            if (balance < priceForPhase) {
                revert InvalidPrice();
            }
            // if the phase has no allowlist, the merkleRoot will be zeroed out.
            if (phase.merkleRoot == bytes32(0)) {
                updatedAmount = _checkPhaseMintConditions(
                    msg.sender,
                    quantity,
                    phaseIndex,
                    priceForPhase
                );
            } else {
                updatedAmount = _checkAllowlistPhaseMintConditions(
                    quantity,
                    maxQuantity,
                    proof,
                    phaseIndex,
                    priceForPhase
                );
            }
            // quantity & phaseLength have a maximum value of 2^64 - 1
            // balance underflow is checked above
            unchecked {
                saleState.phases[phaseIndex].amountMinted += quantity;
                amountMintedForPhase[msg.sender][phaseIndex] = updatedAmount;
                balance -= priceForPhase;
                quantityToMint += quantity;
                ++i;
            }
        }
        uint256 totalMintQuantity = quantityToMint;
        if (publicQuantity > 0) {
            _checkPublicMintConditions(publicQuantity, balance);
            // publicQuantity has a max value of 2^64 - 1
            unchecked {
                baseSettings.amountMinted += publicQuantity;
                totalMintQuantity += publicQuantity;
            }
        } else {
            // remaining balance is checked in _checkPublicMintConditions, so we only need to check
            // in the case where publicQuantity is 0
            if (balance != 0) {
                revert InvalidPrice();
            }
        }
        _checkGlobalPerWalletMax(msg.sender, totalMintQuantity);
        _mint(msg.sender, totalMintQuantity);
        emit TokensMinted(msg.sender, totalMintQuantity);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Burn a token, if the contract allows for it
     */
    function burn(uint256 tokenId) external {
        if (!allowBurning) {
            revert BurningNotAllowed();
        }
        _burn(tokenId, true);
        emit TokenBurned(msg.sender, tokenId);
    }
    // ========= OWNER METHODS =========
    /**
     * @notice Perform a batch airdrop for a particular phase.
     * @dev Minted tokens are pulled from the phase that is specified in the airdropper.
     */
    function airdropForPhase(
        uint256 phaseIndex,
        uint64[] calldata quantities,
        address[] calldata recipients
    ) external onlyOwner {
        uint256 numRecipients = recipients.length;
        uint256 totalAirdropped;
        if (numRecipients != quantities.length) revert InvalidAirdrop();
        PhaseSettings storage phase = saleState.phases[phaseIndex];
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < numRecipients; ) {
            uint64 updatedAmountMinted = phase.amountMinted + quantities[i];
            if (updatedAmountMinted > phase.maxSupply) {
                revert SoldOut();
            }
            // airdrops are not subject to the per-wallet mint limits,
            // but we track how much is minted for the phase
            phase.amountMinted = updatedAmountMinted;
            totalAirdropped += quantities[i];
            _mint(recipients[i], quantities[i]);
            // numRecipients has a maximum value of 2^256 - 1
            unchecked {
                ++i;
            }
        }
        emit TokensAirdropped(numRecipients, totalAirdropped);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Perform a batch airdrop for the public phase.
     * @dev Minted tokens are pulled from the public phase.
     */
    function airdropPublic(
        uint64[] calldata quantities,
        address[] calldata recipients
    ) external onlyOwner {
        uint256 numRecipients = recipients.length;
        uint256 totalAirdropped;
        if (numRecipients != quantities.length) revert InvalidAirdrop();
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < numRecipients; ) {
            uint64 updatedAmountMinted = baseSettings.amountMinted +
                quantities[i];
            if (updatedAmountMinted > baseSettings.maxSupply) {
                revert SoldOut();
            }
            // airdrops are not subject to the per-wallet mint limits,
            // but we track how much is minted for the phase
            baseSettings.amountMinted = updatedAmountMinted;
            totalAirdropped += quantities[i];
            _mint(recipients[i], quantities[i]);
            // numRecipients has a maximum value of 2^256 - 1
            unchecked {
                ++i;
            }
        }
        emit TokensAirdropped(numRecipients, totalAirdropped);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Specify which phases are active.
     * Public sale can be activated by setting `activatePublic` to true.
     */
    function activatePhases(
        uint256[] calldata phaseIndices,
        bool activatePublic
    ) external onlyOwner {
        uint256 numPhases = phaseIndices.length;
        // activate all the phases provided in phaseIndices
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < numPhases; ) {
            uint256 phaseIndex = phaseIndices[i];
            if (phaseIndex >= saleState.numPhases) {
                // phaseIndex is out of bounds
                revert InvalidPhase();
            }
            saleState.phases[phaseIndices[i]].isActive = true;
            // numPhases has a maximum value of 2^256 - 1
            unchecked {
                ++i;
            }
        }
        // calling this function with activatePublic=false only indicates the public sale
        // is not intended to be activated, but it does not pause it.
        if (activatePublic) {
            isPublicActive = true;
        }
        emit PhasesActivated(phaseIndices, activatePublic);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Specify which phases are inactive (paused).
     * Public sale can be paused by setting `pausePublic` to true.
     * Pausing is separate from ending, since ending permanently closes the phase.
     */
    function pausePhases(
        uint256[] calldata phaseIndices,
        bool pausePublic
    ) external onlyOwner {
        uint256 numPhases = phaseIndices.length;
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < numPhases; ) {
            uint256 phaseIndex = phaseIndices[i];
            if (phaseIndex >= saleState.numPhases) {
                // phaseIndex is out of bounds
                revert InvalidPhase();
            }
            saleState.phases[phaseIndex].isActive = false;
            // numPhases has a maximum value of 2^256 - 1
            unchecked {
                ++i;
            }
        }
        // calling this function with pausePublic=false only indicates the public sale
        // is not intended to be paused, but it does not pause it.
        if (pausePublic) {
            isPublicActive = false;
        }
        emit PhasesPaused(phaseIndices, pausePublic);
    }
    /**
     * @notice If enabled, the token can be burned, for approved operators.
     * @dev The burn method will revert unless this is enabled
     */
    function toggleBurning() external onlyOwner {
        allowBurning = !allowBurning;
        emit BurnStatusChanged(allowBurning);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Permanently closes a phase by capping the supply & releasing it
     */
    function endPhase(uint256 phaseIndex) public onlyOwner {
        PhaseSettings storage phase = saleState.phases[phaseIndex];
        // if the phase never had supply, there is nothing to do
        if (phase.maxSupply == 0) {
            revert InvalidPhase();
        }
        // transfer the remaining supply into the base settings (used for public sale accounting)
        baseSettings.maxSupply += phase.maxSupply - phase.amountMinted;
        // remove the supply from the phase
        phase.maxSupply = 0;
        emit PhaseEnded(phaseIndex);
    }
    function endPhases(uint64[] calldata phaseIndices) external onlyOwner {
        uint256 phaseIndicesLength = phaseIndices.length;
        // ensure that phaseIndices argument will only ever be as large as the number of phases
        if (phaseIndicesLength > saleState.numPhases) {
            revert InvalidPhase();
        }
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < phaseIndicesLength; ) {
            endPhase(phaseIndices[i]);
            // phaseIndicesLength has a maximum value of 2^256 - 1
            unchecked {
                ++i;
            }
        }
    }
    /**
     * @notice Updates the minting rules for a particular phase
     * @dev supply, amountMinted are not changeable. isActive is handled by activatePhases
     */
    function updatePhaseSettings(
        uint256 phaseIndex,
        PhaseSettings calldata phase
    ) external onlyOwner {
        uint64 existingAmountMinted = saleState.phases[phaseIndex].amountMinted;
        uint64 existingMaxSupply = saleState.phases[phaseIndex].maxSupply;
        bool existingStatus = saleState.phases[phaseIndex].isActive;
        saleState.phases[phaseIndex] = phase;
        // ensure that the amountMinted, maxSupply, and status values cannot be set
        saleState.phases[phaseIndex].amountMinted = existingAmountMinted;
        saleState.phases[phaseIndex].maxSupply = existingMaxSupply;
        saleState.phases[phaseIndex].isActive = existingStatus;
        emit PhaseSettingsUpdated(phaseIndex, phase);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Updates the the base minting settings
     * The global maxPerWallet setting applies to all phases
     * Pricing and other fields will apply to the public sale
     *
     * @dev maxSupply & amountMinted are not changeable. isActive is handled by activatePhases
     */
    function updateBaseSettings(
        BaseSettings calldata _baseSettings
    ) external onlyOwner {
        uint64 existingMaxSupply = baseSettings.maxSupply;
        uint64 existingAmountMinted = baseSettings.amountMinted;
        baseSettings = _baseSettings;
        // ensure that the maxSupply & amountMinted value cannot be set
        baseSettings.maxSupply = existingMaxSupply;
        baseSettings.amountMinted = existingAmountMinted;
        emit BaseSettingsUpdated(_baseSettings);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Payment can be pulled via PaymentSplitter.release
     * this method is provided for convenience to release all payee funds
     */
    function withdraw() external onlyOwner {
        uint256 numAddresses = withdrawAddresses.length;
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < numAddresses; ) {
            address payable withdrawAddress = payable(withdrawAddresses[i]);
            if (releasable(withdrawAddress) > 0) {
                release(withdrawAddress);
            }
            // numAddresses has a maximum value of 2^256 - 1
            unchecked {
                ++i;
            }
        }
    }
    function setBaseURI(string memory baseURI) external onlyOwner {
        _baseTokenURI = baseURI;
        emit BaseURIUpdated(baseURI);
    }
    function setRoyaltyInfo(
        address receiver,
        uint96 feeBasisPoints
    ) external onlyOwner {
        _setDefaultRoyalty(receiver, feeBasisPoints);
        emit RoyaltyUpdated(receiver, feeBasisPoints);
    }
    /**
     * @notice This function cannot be called if any phase has not ended. This will cap the max supply
     * to the amount of tokens that have been minted so far. This cannot be reversed.
     */
    function capMaxSupply() external onlyOwner {
        uint64 numPhases = saleState.numPhases;
        for (uint64 i = 0; i < numPhases; ) {
            if (saleState.phases[i].maxSupply > 0) {
                // we only want to cap the supply if all phases are ended, meaning their supply
                // has been transferred to the public/base phase
                revert PhaseNotEnded();
            }
            // numPhases has a maximum value of 2^64 - 1
            unchecked {
                ++i;
            }
        }
        // whatever the amount of tokens that has been minted is the new overall "max supply"
        maxSupply = _totalMinted();
        // the max supply of the public/base phase is however many have been minted
        baseSettings.maxSupply = baseSettings.amountMinted;
    }
    // ========= VIEW METHODS =========
    function _startTokenId() internal view virtual override returns (uint256) {
        return 1;
    }
    function _checkAllowlistPhaseMintConditions(
        uint64 quantity,
        uint32 maxQuantity,
        bytes32[] calldata proof,
        uint256 phaseIndex,
        uint256 balance
    ) internal view returns (uint64) {
        PhaseSettings storage phase = saleState.phases[phaseIndex];
        if (!phase.isActive) {
            revert PhaseNotActive();
        }
        // there should be a valid merkle root for the phase
        if (phase.merkleRoot == bytes32(0)) {
            revert InvalidMintFunction();
        }
        if (phase.amountMinted + quantity > phase.maxSupply) {
            revert SoldOut();
        }
        if (balance != quantity * phase.price) {
            revert InvalidPrice();
        }
        if (
            !MerkleProof.verify(
                proof,
                phase.merkleRoot,
                keccak256(abi.encodePacked(msg.sender, maxQuantity))
            )
        ) {
            revert InvalidProof();
        }
        uint256 amountMinted = amountMintedForPhase[msg.sender][phaseIndex];
        uint256 updatedAmountMinted = amountMinted + quantity;
        if (
            // phases can have a maxPerWallet
            (maxQuantity == 0 &&
                phase.maxPerWallet > 0 &&
                updatedAmountMinted > phase.maxPerWallet) ||
            // wallets can have a maxPerWallet encoded in the merkle tree
            (maxQuantity > 0 && updatedAmountMinted > maxQuantity)
        ) {
            revert ExceedMaxPerWallet();
        }
        return uint64(updatedAmountMinted);
    }
    function _checkPhaseMintConditions(
        address wallet,
        uint256 quantity,
        uint256 phaseIndex,
        uint256 balance
    ) internal view returns (uint64) {
        PhaseSettings storage phase = saleState.phases[phaseIndex];
        if (!phase.isActive) {
            revert PhaseNotActive();
        }
        // the phase should not have a merkleRoot
        if (phase.merkleRoot != bytes32(0)) {
            revert InvalidMintFunction();
        }
        if (phase.amountMinted + quantity > phase.maxSupply) {
            revert SoldOut();
        }
        if (balance != quantity * phase.price) {
            revert InvalidPrice();
        }
        uint256 amountMinted = amountMintedForPhase[wallet][phaseIndex];
        uint256 updatedAmountMinted = amountMinted + quantity;
        // phases can have a maxPerWallet
        if (
            phase.maxPerWallet > 0 && updatedAmountMinted > phase.maxPerWallet
        ) {
            revert ExceedMaxPerWallet();
        }
        return uint64(updatedAmountMinted);
    }
    function _checkPublicMintConditions(
        uint256 quantity,
        uint256 balance
    ) internal view returns (uint64) {
        if (!isPublicActive) {
            revert PhaseNotActive();
        }
        uint256 updatedAmountMinted = baseSettings.amountMinted + quantity;
        if (updatedAmountMinted > baseSettings.maxSupply) {
            revert SoldOut();
        }
        if (balance != quantity * baseSettings.price) {
            revert InvalidPrice();
        }
        return uint64(updatedAmountMinted);
    }
    function _checkGlobalPerWalletMax(
        address wallet,
        uint256 quantity
    ) internal view {
        if (
            baseSettings.maxPerWallet > 0 &&
            _numberMinted(wallet) + quantity > baseSettings.maxPerWallet
        ) {
            revert ExceedMaxPerWallet();
        }
    }
    function getDataForPhase(
        uint256 phaseIndex
    ) external view returns (PhaseSettings memory) {
        return saleState.phases[phaseIndex];
    }
    function getMintBalance(address wallet) external view returns (uint256) {
        return _numberMinted(wallet);
    }
    function getAmountMintedForPhase(
        uint256 phaseIndex,
        address wallet
    ) external view returns (uint64) {
        return amountMintedForPhase[wallet][phaseIndex];
    }
    function getAmountMintedForOwner(
        address wallet
    ) external view returns (uint256[] memory) {
        uint256[] memory amountMintedPerPhase = new uint256[](
            saleState.numPhases + 1
        );
        for (uint64 i = 0; i < saleState.numPhases; ) {
            amountMintedPerPhase[i] = amountMintedForPhase[wallet][i];
            // numPhases has a maximum value of 2^64 - 1
            unchecked {
                ++i;
            }
        }
        amountMintedPerPhase[saleState.numPhases] = _numberMinted(wallet);
        return amountMintedPerPhase;
    }
    /**
     * @dev See {ERC721-_baseURI}.
     */
    function _baseURI() internal view virtual override returns (string memory) {
        return _baseTokenURI;
    }
    function supportsInterface(
        bytes4 interfaceId
    )
        public
        view
        virtual
        override(IERC721AUpgradeable, ERC721AUpgradeable, ERC2981Upgradeable)
        returns (bool)
    {
        return
            ERC721AUpgradeable.supportsInterface(interfaceId) ||
            ERC2981Upgradeable.supportsInterface(interfaceId);
    }
    // ========= OPERATOR FILTERER OVERRIDES =========
    function setApprovalForAll(
        address operator,
        bool approved
    )
        public
        override(ERC721AUpgradeable, IERC721AUpgradeable)
        onlyAllowedOperatorApproval(operator)
    {
        super.setApprovalForAll(operator, approved);
    }
    function approve(
        address operator,
        uint256 tokenId
    )
        public
        payable
        override(ERC721AUpgradeable, IERC721AUpgradeable)
        onlyAllowedOperatorApproval(operator)
    {
        super.approve(operator, tokenId);
    }
    function transferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId
    )
        public
        payable
        override(ERC721AUpgradeable, IERC721AUpgradeable)
        onlyAllowedOperator(from)
    {
        super.transferFrom(from, to, tokenId);
    }
    function safeTransferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId
    )
        public
        payable
        override(ERC721AUpgradeable, IERC721AUpgradeable)
        onlyAllowedOperator(from)
    {
        super.safeTransferFrom(from, to, tokenId);
    }
    function safeTransferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId,
        bytes memory data
    )
        public
        payable
        override(ERC721AUpgradeable, IERC721AUpgradeable)
        onlyAllowedOperator(from)
    {
        super.safeTransferFrom(from, to, tokenId, data);
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.17;
import "@openzeppelin/contracts/proxy/Clones.sol";
import "@openzeppelin/contracts/access/AccessControl.sol";
import "./Bueno721Drop.sol";
import "./Bueno1155Drop.sol";
contract BuenoFactory is AccessControl {
    address private DEFAULT_OPERATOR_FILTER =
        address(0x3cc6CddA760b79bAfa08dF41ECFA224f810dCeB6);
    address private drop721Implementation;
    address private drop1155Implementation;
    event ContractCreated(address creator, address contractAddress);
    constructor() {
        _setupRole(DEFAULT_ADMIN_ROLE, _msgSender());
    }
    function updateDefaultOperatorFilter(
        address newFilter
    ) external onlyRole(DEFAULT_ADMIN_ROLE) {
        DEFAULT_OPERATOR_FILTER = newFilter;
    }
    function update721Implementation(
        address newImplementation
    ) external onlyRole(DEFAULT_ADMIN_ROLE) {
        drop721Implementation = newImplementation;
    }
    function update1155Implementation(
        address newImplementation
    ) external onlyRole(DEFAULT_ADMIN_ROLE) {
        drop1155Implementation = newImplementation;
    }
    function getOperatorFilter() external view returns (address) {
        return DEFAULT_OPERATOR_FILTER;
    }
    function get721ImplementationAddress() external view returns (address) {
        return drop721Implementation;
    }
    function get1155ImplementationAddress() external view returns (address) {
        return drop1155Implementation;
    }
    function deploy721Drop(
        string memory _name,
        string memory _symbol,
        string memory _baseUri,
        RoyaltySettings calldata _royaltySettings,
        PhaseSettings[] calldata _phases,
        BaseSettings calldata _baseSettings,
        PaymentSplitterSettings calldata _paymentSplitterSettings,
        uint256 _maxIntendedSupply,
        bool _registerOperatorFilter,
        bool _allowBurning
    ) external {
        require(drop721Implementation != address(0), "Implementation not set");
        address payable clone = payable(Clones.clone(drop721Implementation));
        address operatorFilter = _registerOperatorFilter
            ? DEFAULT_OPERATOR_FILTER
            : address(0);
        Bueno721Drop(clone).initialize(
            _name,
            _symbol,
            _baseUri,
            _royaltySettings,
            _phases,
            _baseSettings,
            _paymentSplitterSettings,
            _maxIntendedSupply,
            _allowBurning,
            msg.sender,
            operatorFilter
        );
        emit ContractCreated(msg.sender, clone);
    }
    function deploy1155Drop(
        string memory _name,
        string memory _symbol,
        string memory _baseUri,
        TokenSettings[] calldata _tokenSettings,
        RoyaltySettings calldata _royaltySettings,
        PaymentSplitterSettings calldata _paymentSplitterSettings,
        bool _registerOperatorFilter,
        bool _allowBurning
    ) external {
        require(drop1155Implementation != address(0), "Implementation not set");
        address clone = Clones.clone(drop1155Implementation);
        address operatorFilter = _registerOperatorFilter
            ? DEFAULT_OPERATOR_FILTER
            : address(0);
        Bueno1155Drop(clone).initialize(
            _name,
            _symbol,
            _baseUri,
            _tokenSettings,
            _royaltySettings,
            _paymentSplitterSettings,
            _allowBurning,
            msg.sender,
            operatorFilter
        );
        emit ContractCreated(msg.sender, clone);
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.17;
error InvalidPrice();
error SoldOut();
error ExceedMaxPerWallet();
error InvalidProof();
error InvalidMintFunction();
error InvalidAirdrop();
error BurningNotAllowed();
struct PaymentSplitterSettings {
    address[] payees;
    uint256[] shares;
}
struct RoyaltySettings {
    address royaltyAddress;
    uint96 royaltyAmount;
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/**
 * @dev This is a base contract to aid in writing upgradeable diamond facet contracts, or any kind of contract that will be deployed
 * behind a proxy. Since proxied contracts do not make use of a constructor, it's common to move constructor logic to an
 * external initializer function, usually called `initialize`. It then becomes necessary to protect this initializer
 * function so it can only be called once. The {initializer} modifier provided by this contract will have this effect.
 *
 * TIP: To avoid leaving the proxy in an uninitialized state, the initializer function should be called as early as
 * possible by providing the encoded function call as the `_data` argument to {ERC1967Proxy-constructor}.
 *
 * CAUTION: When used with inheritance, manual care must be taken to not invoke a parent initializer twice, or to ensure
 * that all initializers are idempotent. This is not verified automatically as constructors are by Solidity.
 */
import {ERC721A__InitializableStorage} from './ERC721A__InitializableStorage.sol';
abstract contract ERC721A__Initializable {
    using ERC721A__InitializableStorage for ERC721A__InitializableStorage.Layout;
    /**
     * @dev Modifier to protect an initializer function from being invoked twice.
     */
    modifier initializerERC721A() {
        // If the contract is initializing we ignore whether _initialized is set in order to support multiple
        // inheritance patterns, but we only do this in the context of a constructor, because in other contexts the
        // contract may have been reentered.
        require(
            ERC721A__InitializableStorage.layout()._initializing
                ? _isConstructor()
                : !ERC721A__InitializableStorage.layout()._initialized,
            'ERC721A__Initializable: contract is already initialized'
        );
        bool isTopLevelCall = !ERC721A__InitializableStorage.layout()._initializing;
        if (isTopLevelCall) {
            ERC721A__InitializableStorage.layout()._initializing = true;
            ERC721A__InitializableStorage.layout()._initialized = true;
        }
        _;
        if (isTopLevelCall) {
            ERC721A__InitializableStorage.layout()._initializing = false;
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Modifier to protect an initialization function so that it can only be invoked by functions with the
     * {initializer} modifier, directly or indirectly.
     */
    modifier onlyInitializingERC721A() {
        require(
            ERC721A__InitializableStorage.layout()._initializing,
            'ERC721A__Initializable: contract is not initializing'
        );
        _;
    }
    /// @dev Returns true if and only if the function is running in the constructor
    function _isConstructor() private view returns (bool) {
        // extcodesize checks the size of the code stored in an address, and
        // address returns the current address. Since the code is still not
        // deployed when running a constructor, any checks on its code size will
        // yield zero, making it an effective way to detect if a contract is
        // under construction or not.
        address self = address(this);
        uint256 cs;
        assembly {
            cs := extcodesize(self)
        }
        return cs == 0;
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/**
 * @dev This is a base storage for the  initialization function for upgradeable diamond facet contracts
 **/
library ERC721A__InitializableStorage {
    struct Layout {
        /*
         * Indicates that the contract has been initialized.
         */
        bool _initialized;
        /*
         * Indicates that the contract is in the process of being initialized.
         */
        bool _initializing;
    }
    bytes32 internal constant STORAGE_SLOT = keccak256('ERC721A.contracts.storage.initializable.facet');
    function layout() internal pure returns (Layout storage l) {
        bytes32 slot = STORAGE_SLOT;
        assembly {
            l.slot := slot
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
library ERC721AStorage {
    // Bypass for a `--via-ir` bug (https://github.com/chiru-labs/ERC721A/pull/364).
    struct TokenApprovalRef {
        address value;
    }
    struct Layout {
        // =============================================================
        //                            STORAGE
        // =============================================================
        // The next token ID to be minted.
        uint256 _currentIndex;
        // The number of tokens burned.
        uint256 _burnCounter;
        // Token name
        string _name;
        // Token symbol
        string _symbol;
        // Mapping from token ID to ownership details
        // An empty struct value does not necessarily mean the token is unowned.
        // See {_packedOwnershipOf} implementation for details.
        //
        // Bits Layout:
        // - [0..159]   `addr`
        // - [160..223] `startTimestamp`
        // - [224]      `burned`
        // - [225]      `nextInitialized`
        // - [232..255] `extraData`
        mapping(uint256 => uint256) _packedOwnerships;
        // Mapping owner address to address data.
        //
        // Bits Layout:
        // - [0..63]    `balance`
        // - [64..127]  `numberMinted`
        // - [128..191] `numberBurned`
        // - [192..255] `aux`
        mapping(address => uint256) _packedAddressData;
        // Mapping from token ID to approved address.
        mapping(uint256 => ERC721AStorage.TokenApprovalRef) _tokenApprovals;
        // Mapping from owner to operator approvals
        mapping(address => mapping(address => bool)) _operatorApprovals;
    }
    bytes32 internal constant STORAGE_SLOT = keccak256('ERC721A.contracts.storage.ERC721A');
    function layout() internal pure returns (Layout storage l) {
        bytes32 slot = STORAGE_SLOT;
        assembly {
            l.slot := slot
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// ERC721A Contracts v4.2.3
// Creator: Chiru Labs
pragma solidity ^0.8.4;
import './IERC721AUpgradeable.sol';
import {ERC721AStorage} from './ERC721AStorage.sol';
import './ERC721A__Initializable.sol';
/**
 * @dev Interface of ERC721 token receiver.
 */
interface ERC721A__IERC721ReceiverUpgradeable {
    function onERC721Received(
        address operator,
        address from,
        uint256 tokenId,
        bytes calldata data
    ) external returns (bytes4);
}
/**
 * @title ERC721A
 *
 * @dev Implementation of the [ERC721](https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-721)
 * Non-Fungible Token Standard, including the Metadata extension.
 * Optimized for lower gas during batch mints.
 *
 * Token IDs are minted in sequential order (e.g. 0, 1, 2, 3, ...)
 * starting from `_startTokenId()`.
 *
 * Assumptions:
 *
 * - An owner cannot have more than 2**64 - 1 (max value of uint64) of supply.
 * - The maximum token ID cannot exceed 2**256 - 1 (max value of uint256).
 */
contract ERC721AUpgradeable is ERC721A__Initializable, IERC721AUpgradeable {
    using ERC721AStorage for ERC721AStorage.Layout;
    // =============================================================
    //                           CONSTANTS
    // =============================================================
    // Mask of an entry in packed address data.
    uint256 private constant _BITMASK_ADDRESS_DATA_ENTRY = (1 << 64) - 1;
    // The bit position of `numberMinted` in packed address data.
    uint256 private constant _BITPOS_NUMBER_MINTED = 64;
    // The bit position of `numberBurned` in packed address data.
    uint256 private constant _BITPOS_NUMBER_BURNED = 128;
    // The bit position of `aux` in packed address data.
    uint256 private constant _BITPOS_AUX = 192;
    // Mask of all 256 bits in packed address data except the 64 bits for `aux`.
    uint256 private constant _BITMASK_AUX_COMPLEMENT = (1 << 192) - 1;
    // The bit position of `startTimestamp` in packed ownership.
    uint256 private constant _BITPOS_START_TIMESTAMP = 160;
    // The bit mask of the `burned` bit in packed ownership.
    uint256 private constant _BITMASK_BURNED = 1 << 224;
    // The bit position of the `nextInitialized` bit in packed ownership.
    uint256 private constant _BITPOS_NEXT_INITIALIZED = 225;
    // The bit mask of the `nextInitialized` bit in packed ownership.
    uint256 private constant _BITMASK_NEXT_INITIALIZED = 1 << 225;
    // The bit position of `extraData` in packed ownership.
    uint256 private constant _BITPOS_EXTRA_DATA = 232;
    // Mask of all 256 bits in a packed ownership except the 24 bits for `extraData`.
    uint256 private constant _BITMASK_EXTRA_DATA_COMPLEMENT = (1 << 232) - 1;
    // The mask of the lower 160 bits for addresses.
    uint256 private constant _BITMASK_ADDRESS = (1 << 160) - 1;
    // The maximum `quantity` that can be minted with {_mintERC2309}.
    // This limit is to prevent overflows on the address data entries.
    // For a limit of 5000, a total of 3.689e15 calls to {_mintERC2309}
    // is required to cause an overflow, which is unrealistic.
    uint256 private constant _MAX_MINT_ERC2309_QUANTITY_LIMIT = 5000;
    // The `Transfer` event signature is given by:
    // `keccak256(bytes("Transfer(address,address,uint256)"))`.
    bytes32 private constant _TRANSFER_EVENT_SIGNATURE =
        0xddf252ad1be2c89b69c2b068fc378daa952ba7f163c4a11628f55a4df523b3ef;
    // =============================================================
    //                          CONSTRUCTOR
    // =============================================================
    function __ERC721A_init(string memory name_, string memory symbol_) internal onlyInitializingERC721A {
        __ERC721A_init_unchained(name_, symbol_);
    }
    function __ERC721A_init_unchained(string memory name_, string memory symbol_) internal onlyInitializingERC721A {
        ERC721AStorage.layout()._name = name_;
        ERC721AStorage.layout()._symbol = symbol_;
        ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex = _startTokenId();
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                   TOKEN COUNTING OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Returns the starting token ID.
     * To change the starting token ID, please override this function.
     */
    function _startTokenId() internal view virtual returns (uint256) {
        return 0;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the next token ID to be minted.
     */
    function _nextTokenId() internal view virtual returns (uint256) {
        return ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the total number of tokens in existence.
     * Burned tokens will reduce the count.
     * To get the total number of tokens minted, please see {_totalMinted}.
     */
    function totalSupply() public view virtual override returns (uint256) {
        // Counter underflow is impossible as _burnCounter cannot be incremented
        // more than `_currentIndex - _startTokenId()` times.
        unchecked {
            return ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex - ERC721AStorage.layout()._burnCounter - _startTokenId();
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the total amount of tokens minted in the contract.
     */
    function _totalMinted() internal view virtual returns (uint256) {
        // Counter underflow is impossible as `_currentIndex` does not decrement,
        // and it is initialized to `_startTokenId()`.
        unchecked {
            return ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex - _startTokenId();
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the total number of tokens burned.
     */
    function _totalBurned() internal view virtual returns (uint256) {
        return ERC721AStorage.layout()._burnCounter;
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                    ADDRESS DATA OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Returns the number of tokens in `owner`'s account.
     */
    function balanceOf(address owner) public view virtual override returns (uint256) {
        if (owner == address(0)) revert BalanceQueryForZeroAddress();
        return ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[owner] & _BITMASK_ADDRESS_DATA_ENTRY;
    }
    /**
     * Returns the number of tokens minted by `owner`.
     */
    function _numberMinted(address owner) internal view returns (uint256) {
        return
            (ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[owner] >> _BITPOS_NUMBER_MINTED) & _BITMASK_ADDRESS_DATA_ENTRY;
    }
    /**
     * Returns the number of tokens burned by or on behalf of `owner`.
     */
    function _numberBurned(address owner) internal view returns (uint256) {
        return
            (ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[owner] >> _BITPOS_NUMBER_BURNED) & _BITMASK_ADDRESS_DATA_ENTRY;
    }
    /**
     * Returns the auxiliary data for `owner`. (e.g. number of whitelist mint slots used).
     */
    function _getAux(address owner) internal view returns (uint64) {
        return uint64(ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[owner] >> _BITPOS_AUX);
    }
    /**
     * Sets the auxiliary data for `owner`. (e.g. number of whitelist mint slots used).
     * If there are multiple variables, please pack them into a uint64.
     */
    function _setAux(address owner, uint64 aux) internal virtual {
        uint256 packed = ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[owner];
        uint256 auxCasted;
        // Cast `aux` with assembly to avoid redundant masking.
        assembly {
            auxCasted := aux
        }
        packed = (packed & _BITMASK_AUX_COMPLEMENT) | (auxCasted << _BITPOS_AUX);
        ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[owner] = packed;
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                            IERC165
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Returns true if this contract implements the interface defined by
     * `interfaceId`. See the corresponding
     * [EIP section](https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-165#how-interfaces-are-identified)
     * to learn more about how these ids are created.
     *
     * This function call must use less than 30000 gas.
     */
    function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId) public view virtual override returns (bool) {
        // The interface IDs are constants representing the first 4 bytes
        // of the XOR of all function selectors in the interface.
        // See: [ERC165](https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-165)
        // (e.g. `bytes4(i.functionA.selector ^ i.functionB.selector ^ ...)`)
        return
            interfaceId == 0x01ffc9a7 || // ERC165 interface ID for ERC165.
            interfaceId == 0x80ac58cd || // ERC165 interface ID for ERC721.
            interfaceId == 0x5b5e139f; // ERC165 interface ID for ERC721Metadata.
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                        IERC721Metadata
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Returns the token collection name.
     */
    function name() public view virtual override returns (string memory) {
        return ERC721AStorage.layout()._name;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the token collection symbol.
     */
    function symbol() public view virtual override returns (string memory) {
        return ERC721AStorage.layout()._symbol;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the Uniform Resource Identifier (URI) for `tokenId` token.
     */
    function tokenURI(uint256 tokenId) public view virtual override returns (string memory) {
        if (!_exists(tokenId)) revert URIQueryForNonexistentToken();
        string memory baseURI = _baseURI();
        return bytes(baseURI).length != 0 ? string(abi.encodePacked(baseURI, _toString(tokenId))) : '';
    }
    /**
     * @dev Base URI for computing {tokenURI}. If set, the resulting URI for each
     * token will be the concatenation of the `baseURI` and the `tokenId`. Empty
     * by default, it can be overridden in child contracts.
     */
    function _baseURI() internal view virtual returns (string memory) {
        return '';
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                     OWNERSHIPS OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Returns the owner of the `tokenId` token.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `tokenId` must exist.
     */
    function ownerOf(uint256 tokenId) public view virtual override returns (address) {
        return address(uint160(_packedOwnershipOf(tokenId)));
    }
    /**
     * @dev Gas spent here starts off proportional to the maximum mint batch size.
     * It gradually moves to O(1) as tokens get transferred around over time.
     */
    function _ownershipOf(uint256 tokenId) internal view virtual returns (TokenOwnership memory) {
        return _unpackedOwnership(_packedOwnershipOf(tokenId));
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the unpacked `TokenOwnership` struct at `index`.
     */
    function _ownershipAt(uint256 index) internal view virtual returns (TokenOwnership memory) {
        return _unpackedOwnership(ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[index]);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Initializes the ownership slot minted at `index` for efficiency purposes.
     */
    function _initializeOwnershipAt(uint256 index) internal virtual {
        if (ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[index] == 0) {
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[index] = _packedOwnershipOf(index);
        }
    }
    /**
     * Returns the packed ownership data of `tokenId`.
     */
    function _packedOwnershipOf(uint256 tokenId) private view returns (uint256 packed) {
        if (_startTokenId() <= tokenId) {
            packed = ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[tokenId];
            // If not burned.
            if (packed & _BITMASK_BURNED == 0) {
                // If the data at the starting slot does not exist, start the scan.
                if (packed == 0) {
                    if (tokenId >= ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex) revert OwnerQueryForNonexistentToken();
                    // Invariant:
                    // There will always be an initialized ownership slot
                    // (i.e. `ownership.addr != address(0) && ownership.burned == false`)
                    // before an unintialized ownership slot
                    // (i.e. `ownership.addr == address(0) && ownership.burned == false`)
                    // Hence, `tokenId` will not underflow.
                    //
                    // We can directly compare the packed value.
                    // If the address is zero, packed will be zero.
                    for (;;) {
                        unchecked {
                            packed = ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[--tokenId];
                        }
                        if (packed == 0) continue;
                        return packed;
                    }
                }
                // Otherwise, the data exists and is not burned. We can skip the scan.
                // This is possible because we have already achieved the target condition.
                // This saves 2143 gas on transfers of initialized tokens.
                return packed;
            }
        }
        revert OwnerQueryForNonexistentToken();
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the unpacked `TokenOwnership` struct from `packed`.
     */
    function _unpackedOwnership(uint256 packed) private pure returns (TokenOwnership memory ownership) {
        ownership.addr = address(uint160(packed));
        ownership.startTimestamp = uint64(packed >> _BITPOS_START_TIMESTAMP);
        ownership.burned = packed & _BITMASK_BURNED != 0;
        ownership.extraData = uint24(packed >> _BITPOS_EXTRA_DATA);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Packs ownership data into a single uint256.
     */
    function _packOwnershipData(address owner, uint256 flags) private view returns (uint256 result) {
        assembly {
            // Mask `owner` to the lower 160 bits, in case the upper bits somehow aren't clean.
            owner := and(owner, _BITMASK_ADDRESS)
            // `owner | (block.timestamp << _BITPOS_START_TIMESTAMP) | flags`.
            result := or(owner, or(shl(_BITPOS_START_TIMESTAMP, timestamp()), flags))
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the `nextInitialized` flag set if `quantity` equals 1.
     */
    function _nextInitializedFlag(uint256 quantity) private pure returns (uint256 result) {
        // For branchless setting of the `nextInitialized` flag.
        assembly {
            // `(quantity == 1) << _BITPOS_NEXT_INITIALIZED`.
            result := shl(_BITPOS_NEXT_INITIALIZED, eq(quantity, 1))
        }
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                      APPROVAL OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Gives permission to `to` to transfer `tokenId` token to another account. See {ERC721A-_approve}.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - The caller must own the token or be an approved operator.
     */
    function approve(address to, uint256 tokenId) public payable virtual override {
        _approve(to, tokenId, true);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the account approved for `tokenId` token.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `tokenId` must exist.
     */
    function getApproved(uint256 tokenId) public view virtual override returns (address) {
        if (!_exists(tokenId)) revert ApprovalQueryForNonexistentToken();
        return ERC721AStorage.layout()._tokenApprovals[tokenId].value;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Approve or remove `operator` as an operator for the caller.
     * Operators can call {transferFrom} or {safeTransferFrom}
     * for any token owned by the caller.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - The `operator` cannot be the caller.
     *
     * Emits an {ApprovalForAll} event.
     */
    function setApprovalForAll(address operator, bool approved) public virtual override {
        ERC721AStorage.layout()._operatorApprovals[_msgSenderERC721A()][operator] = approved;
        emit ApprovalForAll(_msgSenderERC721A(), operator, approved);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns if the `operator` is allowed to manage all of the assets of `owner`.
     *
     * See {setApprovalForAll}.
     */
    function isApprovedForAll(address owner, address operator) public view virtual override returns (bool) {
        return ERC721AStorage.layout()._operatorApprovals[owner][operator];
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns whether `tokenId` exists.
     *
     * Tokens can be managed by their owner or approved accounts via {approve} or {setApprovalForAll}.
     *
     * Tokens start existing when they are minted. See {_mint}.
     */
    function _exists(uint256 tokenId) internal view virtual returns (bool) {
        return
            _startTokenId() <= tokenId &&
            tokenId < ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex && // If within bounds,
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[tokenId] & _BITMASK_BURNED == 0; // and not burned.
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns whether `msgSender` is equal to `approvedAddress` or `owner`.
     */
    function _isSenderApprovedOrOwner(
        address approvedAddress,
        address owner,
        address msgSender
    ) private pure returns (bool result) {
        assembly {
            // Mask `owner` to the lower 160 bits, in case the upper bits somehow aren't clean.
            owner := and(owner, _BITMASK_ADDRESS)
            // Mask `msgSender` to the lower 160 bits, in case the upper bits somehow aren't clean.
            msgSender := and(msgSender, _BITMASK_ADDRESS)
            // `msgSender == owner || msgSender == approvedAddress`.
            result := or(eq(msgSender, owner), eq(msgSender, approvedAddress))
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the storage slot and value for the approved address of `tokenId`.
     */
    function _getApprovedSlotAndAddress(uint256 tokenId)
        private
        view
        returns (uint256 approvedAddressSlot, address approvedAddress)
    {
        ERC721AStorage.TokenApprovalRef storage tokenApproval = ERC721AStorage.layout()._tokenApprovals[tokenId];
        // The following is equivalent to `approvedAddress = _tokenApprovals[tokenId].value`.
        assembly {
            approvedAddressSlot := tokenApproval.slot
            approvedAddress := sload(approvedAddressSlot)
        }
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                      TRANSFER OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Transfers `tokenId` from `from` to `to`.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `from` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `tokenId` token must be owned by `from`.
     * - If the caller is not `from`, it must be approved to move this token
     * by either {approve} or {setApprovalForAll}.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event.
     */
    function transferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId
    ) public payable virtual override {
        uint256 prevOwnershipPacked = _packedOwnershipOf(tokenId);
        if (address(uint160(prevOwnershipPacked)) != from) revert TransferFromIncorrectOwner();
        (uint256 approvedAddressSlot, address approvedAddress) = _getApprovedSlotAndAddress(tokenId);
        // The nested ifs save around 20+ gas over a compound boolean condition.
        if (!_isSenderApprovedOrOwner(approvedAddress, from, _msgSenderERC721A()))
            if (!isApprovedForAll(from, _msgSenderERC721A())) revert TransferCallerNotOwnerNorApproved();
        if (to == address(0)) revert TransferToZeroAddress();
        _beforeTokenTransfers(from, to, tokenId, 1);
        // Clear approvals from the previous owner.
        assembly {
            if approvedAddress {
                // This is equivalent to `delete _tokenApprovals[tokenId]`.
                sstore(approvedAddressSlot, 0)
            }
        }
        // Underflow of the sender's balance is impossible because we check for
        // ownership above and the recipient's balance can't realistically overflow.
        // Counter overflow is incredibly unrealistic as `tokenId` would have to be 2**256.
        unchecked {
            // We can directly increment and decrement the balances.
            --ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[from]; // Updates: `balance -= 1`.
            ++ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[to]; // Updates: `balance += 1`.
            // Updates:
            // - `address` to the next owner.
            // - `startTimestamp` to the timestamp of transfering.
            // - `burned` to `false`.
            // - `nextInitialized` to `true`.
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[tokenId] = _packOwnershipData(
                to,
                _BITMASK_NEXT_INITIALIZED | _nextExtraData(from, to, prevOwnershipPacked)
            );
            // If the next slot may not have been initialized (i.e. `nextInitialized == false`) .
            if (prevOwnershipPacked & _BITMASK_NEXT_INITIALIZED == 0) {
                uint256 nextTokenId = tokenId + 1;
                // If the next slot's address is zero and not burned (i.e. packed value is zero).
                if (ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[nextTokenId] == 0) {
                    // If the next slot is within bounds.
                    if (nextTokenId != ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex) {
                        // Initialize the next slot to maintain correctness for `ownerOf(tokenId + 1)`.
                        ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[nextTokenId] = prevOwnershipPacked;
                    }
                }
            }
        }
        emit Transfer(from, to, tokenId);
        _afterTokenTransfers(from, to, tokenId, 1);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Equivalent to `safeTransferFrom(from, to, tokenId, '')`.
     */
    function safeTransferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId
    ) public payable virtual override {
        safeTransferFrom(from, to, tokenId, '');
    }
    /**
     * @dev Safely transfers `tokenId` token from `from` to `to`.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `from` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `tokenId` token must exist and be owned by `from`.
     * - If the caller is not `from`, it must be approved to move this token
     * by either {approve} or {setApprovalForAll}.
     * - If `to` refers to a smart contract, it must implement
     * {IERC721Receiver-onERC721Received}, which is called upon a safe transfer.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event.
     */
    function safeTransferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId,
        bytes memory _data
    ) public payable virtual override {
        transferFrom(from, to, tokenId);
        if (to.code.length != 0)
            if (!_checkContractOnERC721Received(from, to, tokenId, _data)) {
                revert TransferToNonERC721ReceiverImplementer();
            }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Hook that is called before a set of serially-ordered token IDs
     * are about to be transferred. This includes minting.
     * And also called before burning one token.
     *
     * `startTokenId` - the first token ID to be transferred.
     * `quantity` - the amount to be transferred.
     *
     * Calling conditions:
     *
     * - When `from` and `to` are both non-zero, `from`'s `tokenId` will be
     * transferred to `to`.
     * - When `from` is zero, `tokenId` will be minted for `to`.
     * - When `to` is zero, `tokenId` will be burned by `from`.
     * - `from` and `to` are never both zero.
     */
    function _beforeTokenTransfers(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 startTokenId,
        uint256 quantity
    ) internal virtual {}
    /**
     * @dev Hook that is called after a set of serially-ordered token IDs
     * have been transferred. This includes minting.
     * And also called after one token has been burned.
     *
     * `startTokenId` - the first token ID to be transferred.
     * `quantity` - the amount to be transferred.
     *
     * Calling conditions:
     *
     * - When `from` and `to` are both non-zero, `from`'s `tokenId` has been
     * transferred to `to`.
     * - When `from` is zero, `tokenId` has been minted for `to`.
     * - When `to` is zero, `tokenId` has been burned by `from`.
     * - `from` and `to` are never both zero.
     */
    function _afterTokenTransfers(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 startTokenId,
        uint256 quantity
    ) internal virtual {}
    /**
     * @dev Private function to invoke {IERC721Receiver-onERC721Received} on a target contract.
     *
     * `from` - Previous owner of the given token ID.
     * `to` - Target address that will receive the token.
     * `tokenId` - Token ID to be transferred.
     * `_data` - Optional data to send along with the call.
     *
     * Returns whether the call correctly returned the expected magic value.
     */
    function _checkContractOnERC721Received(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId,
        bytes memory _data
    ) private returns (bool) {
        try
            ERC721A__IERC721ReceiverUpgradeable(to).onERC721Received(_msgSenderERC721A(), from, tokenId, _data)
        returns (bytes4 retval) {
            return retval == ERC721A__IERC721ReceiverUpgradeable(to).onERC721Received.selector;
        } catch (bytes memory reason) {
            if (reason.length == 0) {
                revert TransferToNonERC721ReceiverImplementer();
            } else {
                assembly {
                    revert(add(32, reason), mload(reason))
                }
            }
        }
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                        MINT OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Mints `quantity` tokens and transfers them to `to`.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `quantity` must be greater than 0.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event for each mint.
     */
    function _mint(address to, uint256 quantity) internal virtual {
        uint256 startTokenId = ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex;
        if (quantity == 0) revert MintZeroQuantity();
        _beforeTokenTransfers(address(0), to, startTokenId, quantity);
        // Overflows are incredibly unrealistic.
        // `balance` and `numberMinted` have a maximum limit of 2**64.
        // `tokenId` has a maximum limit of 2**256.
        unchecked {
            // Updates:
            // - `balance += quantity`.
            // - `numberMinted += quantity`.
            //
            // We can directly add to the `balance` and `numberMinted`.
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[to] += quantity * ((1 << _BITPOS_NUMBER_MINTED) | 1);
            // Updates:
            // - `address` to the owner.
            // - `startTimestamp` to the timestamp of minting.
            // - `burned` to `false`.
            // - `nextInitialized` to `quantity == 1`.
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[startTokenId] = _packOwnershipData(
                to,
                _nextInitializedFlag(quantity) | _nextExtraData(address(0), to, 0)
            );
            uint256 toMasked;
            uint256 end = startTokenId + quantity;
            // Use assembly to loop and emit the `Transfer` event for gas savings.
            // The duplicated `log4` removes an extra check and reduces stack juggling.
            // The assembly, together with the surrounding Solidity code, have been
            // delicately arranged to nudge the compiler into producing optimized opcodes.
            assembly {
                // Mask `to` to the lower 160 bits, in case the upper bits somehow aren't clean.
                toMasked := and(to, _BITMASK_ADDRESS)
                // Emit the `Transfer` event.
                log4(
                    0, // Start of data (0, since no data).
                    0, // End of data (0, since no data).
                    _TRANSFER_EVENT_SIGNATURE, // Signature.
                    0, // `address(0)`.
                    toMasked, // `to`.
                    startTokenId // `tokenId`.
                )
                // The `iszero(eq(,))` check ensures that large values of `quantity`
                // that overflows uint256 will make the loop run out of gas.
                // The compiler will optimize the `iszero` away for performance.
                for {
                    let tokenId := add(startTokenId, 1)
                } iszero(eq(tokenId, end)) {
                    tokenId := add(tokenId, 1)
                } {
                    // Emit the `Transfer` event. Similar to above.
                    log4(0, 0, _TRANSFER_EVENT_SIGNATURE, 0, toMasked, tokenId)
                }
            }
            if (toMasked == 0) revert MintToZeroAddress();
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex = end;
        }
        _afterTokenTransfers(address(0), to, startTokenId, quantity);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Mints `quantity` tokens and transfers them to `to`.
     *
     * This function is intended for efficient minting only during contract creation.
     *
     * It emits only one {ConsecutiveTransfer} as defined in
     * [ERC2309](https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-2309),
     * instead of a sequence of {Transfer} event(s).
     *
     * Calling this function outside of contract creation WILL make your contract
     * non-compliant with the ERC721 standard.
     * For full ERC721 compliance, substituting ERC721 {Transfer} event(s) with the ERC2309
     * {ConsecutiveTransfer} event is only permissible during contract creation.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `quantity` must be greater than 0.
     *
     * Emits a {ConsecutiveTransfer} event.
     */
    function _mintERC2309(address to, uint256 quantity) internal virtual {
        uint256 startTokenId = ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex;
        if (to == address(0)) revert MintToZeroAddress();
        if (quantity == 0) revert MintZeroQuantity();
        if (quantity > _MAX_MINT_ERC2309_QUANTITY_LIMIT) revert MintERC2309QuantityExceedsLimit();
        _beforeTokenTransfers(address(0), to, startTokenId, quantity);
        // Overflows are unrealistic due to the above check for `quantity` to be below the limit.
        unchecked {
            // Updates:
            // - `balance += quantity`.
            // - `numberMinted += quantity`.
            //
            // We can directly add to the `balance` and `numberMinted`.
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[to] += quantity * ((1 << _BITPOS_NUMBER_MINTED) | 1);
            // Updates:
            // - `address` to the owner.
            // - `startTimestamp` to the timestamp of minting.
            // - `burned` to `false`.
            // - `nextInitialized` to `quantity == 1`.
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[startTokenId] = _packOwnershipData(
                to,
                _nextInitializedFlag(quantity) | _nextExtraData(address(0), to, 0)
            );
            emit ConsecutiveTransfer(startTokenId, startTokenId + quantity - 1, address(0), to);
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex = startTokenId + quantity;
        }
        _afterTokenTransfers(address(0), to, startTokenId, quantity);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Safely mints `quantity` tokens and transfers them to `to`.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - If `to` refers to a smart contract, it must implement
     * {IERC721Receiver-onERC721Received}, which is called for each safe transfer.
     * - `quantity` must be greater than 0.
     *
     * See {_mint}.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event for each mint.
     */
    function _safeMint(
        address to,
        uint256 quantity,
        bytes memory _data
    ) internal virtual {
        _mint(to, quantity);
        unchecked {
            if (to.code.length != 0) {
                uint256 end = ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex;
                uint256 index = end - quantity;
                do {
                    if (!_checkContractOnERC721Received(address(0), to, index++, _data)) {
                        revert TransferToNonERC721ReceiverImplementer();
                    }
                } while (index < end);
                // Reentrancy protection.
                if (ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex != end) revert();
            }
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Equivalent to `_safeMint(to, quantity, '')`.
     */
    function _safeMint(address to, uint256 quantity) internal virtual {
        _safeMint(to, quantity, '');
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                       APPROVAL OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Equivalent to `_approve(to, tokenId, false)`.
     */
    function _approve(address to, uint256 tokenId) internal virtual {
        _approve(to, tokenId, false);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Gives permission to `to` to transfer `tokenId` token to another account.
     * The approval is cleared when the token is transferred.
     *
     * Only a single account can be approved at a time, so approving the
     * zero address clears previous approvals.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `tokenId` must exist.
     *
     * Emits an {Approval} event.
     */
    function _approve(
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId,
        bool approvalCheck
    ) internal virtual {
        address owner = ownerOf(tokenId);
        if (approvalCheck)
            if (_msgSenderERC721A() != owner)
                if (!isApprovedForAll(owner, _msgSenderERC721A())) {
                    revert ApprovalCallerNotOwnerNorApproved();
                }
        ERC721AStorage.layout()._tokenApprovals[tokenId].value = to;
        emit Approval(owner, to, tokenId);
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                        BURN OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Equivalent to `_burn(tokenId, false)`.
     */
    function _burn(uint256 tokenId) internal virtual {
        _burn(tokenId, false);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Destroys `tokenId`.
     * The approval is cleared when the token is burned.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `tokenId` must exist.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event.
     */
    function _burn(uint256 tokenId, bool approvalCheck) internal virtual {
        uint256 prevOwnershipPacked = _packedOwnershipOf(tokenId);
        address from = address(uint160(prevOwnershipPacked));
        (uint256 approvedAddressSlot, address approvedAddress) = _getApprovedSlotAndAddress(tokenId);
        if (approvalCheck) {
            // The nested ifs save around 20+ gas over a compound boolean condition.
            if (!_isSenderApprovedOrOwner(approvedAddress, from, _msgSenderERC721A()))
                if (!isApprovedForAll(from, _msgSenderERC721A())) revert TransferCallerNotOwnerNorApproved();
        }
        _beforeTokenTransfers(from, address(0), tokenId, 1);
        // Clear approvals from the previous owner.
        assembly {
            if approvedAddress {
                // This is equivalent to `delete _tokenApprovals[tokenId]`.
                sstore(approvedAddressSlot, 0)
            }
        }
        // Underflow of the sender's balance is impossible because we check for
        // ownership above and the recipient's balance can't realistically overflow.
        // Counter overflow is incredibly unrealistic as `tokenId` would have to be 2**256.
        unchecked {
            // Updates:
            // - `balance -= 1`.
            // - `numberBurned += 1`.
            //
            // We can directly decrement the balance, and increment the number burned.
            // This is equivalent to `packed -= 1; packed += 1 << _BITPOS_NUMBER_BURNED;`.
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[from] += (1 << _BITPOS_NUMBER_BURNED) - 1;
            // Updates:
            // - `address` to the last owner.
            // - `startTimestamp` to the timestamp of burning.
            // - `burned` to `true`.
            // - `nextInitialized` to `true`.
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[tokenId] = _packOwnershipData(
                from,
                (_BITMASK_BURNED | _BITMASK_NEXT_INITIALIZED) | _nextExtraData(from, address(0), prevOwnershipPacked)
            );
            // If the next slot may not have been initialized (i.e. `nextInitialized == false`) .
            if (prevOwnershipPacked & _BITMASK_NEXT_INITIALIZED == 0) {
                uint256 nextTokenId = tokenId + 1;
                // If the next slot's address is zero and not burned (i.e. packed value is zero).
                if (ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[nextTokenId] == 0) {
                    // If the next slot is within bounds.
                    if (nextTokenId != ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex) {
                        // Initialize the next slot to maintain correctness for `ownerOf(tokenId + 1)`.
                        ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[nextTokenId] = prevOwnershipPacked;
                    }
                }
            }
        }
        emit Transfer(from, address(0), tokenId);
        _afterTokenTransfers(from, address(0), tokenId, 1);
        // Overflow not possible, as _burnCounter cannot be exceed _currentIndex times.
        unchecked {
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._burnCounter++;
        }
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                     EXTRA DATA OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Directly sets the extra data for the ownership data `index`.
     */
    function _setExtraDataAt(uint256 index, uint24 extraData) internal virtual {
        uint256 packed = ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[index];
        if (packed == 0) revert OwnershipNotInitializedForExtraData();
        uint256 extraDataCasted;
        // Cast `extraData` with assembly to avoid redundant masking.
        assembly {
            extraDataCasted := extraData
        }
        packed = (packed & _BITMASK_EXTRA_DATA_COMPLEMENT) | (extraDataCasted << _BITPOS_EXTRA_DATA);
        ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[index] = packed;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Called during each token transfer to set the 24bit `extraData` field.
     * Intended to be overridden by the cosumer contract.
     *
     * `previousExtraData` - the value of `extraData` before transfer.
     *
     * Calling conditions:
     *
     * - When `from` and `to` are both non-zero, `from`'s `tokenId` will be
     * transferred to `to`.
     * - When `from` is zero, `tokenId` will be minted for `to`.
     * - When `to` is zero, `tokenId` will be burned by `from`.
     * - `from` and `to` are never both zero.
     */
    function _extraData(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint24 previousExtraData
    ) internal view virtual returns (uint24) {}
    /**
     * @dev Returns the next extra data for the packed ownership data.
     * The returned result is shifted into position.
     */
    function _nextExtraData(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 prevOwnershipPacked
    ) private view returns (uint256) {
        uint24 extraData = uint24(prevOwnershipPacked >> _BITPOS_EXTRA_DATA);
        return uint256(_extraData(from, to, extraData)) << _BITPOS_EXTRA_DATA;
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                       OTHER OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Returns the message sender (defaults to `msg.sender`).
     *
     * If you are writing GSN compatible contracts, you need to override this function.
     */
    function _msgSenderERC721A() internal view virtual returns (address) {
        return msg.sender;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Converts a uint256 to its ASCII string decimal representation.
     */
    function _toString(uint256 value) internal pure virtual returns (string memory str) {
        assembly {
            // The maximum value of a uint256 contains 78 digits (1 byte per digit), but
            // we allocate 0xa0 bytes to keep the free memory pointer 32-byte word aligned.
            // We will need 1 word for the trailing zeros padding, 1 word for the length,
            // and 3 words for a maximum of 78 digits. Total: 5 * 0x20 = 0xa0.
            let m := add(mload(0x40), 0xa0)
            // Update the free memory pointer to allocate.
            mstore(0x40, m)
            // Assign the `str` to the end.
            str := sub(m, 0x20)
            // Zeroize the slot after the string.
            mstore(str, 0)
            // Cache the end of the memory to calculate the length later.
            let end := str
            // We write the string from rightmost digit to leftmost digit.
            // The following is essentially a do-while loop that also handles the zero case.
            // prettier-ignore
            for { let temp := value } 1 {} {
                str := sub(str, 1)
                // Write the character to the pointer.
                // The ASCII index of the '0' character is 48.
                mstore8(str, add(48, mod(temp, 10)))
                // Keep dividing `temp` until zero.
                temp := div(temp, 10)
                // prettier-ignore
                if iszero(temp) { break }
            }
            let length := sub(end, str)
            // Move the pointer 32 bytes leftwards to make room for the length.
            str := sub(str, 0x20)
            // Store the length.
            mstore(str, length)
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// ERC721A Contracts v4.2.3
// Creator: Chiru Labs
pragma solidity ^0.8.4;
import './IERC721AQueryableUpgradeable.sol';
import '../ERC721AUpgradeable.sol';
import '../ERC721A__Initializable.sol';
/**
 * @title ERC721AQueryable.
 *
 * @dev ERC721A subclass with convenience query functions.
 */
abstract contract ERC721AQueryableUpgradeable is
    ERC721A__Initializable,
    ERC721AUpgradeable,
    IERC721AQueryableUpgradeable
{
    function __ERC721AQueryable_init() internal onlyInitializingERC721A {
        __ERC721AQueryable_init_unchained();
    }
    function __ERC721AQueryable_init_unchained() internal onlyInitializingERC721A {}
    /**
     * @dev Returns the `TokenOwnership` struct at `tokenId` without reverting.
     *
     * If the `tokenId` is out of bounds:
     *
     * - `addr = address(0)`
     * - `startTimestamp = 0`
     * - `burned = false`
     * - `extraData = 0`
     *
     * If the `tokenId` is burned:
     *
     * - `addr = <Address of owner before token was burned>`
     * - `startTimestamp = <Timestamp when token was burned>`
     * - `burned = true`
     * - `extraData = <Extra data when token was burned>`
     *
     * Otherwise:
     *
     * - `addr = <Address of owner>`
     * - `startTimestamp = <Timestamp of start of ownership>`
     * - `burned = false`
     * - `extraData = <Extra data at start of ownership>`
     */
    function explicitOwnershipOf(uint256 tokenId) public view virtual override returns (TokenOwnership memory) {
        TokenOwnership memory ownership;
        if (tokenId < _startTokenId() || tokenId >= _nextTokenId()) {
            return ownership;
        }
        ownership = _ownershipAt(tokenId);
        if (ownership.burned) {
            return ownership;
        }
        return _ownershipOf(tokenId);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns an array of `TokenOwnership` structs at `tokenIds` in order.
     * See {ERC721AQueryable-explicitOwnershipOf}
     */
    function explicitOwnershipsOf(uint256[] calldata tokenIds)
        external
        view
        virtual
        override
        returns (TokenOwnership[] memory)
    {
        unchecked {
            uint256 tokenIdsLength = tokenIds.length;
            TokenOwnership[] memory ownerships = new TokenOwnership[](tokenIdsLength);
            for (uint256 i; i != tokenIdsLength; ++i) {
                ownerships[i] = explicitOwnershipOf(tokenIds[i]);
            }
            return ownerships;
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns an array of token IDs owned by `owner`,
     * in the range [`start`, `stop`)
     * (i.e. `start <= tokenId < stop`).
     *
     * This function allows for tokens to be queried if the collection
     * grows too big for a single call of {ERC721AQueryable-tokensOfOwner}.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `start < stop`
     */
    function tokensOfOwnerIn(
        address owner,
        uint256 start,
        uint256 stop
    ) external view virtual override returns (uint256[] memory) {
        unchecked {
            if (start >= stop) revert InvalidQueryRange();
            uint256 tokenIdsIdx;
            uint256 stopLimit = _nextTokenId();
            // Set `start = max(start, _startTokenId())`.
            if (start < _startTokenId()) {
                start = _startTokenId();
            }
            // Set `stop = min(stop, stopLimit)`.
            if (stop > stopLimit) {
                stop = stopLimit;
            }
            uint256 tokenIdsMaxLength = balanceOf(owner);
            // Set `tokenIdsMaxLength = min(balanceOf(owner), stop - start)`,
            // to cater for cases where `balanceOf(owner)` is too big.
            if (start < stop) {
                uint256 rangeLength = stop - start;
                if (rangeLength < tokenIdsMaxLength) {
                    tokenIdsMaxLength = rangeLength;
                }
            } else {
                tokenIdsMaxLength = 0;
            }
            uint256[] memory tokenIds = new uint256[](tokenIdsMaxLength);
            if (tokenIdsMaxLength == 0) {
                return tokenIds;
            }
            // We need to call `explicitOwnershipOf(start)`,
            // because the slot at `start` may not be initialized.
            TokenOwnership memory ownership = explicitOwnershipOf(start);
            address currOwnershipAddr;
            // If the starting slot exists (i.e. not burned), initialize `currOwnershipAddr`.
            // `ownership.address` will not be zero, as `start` is clamped to the valid token ID range.
            if (!ownership.burned) {
                currOwnershipAddr = ownership.addr;
            }
            for (uint256 i = start; i != stop && tokenIdsIdx != tokenIdsMaxLength; ++i) {
                ownership = _ownershipAt(i);
                if (ownership.burned) {
                    continue;
                }
                if (ownership.addr != address(0)) {
                    currOwnershipAddr = ownership.addr;
                }
                if (currOwnershipAddr == owner) {
                    tokenIds[tokenIdsIdx++] = i;
                }
            }
            // Downsize the array to fit.
            assembly {
                mstore(tokenIds, tokenIdsIdx)
            }
            return tokenIds;
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns an array of token IDs owned by `owner`.
     *
     * This function scans the ownership mapping and is O(`totalSupply`) in complexity.
     * It is meant to be called off-chain.
     *
     * See {ERC721AQueryable-tokensOfOwnerIn} for splitting the scan into
     * multiple smaller scans if the collection is large enough to cause
     * an out-of-gas error (10K collections should be fine).
     */
    function tokensOfOwner(address owner) external view virtual override returns (uint256[] memory) {
        unchecked {
            uint256 tokenIdsIdx;
            address currOwnershipAddr;
            uint256 tokenIdsLength = balanceOf(owner);
            uint256[] memory tokenIds = new uint256[](tokenIdsLength);
            TokenOwnership memory ownership;
            for (uint256 i = _startTokenId(); tokenIdsIdx != tokenIdsLength; ++i) {
                ownership = _ownershipAt(i);
                if (ownership.burned) {
                    continue;
                }
                if (ownership.addr != address(0)) {
                    currOwnershipAddr = ownership.addr;
                }
                if (currOwnershipAddr == owner) {
                    tokenIds[tokenIdsIdx++] = i;
                }
            }
            return tokenIds;
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// ERC721A Contracts v4.2.3
// Creator: Chiru Labs
pragma solidity ^0.8.4;
import '../IERC721AUpgradeable.sol';
/**
 * @dev Interface of ERC721AQueryable.
 */
interface IERC721AQueryableUpgradeable is IERC721AUpgradeable {
    /**
     * Invalid query range (`start` >= `stop`).
     */
    error InvalidQueryRange();
    /**
     * @dev Returns the `TokenOwnership` struct at `tokenId` without reverting.
     *
     * If the `tokenId` is out of bounds:
     *
     * - `addr = address(0)`
     * - `startTimestamp = 0`
     * - `burned = false`
     * - `extraData = 0`
     *
     * If the `tokenId` is burned:
     *
     * - `addr = <Address of owner before token was burned>`
     * - `startTimestamp = <Timestamp when token was burned>`
     * - `burned = true`
     * - `extraData = <Extra data when token was burned>`
     *
     * Otherwise:
     *
     * - `addr = <Address of owner>`
     * - `startTimestamp = <Timestamp of start of ownership>`
     * - `burned = false`
     * - `extraData = <Extra data at start of ownership>`
     */
    function explicitOwnershipOf(uint256 tokenId) external view returns (TokenOwnership memory);
    /**
     * @dev Returns an array of `TokenOwnership` structs at `tokenIds` in order.
     * See {ERC721AQueryable-explicitOwnershipOf}
     */
    function explicitOwnershipsOf(uint256[] memory tokenIds) external view returns (TokenOwnership[] memory);
    /**
     * @dev Returns an array of token IDs owned by `owner`,
     * in the range [`start`, `stop`)
     * (i.e. `start <= tokenId < stop`).
     *
     * This function allows for tokens to be queried if the collection
     * grows too big for a single call of {ERC721AQueryable-tokensOfOwner}.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `start < stop`
     */
    function tokensOfOwnerIn(
        address owner,
        uint256 start,
        uint256 stop
    ) external view returns (uint256[] memory);
    /**
     * @dev Returns an array of token IDs owned by `owner`.
     *
     * This function scans the ownership mapping and is O(`totalSupply`) in complexity.
     * It is meant to be called off-chain.
     *
     * See {ERC721AQueryable-tokensOfOwnerIn} for splitting the scan into
     * multiple smaller scans if the collection is large enough to cause
     * an out-of-gas error (10K collections should be fine).
     */
    function tokensOfOwner(address owner) external view returns (uint256[] memory);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// ERC721A Contracts v4.2.3
// Creator: Chiru Labs
pragma solidity ^0.8.4;
/**
 * @dev Interface of ERC721A.
 */
interface IERC721AUpgradeable {
    /**
     * The caller must own the token or be an approved operator.
     */
    error ApprovalCallerNotOwnerNorApproved();
    /**
     * The token does not exist.
     */
    error ApprovalQueryForNonexistentToken();
    /**
     * Cannot query the balance for the zero address.
     */
    error BalanceQueryForZeroAddress();
    /**
     * Cannot mint to the zero address.
     */
    error MintToZeroAddress();
    /**
     * The quantity of tokens minted must be more than zero.
     */
    error MintZeroQuantity();
    /**
     * The token does not exist.
     */
    error OwnerQueryForNonexistentToken();
    /**
     * The caller must own the token or be an approved operator.
     */
    error TransferCallerNotOwnerNorApproved();
    /**
     * The token must be owned by `from`.
     */
    error TransferFromIncorrectOwner();
    /**
     * Cannot safely transfer to a contract that does not implement the
     * ERC721Receiver interface.
     */
    error TransferToNonERC721ReceiverImplementer();
    /**
     * Cannot transfer to the zero address.
     */
    error TransferToZeroAddress();
    /**
     * The token does not exist.
     */
    error URIQueryForNonexistentToken();
    /**
     * The `quantity` minted with ERC2309 exceeds the safety limit.
     */
    error MintERC2309QuantityExceedsLimit();
    /**
     * The `extraData` cannot be set on an unintialized ownership slot.
     */
    error OwnershipNotInitializedForExtraData();
    // =============================================================
    //                            STRUCTS
    // =============================================================
    struct TokenOwnership {
        // The address of the owner.
        address addr;
        // Stores the start time of ownership with minimal overhead for tokenomics.
        uint64 startTimestamp;
        // Whether the token has been burned.
        bool burned;
        // Arbitrary data similar to `startTimestamp` that can be set via {_extraData}.
        uint24 extraData;
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                         TOKEN COUNTERS
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Returns the total number of tokens in existence.
     * Burned tokens will reduce the count.
     * To get the total number of tokens minted, please see {_totalMinted}.
     */
    function totalSupply() external view returns (uint256);
    // =============================================================
    //                            IERC165
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Returns true if this contract implements the interface defined by
     * `interfaceId`. See the corresponding
     * [EIP section](https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-165#how-interfaces-are-identified)
     * to learn more about how these ids are created.
     *
     * This function call must use less than 30000 gas.
     */
    function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId) external view returns (bool);
    // =============================================================
    //                            IERC721
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Emitted when `tokenId` token is transferred from `from` to `to`.
     */
    event Transfer(address indexed from, address indexed to, uint256 indexed tokenId);
    /**
     * @dev Emitted when `owner` enables `approved` to manage the `tokenId` token.
     */
    event Approval(address indexed owner, address indexed approved, uint256 indexed tokenId);
    /**
     * @dev Emitted when `owner` enables or disables
     * (`approved`) `operator` to manage all of its assets.
     */
    event ApprovalForAll(address indexed owner, address indexed operator, bool approved);
    /**
     * @dev Returns the number of tokens in `owner`'s account.
     */
    function balanceOf(address owner) external view returns (uint256 balance);
    /**
     * @dev Returns the owner of the `tokenId` token.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `tokenId` must exist.
     */
    function ownerOf(uint256 tokenId) external view returns (address owner);
    /**
     * @dev Safely transfers `tokenId` token from `from` to `to`,
     * checking first that contract recipients are aware of the ERC721 protocol
     * to prevent tokens from being forever locked.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `from` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `tokenId` token must exist and be owned by `from`.
     * - If the caller is not `from`, it must be have been allowed to move
     * this token by either {approve} or {setApprovalForAll}.
     * - If `to` refers to a smart contract, it must implement
     * {IERC721Receiver-onERC721Received}, which is called upon a safe transfer.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event.
     */
    function safeTransferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId,
        bytes calldata data
    ) external payable;
    /**
     * @dev Equivalent to `safeTransferFrom(from, to, tokenId, '')`.
     */
    function safeTransferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId
    ) external payable;
    /**
     * @dev Transfers `tokenId` from `from` to `to`.
     *
     * WARNING: Usage of this method is discouraged, use {safeTransferFrom}
     * whenever possible.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `from` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `tokenId` token must be owned by `from`.
     * - If the caller is not `from`, it must be approved to move this token
     * by either {approve} or {setApprovalForAll}.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event.
     */
    function transferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId
    ) external payable;
    /**
     * @dev Gives permission to `to` to transfer `tokenId` token to another account.
     * The approval is cleared when the token is transferred.
     *
     * Only a single account can be approved at a time, so approving the
     * zero address clears previous approvals.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - The caller must own the token or be an approved operator.
     * - `tokenId` must exist.
     *
     * Emits an {Approval} event.
     */
    function approve(address to, uint256 tokenId) external payable;
    /**
     * @dev Approve or remove `operator` as an operator for the caller.
     * Operators can call {transferFrom} or {safeTransferFrom}
     * for any token owned by the caller.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - The `operator` cannot be the caller.
     *
     * Emits an {ApprovalForAll} event.
     */
    function setApprovalForAll(address operator, bool _approved) external;
    /**
     * @dev Returns the account approved for `tokenId` token.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `tokenId` must exist.
     */
    function getApproved(uint256 tokenId) external view returns (address operator);
    /**
     * @dev Returns if the `operator` is allowed to manage all of the assets of `owner`.
     *
     * See {setApprovalForAll}.
     */
    function isApprovedForAll(address owner, address operator) external view returns (bool);
    // =============================================================
    //                        IERC721Metadata
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Returns the token collection name.
     */
    function name() external view returns (string memory);
    /**
     * @dev Returns the token collection symbol.
     */
    function symbol() external view returns (string memory);
    /**
     * @dev Returns the Uniform Resource Identifier (URI) for `tokenId` token.
     */
    function tokenURI(uint256 tokenId) external view returns (string memory);
    // =============================================================
    //                           IERC2309
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Emitted when tokens in `fromTokenId` to `toTokenId`
     * (inclusive) is transferred from `from` to `to`, as defined in the
     * [ERC2309](https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-2309) standard.
     *
     * See {_mintERC2309} for more details.
     */
    event ConsecutiveTransfer(uint256 indexed fromTokenId, uint256 toTokenId, address indexed from, address indexed to);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.13;
interface IOperatorFilterRegistry {
    function isOperatorAllowed(address registrant, address operator) external view returns (bool);
    function register(address registrant) external;
    function registerAndSubscribe(address registrant, address subscription) external;
    function registerAndCopyEntries(address registrant, address registrantToCopy) external;
    function unregister(address addr) external;
    function updateOperator(address registrant, address operator, bool filtered) external;
    function updateOperators(address registrant, address[] calldata operators, bool filtered) external;
    function updateCodeHash(address registrant, bytes32 codehash, bool filtered) external;
    function updateCodeHashes(address registrant, bytes32[] calldata codeHashes, bool filtered) external;
    function subscribe(address registrant, address registrantToSubscribe) external;
    function unsubscribe(address registrant, bool copyExistingEntries) external;
    function subscriptionOf(address addr) external returns (address registrant);
    function subscribers(address registrant) external returns (address[] memory);
    function subscriberAt(address registrant, uint256 index) external returns (address);
    function copyEntriesOf(address registrant, address registrantToCopy) external;
    function isOperatorFiltered(address registrant, address operator) external returns (bool);
    function isCodeHashOfFiltered(address registrant, address operatorWithCode) external returns (bool);
    function isCodeHashFiltered(address registrant, bytes32 codeHash) external returns (bool);
    function filteredOperators(address addr) external returns (address[] memory);
    function filteredCodeHashes(address addr) external returns (bytes32[] memory);
    function filteredOperatorAt(address registrant, uint256 index) external returns (address);
    function filteredCodeHashAt(address registrant, uint256 index) external returns (bytes32);
    function isRegistered(address addr) external returns (bool);
    function codeHashOf(address addr) external returns (bytes32);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.13;
import {IOperatorFilterRegistry} from "../IOperatorFilterRegistry.sol";
import {Initializable} from "@openzeppelin/contracts-upgradeable/proxy/utils/Initializable.sol";
abstract contract OperatorFiltererUpgradeable is Initializable {
    error OperatorNotAllowed(address operator);
    IOperatorFilterRegistry constant operatorFilterRegistry =
        IOperatorFilterRegistry(0x000000000000AAeB6D7670E522A718067333cd4E);
    function __OperatorFilterer_init(address subscriptionOrRegistrantToCopy, bool subscribe)
        internal
        onlyInitializing
    {
        // If an inheriting token contract is deployed to a network without the registry deployed, the modifier
        // will not revert, but the contract will need to be registered with the registry once it is deployed in
        // order for the modifier to filter addresses.
        if (address(operatorFilterRegistry).code.length > 0) {
            if (!operatorFilterRegistry.isRegistered(address(this))) {
                if (subscribe) {
                    operatorFilterRegistry.registerAndSubscribe(address(this), subscriptionOrRegistrantToCopy);
                } else {
                    if (subscriptionOrRegistrantToCopy != address(0)) {
                        operatorFilterRegistry.registerAndCopyEntries(address(this), subscriptionOrRegistrantToCopy);
                    } else {
                        operatorFilterRegistry.register(address(this));
                    }
                }
            }
        }
    }
    modifier onlyAllowedOperator(address from) virtual {
        // Check registry code length to facilitate testing in environments without a deployed registry.
        if (address(operatorFilterRegistry).code.length > 0) {
            // Allow spending tokens from addresses with balance
            // Note that this still allows listings and marketplaces with escrow to transfer tokens if transferred
            // from an EOA.
            if (from == msg.sender) {
                _;
                return;
            }
            if (!operatorFilterRegistry.isOperatorAllowed(address(this), msg.sender)) {
                revert OperatorNotAllowed(msg.sender);
            }
        }
        _;
    }
    modifier onlyAllowedOperatorApproval(address operator) virtual {
        // Check registry code length to facilitate testing in environments without a deployed registry.
        if (address(operatorFilterRegistry).code.length > 0) {
            if (!operatorFilterRegistry.isOperatorAllowed(address(this), operator)) {
                revert OperatorNotAllowed(operator);
            }
        }
        _;
    }
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.7.0) (access/Ownable.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
import "../utils/ContextUpgradeable.sol";
import "../proxy/utils/Initializable.sol";
/**
 * @dev Contract module which provides a basic access control mechanism, where
 * there is an account (an owner) that can be granted exclusive access to
 * specific functions.
 *
 * By default, the owner account will be the one that deploys the contract. This
 * can later be changed with {transferOwnership}.
 *
 * This module is used through inheritance. It will make available the modifier
 * `onlyOwner`, which can be applied to your functions to restrict their use to
 * the owner.
 */
abstract contract OwnableUpgradeable is Initializable, ContextUpgradeable {
    address private _owner;
    event OwnershipTransferred(address indexed previousOwner, address indexed newOwner);
    /**
     * @dev Initializes the contract setting the deployer as the initial owner.
     */
    function __Ownable_init() internal onlyInitializing {
        __Ownable_init_unchained();
    }
    function __Ownable_init_unchained() internal onlyInitializing {
        _transferOwnership(_msgSender());
    }
    /**
     * @dev Throws if called by any account other than the owner.
     */
    modifier onlyOwner() {
        _checkOwner();
        _;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the address of the current owner.
     */
    function owner() public view virtual returns (address) {
        return _owner;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Throws if the sender is not the owner.
     */
    function _checkOwner() internal view virtual {
        require(owner() == _msgSender(), "Ownable: caller is not the owner");
    }
    /**
     * @dev Leaves the contract without owner. It will not be possible to call
     * `onlyOwner` functions anymore. Can only be called by the current owner.
     *
     * NOTE: Renouncing ownership will leave the contract without an owner,
     * thereby removing any functionality that is only available to the owner.
     */
    function renounceOwnership() public virtual onlyOwner {
        _transferOwnership(address(0));
    }
    /**
     * @dev Transfers ownership of the contract to a new account (`newOwner`).
     * Can only be called by the current owner.
     */
    function transferOwnership(address newOwner) public virtual onlyOwner {
        require(newOwner != address(0), "Ownable: new owner is the zero address");
        _transferOwnership(newOwner);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Transfers ownership of the contract to a new account (`newOwner`).
     * Internal function without access restriction.
     */
    function _transferOwnership(address newOwner) internal virtual {
        address oldOwner = _owner;
        _owner = newOwner;
        emit OwnershipTransferred(oldOwner, newOwner);
    }
    /**
     * @dev This empty reserved space is put in place to allow future versions to add new
     * variables without shifting down storage in the inheritance chain.
     * See https://docs.openzeppelin.com/contracts/4.x/upgradeable#storage_gaps
     */
    uint256[49] private __gap;
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.8.0) (finance/PaymentSplitter.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
import "../token/ERC20/utils/SafeERC20Upgradeable.sol";
import "../utils/AddressUpgradeable.sol";
import "../utils/ContextUpgradeable.sol";
import "../proxy/utils/Initializable.sol";
/**
 * @title PaymentSplitter
 * @dev This contract allows to split Ether payments among a group of accounts. The sender does not need to be aware
 * that the Ether will be split in this way, since it is handled transparently by the contract.
 *
 * The split can be in equal parts or in any other arbitrary proportion. The way this is specified is by assigning each
 * account to a number of shares. Of all the Ether that this contract receives, each account will then be able to claim
 * an amount proportional to the percentage of total shares they were assigned. The distribution of shares is set at the
 * time of contract deployment and can't be updated thereafter.
 *
 * `PaymentSplitter` follows a _pull payment_ model. This means that payments are not automatically forwarded to the
 * accounts but kept in this contract, and the actual transfer is triggered as a separate step by calling the {release}
 * function.
 *
 * NOTE: This contract assumes that ERC20 tokens will behave similarly to native tokens (Ether). Rebasing tokens, and
 * tokens that apply fees during transfers, are likely to not be supported as expected. If in doubt, we encourage you
 * to run tests before sending real value to this contract.
 */
contract PaymentSplitterUpgradeable is Initializable, ContextUpgradeable {
    event PayeeAdded(address account, uint256 shares);
    event PaymentReleased(address to, uint256 amount);
    event ERC20PaymentReleased(IERC20Upgradeable indexed token, address to, uint256 amount);
    event PaymentReceived(address from, uint256 amount);
    uint256 private _totalShares;
    uint256 private _totalReleased;
    mapping(address => uint256) private _shares;
    mapping(address => uint256) private _released;
    address[] private _payees;
    mapping(IERC20Upgradeable => uint256) private _erc20TotalReleased;
    mapping(IERC20Upgradeable => mapping(address => uint256)) private _erc20Released;
    /**
     * @dev Creates an instance of `PaymentSplitter` where each account in `payees` is assigned the number of shares at
     * the matching position in the `shares` array.
     *
     * All addresses in `payees` must be non-zero. Both arrays must have the same non-zero length, and there must be no
     * duplicates in `payees`.
     */
    function __PaymentSplitter_init(address[] memory payees, uint256[] memory shares_) internal onlyInitializing {
        __PaymentSplitter_init_unchained(payees, shares_);
    }
    function __PaymentSplitter_init_unchained(address[] memory payees, uint256[] memory shares_) internal onlyInitializing {
        require(payees.length == shares_.length, "PaymentSplitter: payees and shares length mismatch");
        require(payees.length > 0, "PaymentSplitter: no payees");
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < payees.length; i++) {
            _addPayee(payees[i], shares_[i]);
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev The Ether received will be logged with {PaymentReceived} events. Note that these events are not fully
     * reliable: it's possible for a contract to receive Ether without triggering this function. This only affects the
     * reliability of the events, and not the actual splitting of Ether.
     *
     * To learn more about this see the Solidity documentation for
     * https://solidity.readthedocs.io/en/latest/contracts.html#fallback-function[fallback
     * functions].
     */
    receive() external payable virtual {
        emit PaymentReceived(_msgSender(), msg.value);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Getter for the total shares held by payees.
     */
    function totalShares() public view returns (uint256) {
        return _totalShares;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Getter for the total amount of Ether already released.
     */
    function totalReleased() public view returns (uint256) {
        return _totalReleased;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Getter for the total amount of `token` already released. `token` should be the address of an IERC20
     * contract.
     */
    function totalReleased(IERC20Upgradeable token) public view returns (uint256) {
        return _erc20TotalReleased[token];
    }
    /**
     * @dev Getter for the amount of shares held by an account.
     */
    function shares(address account) public view returns (uint256) {
        return _shares[account];
    }
    /**
     * @dev Getter for the amount of Ether already released to a payee.
     */
    function released(address account) public view returns (uint256) {
        return _released[account];
    }
    /**
     * @dev Getter for the amount of `token` tokens already released to a payee. `token` should be the address of an
     * IERC20 contract.
     */
    function released(IERC20Upgradeable token, address account) public view returns (uint256) {
        return _erc20Released[token][account];
    }
    /**
     * @dev Getter for the address of the payee number `index`.
     */
    function payee(uint256 index) public view returns (address) {
        return _payees[index];
    }
    /**
     * @dev Getter for the amount of payee's releasable Ether.
     */
    function releasable(address account) public view returns (uint256) {
        uint256 totalReceived = address(this).balance + totalReleased();
        return _pendingPayment(account, totalReceived, released(account));
    }
    /**
     * @dev Getter for the amount of payee's releasable `token` tokens. `token` should be the address of an
     * IERC20 contract.
     */
    function releasable(IERC20Upgradeable token, address account) public view returns (uint256) {
        uint256 totalReceived = token.balanceOf(address(this)) + totalReleased(token);
        return _pendingPayment(account, totalReceived, released(token, account));
    }
    /**
     * @dev Triggers a transfer to `account` of the amount of Ether they are owed, according to their percentage of the
     * total shares and their previous withdrawals.
     */
    function release(address payable account) public virtual {
        require(_shares[account] > 0, "PaymentSplitter: account has no shares");
        uint256 payment = releasable(account);
        require(payment != 0, "PaymentSplitter: account is not due payment");
        // _totalReleased is the sum of all values in _released.
        // If "_totalReleased += payment" does not overflow, then "_released[account] += payment" cannot overflow.
        _totalReleased += payment;
        unchecked {
            _released[account] += payment;
        }
        AddressUpgradeable.sendValue(account, payment);
        emit PaymentReleased(account, payment);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Triggers a transfer to `account` of the amount of `token` tokens they are owed, according to their
     * percentage of the total shares and their previous withdrawals. `token` must be the address of an IERC20
     * contract.
     */
    function release(IERC20Upgradeable token, address account) public virtual {
        require(_shares[account] > 0, "PaymentSplitter: account has no shares");
        uint256 payment = releasable(token, account);
        require(payment != 0, "PaymentSplitter: account is not due payment");
        // _erc20TotalReleased[token] is the sum of all values in _erc20Released[token].
        // If "_erc20TotalReleased[token] += payment" does not overflow, then "_erc20Released[token][account] += payment"
        // cannot overflow.
        _erc20TotalReleased[token] += payment;
        unchecked {
            _erc20Released[token][account] += payment;
        }
        SafeERC20Upgradeable.safeTransfer(token, account, payment);
        emit ERC20PaymentReleased(token, account, payment);
    }
    /**
     * @dev internal logic for computing the pending payment of an `account` given the token historical balances and
     * already released amounts.
     */
    function _pendingPayment(
        address account,
        uint256 totalReceived,
        uint256 alreadyReleased
    ) private view returns (uint256) {
        return (totalReceived * _shares[account]) / _totalShares - alreadyReleased;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Add a new payee to the contract.
     * @param account The address of the payee to add.
     * @param shares_ The number of shares owned by the payee.
     */
    function _addPayee(address account, uint256 shares_) private {
        require(account != address(0), "PaymentSplitter: account is the zero address");
        require(shares_ > 0, "PaymentSplitter: shares are 0");
        require(_shares[account] == 0, "PaymentSplitter: account already has shares");
        _payees.push(account);
        _shares[account] = shares_;
        _totalShares = _totalShares + shares_;
        emit PayeeAdded(account, shares_);
    }
    /**
     * @dev This empty reserved space is put in place to allow future versions to add new
     * variables without shifting down storage in the inheritance chain.
     * See https://docs.openzeppelin.com/contracts/4.x/upgradeable#storage_gaps
     */
    uint256[43] private __gap;
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.6.0) (interfaces/IERC2981.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
import "../utils/introspection/IERC165Upgradeable.sol";
/**
 * @dev Interface for the NFT Royalty Standard.
 *
 * A standardized way to retrieve royalty payment information for non-fungible tokens (NFTs) to enable universal
 * support for royalty payments across all NFT marketplaces and ecosystem participants.
 *
 * _Available since v4.5._
 */
interface IERC2981Upgradeable is IERC165Upgradeable {
    /**
     * @dev Returns how much royalty is owed and to whom, based on a sale price that may be denominated in any unit of
     * exchange. The royalty amount is denominated and should be paid in that same unit of exchange.
     */
    function royaltyInfo(uint256 tokenId, uint256 salePrice)
        external
        view
        returns (address receiver, uint256 royaltyAmount);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.8.0) (proxy/utils/Initializable.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.2;
import "../../utils/AddressUpgradeable.sol";
/**
 * @dev This is a base contract to aid in writing upgradeable contracts, or any kind of contract that will be deployed
 * behind a proxy. Since proxied contracts do not make use of a constructor, it's common to move constructor logic to an
 * external initializer function, usually called `initialize`. It then becomes necessary to protect this initializer
 * function so it can only be called once. The {initializer} modifier provided by this contract will have this effect.
 *
 * The initialization functions use a version number. Once a version number is used, it is consumed and cannot be
 * reused. This mechanism prevents re-execution of each "step" but allows the creation of new initialization steps in
 * case an upgrade adds a module that needs to be initialized.
 *
 * For example:
 *
 * [.hljs-theme-light.nopadding]
 * ```
 * contract MyToken is ERC20Upgradeable {
 *     function initialize() initializer public {
 *         __ERC20_init("MyToken", "MTK");
 *     }
 * }
 * contract MyTokenV2 is MyToken, ERC20PermitUpgradeable {
 *     function initializeV2() reinitializer(2) public {
 *         __ERC20Permit_init("MyToken");
 *     }
 * }
 * ```
 *
 * TIP: To avoid leaving the proxy in an uninitialized state, the initializer function should be called as early as
 * possible by providing the encoded function call as the `_data` argument to {ERC1967Proxy-constructor}.
 *
 * CAUTION: When used with inheritance, manual care must be taken to not invoke a parent initializer twice, or to ensure
 * that all initializers are idempotent. This is not verified automatically as constructors are by Solidity.
 *
 * [CAUTION]
 * ====
 * Avoid leaving a contract uninitialized.
 *
 * An uninitialized contract can be taken over by an attacker. This applies to both a proxy and its implementation
 * contract, which may impact the proxy. To prevent the implementation contract from being used, you should invoke
 * the {_disableInitializers} function in the constructor to automatically lock it when it is deployed:
 *
 * [.hljs-theme-light.nopadding]
 * ```
 * /// @custom:oz-upgrades-unsafe-allow constructor
 * constructor() {
 *     _disableInitializers();
 * }
 * ```
 * ====
 */
abstract contract Initializable {
    /**
     * @dev Indicates that the contract has been initialized.
     * @custom:oz-retyped-from bool
     */
    uint8 private _initialized;
    /**
     * @dev Indicates that the contract is in the process of being initialized.
     */
    bool private _initializing;
    /**
     * @dev Triggered when the contract has been initialized or reinitialized.
     */
    event Initialized(uint8 version);
    /**
     * @dev A modifier that defines a protected initializer function that can be invoked at most once. In its scope,
     * `onlyInitializing` functions can be used to initialize parent contracts.
     *
     * Similar to `reinitializer(1)`, except that functions marked with `initializer` can be nested in the context of a
     * constructor.
     *
     * Emits an {Initialized} event.
     */
    modifier initializer() {
        bool isTopLevelCall = !_initializing;
        require(
            (isTopLevelCall && _initialized < 1) || (!AddressUpgradeable.isContract(address(this)) && _initialized == 1),
            "Initializable: contract is already initialized"
        );
        _initialized = 1;
        if (isTopLevelCall) {
            _initializing = true;
        }
        _;
        if (isTopLevelCall) {
            _initializing = false;
            emit Initialized(1);
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev A modifier that defines a protected reinitializer function that can be invoked at most once, and only if the
     * contract hasn't been initialized to a greater version before. In its scope, `onlyInitializing` functions can be
     * used to initialize parent contracts.
     *
     * A reinitializer may be used after the original initialization step. This is essential to configure modules that
     * are added through upgrades and that require initialization.
     *
     * When `version` is 1, this modifier is similar to `initializer`, except that functions marked with `reinitializer`
     * cannot be nested. If one is invoked in the context of another, execution will revert.
     *
     * Note that versions can jump in increments greater than 1; this implies that if multiple reinitializers coexist in
     * a contract, executing them in the right order is up to the developer or operator.
     *
     * WARNING: setting the version to 255 will prevent any future reinitialization.
     *
     * Emits an {Initialized} event.
     */
    modifier reinitializer(uint8 version) {
        require(!_initializing && _initialized < version, "Initializable: contract is already initialized");
        _initialized = version;
        _initializing = true;
        _;
        _initializing = false;
        emit Initialized(version);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Modifier to protect an initialization function so that it can only be invoked by functions with the
     * {initializer} and {reinitializer} modifiers, directly or indirectly.
     */
    modifier onlyInitializing() {
        require(_initializing, "Initializable: contract is not initializing");
        _;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Locks the contract, preventing any future reinitialization. This cannot be part of an initializer call.
     * Calling this in the constructor of a contract will prevent that contract from being initialized or reinitialized
     * to any version. It is recommended to use this to lock implementation contracts that are designed to be called
     * through proxies.
     *
     * Emits an {Initialized} event the first time it is successfully executed.
     */
    function _disableInitializers() internal virtual {
        require(!_initializing, "Initializable: contract is initializing");
        if (_initialized < type(uint8).max) {
            _initialized = type(uint8).max;
            emit Initialized(type(uint8).max);
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Internal function that returns the initialized version. Returns `_initialized`
     */
    function _getInitializedVersion() internal view returns (uint8) {
        return _initialized;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Internal function that returns the initialized version. Returns `_initializing`
     */
    function _isInitializing() internal view returns (bool) {
        return _initializing;
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.7.0) (token/common/ERC2981.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
import "../../interfaces/IERC2981Upgradeable.sol";
import "../../utils/introspection/ERC165Upgradeable.sol";
import "../../proxy/utils/Initializable.sol";
/**
 * @dev Implementation of the NFT Royalty Standard, a standardized way to retrieve royalty payment information.
 *
 * Royalty information can be specified globally for all token ids via {_setDefaultRoyalty}, and/or individually for
 * specific token ids via {_setTokenRoyalty}. The latter takes precedence over the first.
 *
 * Royalty is specified as a fraction of sale price. {_feeDenominator} is overridable but defaults to 10000, meaning the
 * fee is specified in basis points by default.
 *
 * IMPORTANT: ERC-2981 only specifies a way to signal royalty information and does not enforce its payment. See
 * https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-2981#optional-royalty-payments[Rationale] in the EIP. Marketplaces are expected to
 * voluntarily pay royalties together with sales, but note that this standard is not yet widely supported.
 *
 * _Available since v4.5._
 */
abstract contract ERC2981Upgradeable is Initializable, IERC2981Upgradeable, ERC165Upgradeable {
    function __ERC2981_init() internal onlyInitializing {
    }
    function __ERC2981_init_unchained() internal onlyInitializing {
    }
    struct RoyaltyInfo {
        address receiver;
        uint96 royaltyFraction;
    }
    RoyaltyInfo private _defaultRoyaltyInfo;
    mapping(uint256 => RoyaltyInfo) private _tokenRoyaltyInfo;
    /**
     * @dev See {IERC165-supportsInterface}.
     */
    function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId) public view virtual override(IERC165Upgradeable, ERC165Upgradeable) returns (bool) {
        return interfaceId == type(IERC2981Upgradeable).interfaceId || super.supportsInterface(interfaceId);
    }
    /**
     * @inheritdoc IERC2981Upgradeable
     */
    function royaltyInfo(uint256 _tokenId, uint256 _salePrice) public view virtual override returns (address, uint256) {
        RoyaltyInfo memory royalty = _tokenRoyaltyInfo[_tokenId];
        if (royalty.receiver == address(0)) {
            royalty = _defaultRoyaltyInfo;
        }
        uint256 royaltyAmount = (_salePrice * royalty.royaltyFraction) / _feeDenominator();
        return (royalty.receiver, royaltyAmount);
    }
    /**
     * @dev The denominator with which to interpret the fee set in {_setTokenRoyalty} and {_setDefaultRoyalty} as a
     * fraction of the sale price. Defaults to 10000 so fees are expressed in basis points, but may be customized by an
     * override.
     */
    function _feeDenominator() internal pure virtual returns (uint96) {
        return 10000;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Sets the royalty information that all ids in this contract will default to.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `receiver` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `feeNumerator` cannot be greater than the fee denominator.
     */
    function _setDefaultRoyalty(address receiver, uint96 feeNumerator) internal virtual {
        require(feeNumerator <= _feeDenominator(), "ERC2981: royalty fee will exceed salePrice");
        require(receiver != address(0), "ERC2981: invalid receiver");
        _defaultRoyaltyInfo = RoyaltyInfo(receiver, feeNumerator);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Removes default royalty information.
     */
    function _deleteDefaultRoyalty() internal virtual {
        delete _defaultRoyaltyInfo;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Sets the royalty information for a specific token id, overriding the global default.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `receiver` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `feeNumerator` cannot be greater than the fee denominator.
     */
    function _setTokenRoyalty(
        uint256 tokenId,
        address receiver,
        uint96 feeNumerator
    ) internal virtual {
        require(feeNumerator <= _feeDenominator(), "ERC2981: royalty fee will exceed salePrice");
        require(receiver != address(0), "ERC2981: Invalid parameters");
        _tokenRoyaltyInfo[tokenId] = RoyaltyInfo(receiver, feeNumerator);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Resets royalty information for the token id back to the global default.
     */
    function _resetTokenRoyalty(uint256 tokenId) internal virtual {
        delete _tokenRoyaltyInfo[tokenId];
    }
    /**
     * @dev This empty reserved space is put in place to allow future versions to add new
     * variables without shifting down storage in the inheritance chain.
     * See https://docs.openzeppelin.com/contracts/4.x/upgradeable#storage_gaps
     */
    uint256[48] private __gap;
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.8.0) (token/ERC1155/ERC1155.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
import "./IERC1155Upgradeable.sol";
import "./IERC1155ReceiverUpgradeable.sol";
import "./extensions/IERC1155MetadataURIUpgradeable.sol";
import "../../utils/AddressUpgradeable.sol";
import "../../utils/ContextUpgradeable.sol";
import "../../utils/introspection/ERC165Upgradeable.sol";
import "../../proxy/utils/Initializable.sol";
/**
 * @dev Implementation of the basic standard multi-token.
 * See https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-1155
 * Originally based on code by Enjin: https://github.com/enjin/erc-1155
 *
 * _Available since v3.1._
 */
contract ERC1155Upgradeable is Initializable, ContextUpgradeable, ERC165Upgradeable, IERC1155Upgradeable, IERC1155MetadataURIUpgradeable {
    using AddressUpgradeable for address;
    // Mapping from token ID to account balances
    mapping(uint256 => mapping(address => uint256)) private _balances;
    // Mapping from account to operator approvals
    mapping(address => mapping(address => bool)) private _operatorApprovals;
    // Used as the URI for all token types by relying on ID substitution, e.g. https://token-cdn-domain/{id}.json
    string private _uri;
    /**
     * @dev See {_setURI}.
     */
    function __ERC1155_init(string memory uri_) internal onlyInitializing {
        __ERC1155_init_unchained(uri_);
    }
    function __ERC1155_init_unchained(string memory uri_) internal onlyInitializing {
        _setURI(uri_);
    }
    /**
     * @dev See {IERC165-supportsInterface}.
     */
    function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId) public view virtual override(ERC165Upgradeable, IERC165Upgradeable) returns (bool) {
        return
            interfaceId == type(IERC1155Upgradeable).interfaceId ||
            interfaceId == type(IERC1155MetadataURIUpgradeable).interfaceId ||
            super.supportsInterface(interfaceId);
    }
    /**
     * @dev See {IERC1155MetadataURI-uri}.
     *
     * This implementation returns the same URI for *all* token types. It relies
     * on the token type ID substitution mechanism
     * https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-1155#metadata[defined in the EIP].
     *
     * Clients calling this function must replace the `\\{id\\}` substring with the
     * actual token type ID.
     */
    function uri(uint256) public view virtual override returns (string memory) {
        return _uri;
    }
    /**
     * @dev See {IERC1155-balanceOf}.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `account` cannot be the zero address.
     */
    function balanceOf(address account, uint256 id) public view virtual override returns (uint256) {
        require(account != address(0), "ERC1155: address zero is not a valid owner");
        return _balances[id][account];
    }
    /**
     * @dev See {IERC1155-balanceOfBatch}.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `accounts` and `ids` must have the same length.
     */
    function balanceOfBatch(address[] memory accounts, uint256[] memory ids)
        public
        view
        virtual
        override
        returns (uint256[] memory)
    {
        require(accounts.length == ids.length, "ERC1155: accounts and ids length mismatch");
        uint256[] memory batchBalances = new uint256[](accounts.length);
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < accounts.length; ++i) {
            batchBalances[i] = balanceOf(accounts[i], ids[i]);
        }
        return batchBalances;
    }
    /**
     * @dev See {IERC1155-setApprovalForAll}.
     */
    function setApprovalForAll(address operator, bool approved) public virtual override {
        _setApprovalForAll(_msgSender(), operator, approved);
    }
    /**
     * @dev See {IERC1155-isApprovedForAll}.
     */
    function isApprovedForAll(address account, address operator) public view virtual override returns (bool) {
        return _operatorApprovals[account][operator];
    }
    /**
     * @dev See {IERC1155-safeTransferFrom}.
     */
    function safeTransferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 id,
        uint256 amount,
        bytes memory data
    ) public virtual override {
        require(
            from == _msgSender() || isApprovedForAll(from, _msgSender()),
            "ERC1155: caller is not token owner or approved"
        );
        _safeTransferFrom(from, to, id, amount, data);
    }
    /**
     * @dev See {IERC1155-safeBatchTransferFrom}.
     */
    function safeBatchTransferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256[] memory ids,
        uint256[] memory amounts,
        bytes memory data
    ) public virtual override {
        require(
            from == _msgSender() || isApprovedForAll(from, _msgSender()),
            "ERC1155: caller is not token owner or approved"
        );
        _safeBatchTransferFrom(from, to, ids, amounts, data);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Transfers `amount` tokens of token type `id` from `from` to `to`.
     *
     * Emits a {TransferSingle} event.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `from` must have a balance of tokens of type `id` of at least `amount`.
     * - If `to` refers to a smart contract, it must implement {IERC1155Receiver-onERC1155Received} and return the
     * acceptance magic value.
     */
    function _safeTransferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 id,
        uint256 amount,
        bytes memory data
    ) internal virtual {
        require(to != address(0), "ERC1155: transfer to the zero address");
        address operator = _msgSender();
        uint256[] memory ids = _asSingletonArray(id);
        uint256[] memory amounts = _asSingletonArray(amount);
        _beforeTokenTransfer(operator, from, to, ids, amounts, data);
        uint256 fromBalance = _balances[id][from];
        require(fromBalance >= amount, "ERC1155: insufficient balance for transfer");
        unchecked {
            _balances[id][from] = fromBalance - amount;
        }
        _balances[id][to] += amount;
        emit TransferSingle(operator, from, to, id, amount);
        _afterTokenTransfer(operator, from, to, ids, amounts, data);
        _doSafeTransferAcceptanceCheck(operator, from, to, id, amount, data);
    }
    /**
     * @dev xref:ROOT:erc1155.adoc#batch-operations[Batched] version of {_safeTransferFrom}.
     *
     * Emits a {TransferBatch} event.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - If `to` refers to a smart contract, it must implement {IERC1155Receiver-onERC1155BatchReceived} and return the
     * acceptance magic value.
     */
    function _safeBatchTransferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256[] memory ids,
        uint256[] memory amounts,
        bytes memory data
    ) internal virtual {
        require(ids.length == amounts.length, "ERC1155: ids and amounts length mismatch");
        require(to != address(0), "ERC1155: transfer to the zero address");
        address operator = _msgSender();
        _beforeTokenTransfer(operator, from, to, ids, amounts, data);
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < ids.length; ++i) {
            uint256 id = ids[i];
            uint256 amount = amounts[i];
            uint256 fromBalance = _balances[id][from];
            require(fromBalance >= amount, "ERC1155: insufficient balance for transfer");
            unchecked {
                _balances[id][from] = fromBalance - amount;
            }
            _balances[id][to] += amount;
        }
        emit TransferBatch(operator, from, to, ids, amounts);
        _afterTokenTransfer(operator, from, to, ids, amounts, data);
        _doSafeBatchTransferAcceptanceCheck(operator, from, to, ids, amounts, data);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Sets a new URI for all token types, by relying on the token type ID
     * substitution mechanism
     * https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-1155#metadata[defined in the EIP].
     *
     * By this mechanism, any occurrence of the `\\{id\\}` substring in either the
     * URI or any of the amounts in the JSON file at said URI will be replaced by
     * clients with the token type ID.
     *
     * For example, the `https://token-cdn-domain/\\{id\\}.json` URI would be
     * interpreted by clients as
     * `https://token-cdn-domain/000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000004cce0.json`
     * for token type ID 0x4cce0.
     *
     * See {uri}.
     *
     * Because these URIs cannot be meaningfully represented by the {URI} event,
     * this function emits no events.
     */
    function _setURI(string memory newuri) internal virtual {
        _uri = newuri;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Creates `amount` tokens of token type `id`, and assigns them to `to`.
     *
     * Emits a {TransferSingle} event.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
     * - If `to` refers to a smart contract, it must implement {IERC1155Receiver-onERC1155Received} and return the
     * acceptance magic value.
     */
    function _mint(
        address to,
        uint256 id,
        uint256 amount,
        bytes memory data
    ) internal virtual {
        require(to != address(0), "ERC1155: mint to the zero address");
        address operator = _msgSender();
        uint256[] memory ids = _asSingletonArray(id);
        uint256[] memory amounts = _asSingletonArray(amount);
        _beforeTokenTransfer(operator, address(0), to, ids, amounts, data);
        _balances[id][to] += amount;
        emit TransferSingle(operator, address(0), to, id, amount);
        _afterTokenTransfer(operator, address(0), to, ids, amounts, data);
        _doSafeTransferAcceptanceCheck(operator, address(0), to, id, amount, data);
    }
    /**
     * @dev xref:ROOT:erc1155.adoc#batch-operations[Batched] version of {_mint}.
     *
     * Emits a {TransferBatch} event.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `ids` and `amounts` must have the same length.
     * - If `to` refers to a smart contract, it must implement {IERC1155Receiver-onERC1155BatchReceived} and return the
     * acceptance magic value.
     */
    function _mintBatch(
        address to,
        uint256[] memory ids,
        uint256[] memory amounts,
        bytes memory data
    ) internal virtual {
        require(to != address(0), "ERC1155: mint to the zero address");
        require(ids.length == amounts.length, "ERC1155: ids and amounts length mismatch");
        address operator = _msgSender();
        _beforeTokenTransfer(operator, address(0), to, ids, amounts, data);
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < ids.length; i++) {
            _balances[ids[i]][to] += amounts[i];
        }
        emit TransferBatch(operator, address(0), to, ids, amounts);
        _afterTokenTransfer(operator, address(0), to, ids, amounts, data);
        _doSafeBatchTransferAcceptanceCheck(operator, address(0), to, ids, amounts, data);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Destroys `amount` tokens of token type `id` from `from`
     *
     * Emits a {TransferSingle} event.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `from` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `from` must have at least `amount` tokens of token type `id`.
     */
    function _burn(
        address from,
        uint256 id,
        uint256 amount
    ) internal virtual {
        require(from != address(0), "ERC1155: burn from the zero address");
        address operator = _msgSender();
        uint256[] memory ids = _asSingletonArray(id);
        uint256[] memory amounts = _asSingletonArray(amount);
        _beforeTokenTransfer(operator, from, address(0), ids, amounts, "");
        uint256 fromBalance = _balances[id][from];
        require(fromBalance >= amount, "ERC1155: burn amount exceeds balance");
        unchecked {
            _balances[id][from] = fromBalance - amount;
        }
        emit TransferSingle(operator, from, address(0), id, amount);
        _afterTokenTransfer(operator, from, address(0), ids, amounts, "");
    }
    /**
     * @dev xref:ROOT:erc1155.adoc#batch-operations[Batched] version of {_burn}.
     *
     * Emits a {TransferBatch} event.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `ids` and `amounts` must have the same length.
     */
    function _burnBatch(
        address from,
        uint256[] memory ids,
        uint256[] memory amounts
    ) internal virtual {
        require(from != address(0), "ERC1155: burn from the zero address");
        require(ids.length == amounts.length, "ERC1155: ids and amounts length mismatch");
        address operator = _msgSender();
        _beforeTokenTransfer(operator, from, address(0), ids, amounts, "");
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < ids.length; i++) {
            uint256 id = ids[i];
            uint256 amount = amounts[i];
            uint256 fromBalance = _balances[id][from];
            require(fromBalance >= amount, "ERC1155: burn amount exceeds balance");
            unchecked {
                _balances[id][from] = fromBalance - amount;
            }
        }
        emit TransferBatch(operator, from, address(0), ids, amounts);
        _afterTokenTransfer(operator, from, address(0), ids, amounts, "");
    }
    /**
     * @dev Approve `operator` to operate on all of `owner` tokens
     *
     * Emits an {ApprovalForAll} event.
     */
    function _setApprovalForAll(
        address owner,
        address operator,
        bool approved
    ) internal virtual {
        require(owner != operator, "ERC1155: setting approval status for self");
        _operatorApprovals[owner][operator] = approved;
        emit ApprovalForAll(owner, operator, approved);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Hook that is called before any token transfer. This includes minting
     * and burning, as well as batched variants.
     *
     * The same hook is called on both single and batched variants. For single
     * transfers, the length of the `ids` and `amounts` arrays will be 1.
     *
     * Calling conditions (for each `id` and `amount` pair):
     *
     * - When `from` and `to` are both non-zero, `amount` of ``from``'s tokens
     * of token type `id` will be  transferred to `to`.
     * - When `from` is zero, `amount` tokens of token type `id` will be minted
     * for `to`.
     * - when `to` is zero, `amount` of ``from``'s tokens of token type `id`
     * will be burned.
     * - `from` and `to` are never both zero.
     * - `ids` and `amounts` have the same, non-zero length.
     *
     * To learn more about hooks, head to xref:ROOT:extending-contracts.adoc#using-hooks[Using Hooks].
     */
    function _beforeTokenTransfer(
        address operator,
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256[] memory ids,
        uint256[] memory amounts,
        bytes memory data
    ) internal virtual {}
    /**
     * @dev Hook that is called after any token transfer. This includes minting
     * and burning, as well as batched variants.
     *
     * The same hook is called on both single and batched variants. For single
     * transfers, the length of the `id` and `amount` arrays will be 1.
     *
     * Calling conditions (for each `id` and `amount` pair):
     *
     * - When `from` and `to` are both non-zero, `amount` of ``from``'s tokens
     * of token type `id` will be  transferred to `to`.
     * - When `from` is zero, `amount` tokens of token type `id` will be minted
     * for `to`.
     * - when `to` is zero, `amount` of ``from``'s tokens of token type `id`
     * will be burned.
     * - `from` and `to` are never both zero.
     * - `ids` and `amounts` have the same, non-zero length.
     *
     * To learn more about hooks, head to xref:ROOT:extending-contracts.adoc#using-hooks[Using Hooks].
     */
    function _afterTokenTransfer(
        address operator,
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256[] memory ids,
        uint256[] memory amounts,
        bytes memory data
    ) internal virtual {}
    function _doSafeTransferAcceptanceCheck(
        address operator,
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 id,
        uint256 amount,
        bytes memory data
    ) private {
        if (to.isContract()) {
            try IERC1155ReceiverUpgradeable(to).onERC1155Received(operator, from, id, amount, data) returns (bytes4 response) {
                if (response != IERC1155ReceiverUpgradeable.onERC1155Received.selector) {
                    revert("ERC1155: ERC1155Receiver rejected tokens");
                }
            } catch Error(string memory reason) {
                revert(reason);
            } catch {
                revert("ERC1155: transfer to non-ERC1155Receiver implementer");
            }
        }
    }
    function _doSafeBatchTransferAcceptanceCheck(
        address operator,
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256[] memory ids,
        uint256[] memory amounts,
        bytes memory data
    ) private {
        if (to.isContract()) {
            try IERC1155ReceiverUpgradeable(to).onERC1155BatchReceived(operator, from, ids, amounts, data) returns (
                bytes4 response
            ) {
                if (response != IERC1155ReceiverUpgradeable.onERC1155BatchReceived.selector) {
                    revert("ERC1155: ERC1155Receiver rejected tokens");
                }
            } catch Error(string memory reason) {
                revert(reason);
            } catch {
                revert("ERC1155: transfer to non-ERC1155Receiver implementer");
            }
        }
    }
    function _asSingletonArray(uint256 element) private pure returns (uint256[] memory) {
        uint256[] memory array = new uint256[](1);
        array[0] = element;
        return array;
    }
    /**
     * @dev This empty reserved space is put in place to allow future versions to add new
     * variables without shifting down storage in the inheritance chain.
     * See https://docs.openzeppelin.com/contracts/4.x/upgradeable#storage_gaps
     */
    uint256[47] private __gap;
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.6.0) (token/ERC1155/extensions/ERC1155Supply.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
import "../ERC1155Upgradeable.sol";
import "../../../proxy/utils/Initializable.sol";
/**
 * @dev Extension of ERC1155 that adds tracking of total supply per id.
 *
 * Useful for scenarios where Fungible and Non-fungible tokens have to be
 * clearly identified. Note: While a totalSupply of 1 might mean the
 * corresponding is an NFT, there is no guarantees that no other token with the
 * same id are not going to be minted.
 */
abstract contract ERC1155SupplyUpgradeable is Initializable, ERC1155Upgradeable {
    function __ERC1155Supply_init() internal onlyInitializing {
    }
    function __ERC1155Supply_init_unchained() internal onlyInitializing {
    }
    mapping(uint256 => uint256) private _totalSupply;
    /**
     * @dev Total amount of tokens in with a given id.
     */
    function totalSupply(uint256 id) public view virtual returns (uint256) {
        return _totalSupply[id];
    }
    /**
     * @dev Indicates whether any token exist with a given id, or not.
     */
    function exists(uint256 id) public view virtual returns (bool) {
        return ERC1155SupplyUpgradeable.totalSupply(id) > 0;
    }
    /**
     * @dev See {ERC1155-_beforeTokenTransfer}.
     */
    function _beforeTokenTransfer(
        address operator,
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256[] memory ids,
        uint256[] memory amounts,
        bytes memory data
    ) internal virtual override {
        super._beforeTokenTransfer(operator, from, to, ids, amounts, data);
        if (from == address(0)) {
            for (uint256 i = 0; i < ids.length; ++i) {
                _totalSupply[ids[i]] += amounts[i];
            }
        }
        if (to == address(0)) {
            for (uint256 i = 0; i < ids.length; ++i) {
                uint256 id = ids[i];
                uint256 amount = amounts[i];
                uint256 supply = _totalSupply[id];
                require(supply >= amount, "ERC1155: burn amount exceeds totalSupply");
                unchecked {
                    _totalSupply[id] = supply - amount;
                }
            }
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev This empty reserved space is put in place to allow future versions to add new
     * variables without shifting down storage in the inheritance chain.
     * See https://docs.openzeppelin.com/contracts/4.x/upgradeable#storage_gaps
     */
    uint256[49] private __gap;
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts v4.4.1 (token/ERC1155/extensions/IERC1155MetadataURI.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
import "../IERC1155Upgradeable.sol";
/**
 * @dev Interface of the optional ERC1155MetadataExtension interface, as defined
 * in the https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-1155#metadata-extensions[EIP].
 *
 * _Available since v3.1._
 */
interface IERC1155MetadataURIUpgradeable is IERC1155Upgradeable {
    /**
     * @dev Returns the URI for token type `id`.
     *
     * If the `\\{id\\}` substring is present in the URI, it must be replaced by
     * clients with the actual token type ID.
     */
    function uri(uint256 id) external view returns (string memory);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.5.0) (token/ERC1155/IERC1155Receiver.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
import "../../utils/introspection/IERC165Upgradeable.sol";
/**
 * @dev _Available since v3.1._
 */
interface IERC1155ReceiverUpgradeable is IERC165Upgradeable {
    /**
     * @dev Handles the receipt of a single ERC1155 token type. This function is
     * called at the end of a `safeTransferFrom` after the balance has been updated.
     *
     * NOTE: To accept the transfer, this must return
     * `bytes4(keccak256("onERC1155Received(address,address,uint256,uint256,bytes)"))`
     * (i.e. 0xf23a6e61, or its own function selector).
     *
     * @param operator The address which initiated the transfer (i.e. msg.sender)
     * @param from The address which previously owned the token
     * @param id The ID of the token being transferred
     * @param value The amount of tokens being transferred
     * @param data Additional data with no specified format
     * @return `bytes4(keccak256("onERC1155Received(address,address,uint256,uint256,bytes)"))` if transfer is allowed
     */
    function onERC1155Received(
        address operator,
        address from,
        uint256 id,
        uint256 value,
        bytes calldata data
    ) external returns (bytes4);
    /**
     * @dev Handles the receipt of a multiple ERC1155 token types. This function
     * is called at the end of a `safeBatchTransferFrom` after the balances have
     * been updated.
     *
     * NOTE: To accept the transfer(s), this must return
     * `bytes4(keccak256("onERC1155BatchReceived(address,address,uint256[],uint256[],bytes)"))`
     * (i.e. 0xbc197c81, or its own function selector).
     *
     * @param operator The address which initiated the batch transfer (i.e. msg.sender)
     * @param from The address which previously owned the token
     * @param ids An array containing ids of each token being transferred (order and length must match values array)
     * @param values An array containing amounts of each token being transferred (order and length must match ids array)
     * @param data Additional data with no specified format
     * @return `bytes4(keccak256("onERC1155BatchReceived(address,address,uint256[],uint256[],bytes)"))` if transfer is allowed
     */
    function onERC1155BatchReceived(
        address operator,
        address from,
        uint256[] calldata ids,
        uint256[] calldata values,
        bytes calldata data
    ) external returns (bytes4);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.7.0) (token/ERC1155/IERC1155.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
import "../../utils/introspection/IERC165Upgradeable.sol";
/**
 * @dev Required interface of an ERC1155 compliant contract, as defined in the
 * https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-1155[EIP].
 *
 * _Available since v3.1._
 */
interface IERC1155Upgradeable is IERC165Upgradeable {
    /**
     * @dev Emitted when `value` tokens of token type `id` are transferred from `from` to `to` by `operator`.
     */
    event TransferSingle(address indexed operator, address indexed from, address indexed to, uint256 id, uint256 value);
    /**
     * @dev Equivalent to multiple {TransferSingle} events, where `operator`, `from` and `to` are the same for all
     * transfers.
     */
    event TransferBatch(
        address indexed operator,
        address indexed from,
        address indexed to,
        uint256[] ids,
        uint256[] values
    );
    /**
     * @dev Emitted when `account` grants or revokes permission to `operator` to transfer their tokens, according to
     * `approved`.
     */
    event ApprovalForAll(address indexed account, address indexed operator, bool approved);
    /**
     * @dev Emitted when the URI for token type `id` changes to `value`, if it is a non-programmatic URI.
     *
     * If an {URI} event was emitted for `id`, the standard
     * https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-1155#metadata-extensions[guarantees] that `value` will equal the value
     * returned by {IERC1155MetadataURI-uri}.
     */
    event URI(string value, uint256 indexed id);
    /**
     * @dev Returns the amount of tokens of token type `id` owned by `account`.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `account` cannot be the zero address.
     */
    function balanceOf(address account, uint256 id) external view returns (uint256);
    /**
     * @dev xref:ROOT:erc1155.adoc#batch-operations[Batched] version of {balanceOf}.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `accounts` and `ids` must have the same length.
     */
    function balanceOfBatch(address[] calldata accounts, uint256[] calldata ids)
        external
        view
        returns (uint256[] memory);
    /**
     * @dev Grants or revokes permission to `operator` to transfer the caller's tokens, according to `approved`,
     *
     * Emits an {ApprovalForAll} event.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `operator` cannot be the caller.
     */
    function setApprovalForAll(address operator, bool approved) external;
    /**
     * @dev Returns true if `operator` is approved to transfer ``account``'s tokens.
     *
     * See {setApprovalForAll}.
     */
    function isApprovedForAll(address account, address operator) external view returns (bool);
    /**
     * @dev Transfers `amount` tokens of token type `id` from `from` to `to`.
     *
     * Emits a {TransferSingle} event.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
     * - If the caller is not `from`, it must have been approved to spend ``from``'s tokens via {setApprovalForAll}.
     * - `from` must have a balance of tokens of type `id` of at least `amount`.
     * - If `to` refers to a smart contract, it must implement {IERC1155Receiver-onERC1155Received} and return the
     * acceptance magic value.
     */
    function safeTransferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 id,
        uint256 amount,
        bytes calldata data
    ) external;
    /**
     * @dev xref:ROOT:erc1155.adoc#batch-operations[Batched] version of {safeTransferFrom}.
     *
     * Emits a {TransferBatch} event.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `ids` and `amounts` must have the same length.
     * - If `to` refers to a smart contract, it must implement {IERC1155Receiver-onERC1155BatchReceived} and return the
     * acceptance magic value.
     */
    function safeBatchTransferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256[] calldata ids,
        uint256[] calldata amounts,
        bytes calldata data
    ) external;
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts v4.4.1 (token/ERC20/extensions/draft-IERC20Permit.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/**
 * @dev Interface of the ERC20 Permit extension allowing approvals to be made via signatures, as defined in
 * https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-2612[EIP-2612].
 *
 * Adds the {permit} method, which can be used to change an account's ERC20 allowance (see {IERC20-allowance}) by
 * presenting a message signed by the account. By not relying on {IERC20-approve}, the token holder account doesn't
 * need to send a transaction, and thus is not required to hold Ether at all.
 */
interface IERC20PermitUpgradeable {
    /**
     * @dev Sets `value` as the allowance of `spender` over ``owner``'s tokens,
     * given ``owner``'s signed approval.
     *
     * IMPORTANT: The same issues {IERC20-approve} has related to transaction
     * ordering also apply here.
     *
     * Emits an {Approval} event.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `spender` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `deadline` must be a timestamp in the future.
     * - `v`, `r` and `s` must be a valid `secp256k1` signature from `owner`
     * over the EIP712-formatted function arguments.
     * - the signature must use ``owner``'s current nonce (see {nonces}).
     *
     * For more information on the signature format, see the
     * https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-2612#specification[relevant EIP
     * section].
     */
    function permit(
        address owner,
        address spender,
        uint256 value,
        uint256 deadline,
        uint8 v,
        bytes32 r,
        bytes32 s
    ) external;
    /**
     * @dev Returns the current nonce for `owner`. This value must be
     * included whenever a signature is generated for {permit}.
     *
     * Every successful call to {permit} increases ``owner``'s nonce by one. This
     * prevents a signature from being used multiple times.
     */
    function nonces(address owner) external view returns (uint256);
    /**
     * @dev Returns the domain separator used in the encoding of the signature for {permit}, as defined by {EIP712}.
     */
    // solhint-disable-next-line func-name-mixedcase
    function DOMAIN_SEPARATOR() external view returns (bytes32);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.6.0) (token/ERC20/IERC20.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/**
 * @dev Interface of the ERC20 standard as defined in the EIP.
 */
interface IERC20Upgradeable {
    /**
     * @dev Emitted when `value` tokens are moved from one account (`from`) to
     * another (`to`).
     *
     * Note that `value` may be zero.
     */
    event Transfer(address indexed from, address indexed to, uint256 value);
    /**
     * @dev Emitted when the allowance of a `spender` for an `owner` is set by
     * a call to {approve}. `value` is the new allowance.
     */
    event Approval(address indexed owner, address indexed spender, uint256 value);
    /**
     * @dev Returns the amount of tokens in existence.
     */
    function totalSupply() external view returns (uint256);
    /**
     * @dev Returns the amount of tokens owned by `account`.
     */
    function balanceOf(address account) external view returns (uint256);
    /**
     * @dev Moves `amount` tokens from the caller's account to `to`.
     *
     * Returns a boolean value indicating whether the operation succeeded.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event.
     */
    function transfer(address to, uint256 amount) external returns (bool);
    /**
     * @dev Returns the remaining number of tokens that `spender` will be
     * allowed to spend on behalf of `owner` through {transferFrom}. This is
     * zero by default.
     *
     * This value changes when {approve} or {transferFrom} are called.
     */
    function allowance(address owner, address spender) external view returns (uint256);
    /**
     * @dev Sets `amount` as the allowance of `spender` over the caller's tokens.
     *
     * Returns a boolean value indicating whether the operation succeeded.
     *
     * IMPORTANT: Beware that changing an allowance with this method brings the risk
     * that someone may use both the old and the new allowance by unfortunate
     * transaction ordering. One possible solution to mitigate this race
     * condition is to first reduce the spender's allowance to 0 and set the
     * desired value afterwards:
     * https://github.com/ethereum/EIPs/issues/20#issuecomment-263524729
     *
     * Emits an {Approval} event.
     */
    function approve(address spender, uint256 amount) external returns (bool);
    /**
     * @dev Moves `amount` tokens from `from` to `to` using the
     * allowance mechanism. `amount` is then deducted from the caller's
     * allowance.
     *
     * Returns a boolean value indicating whether the operation succeeded.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event.
     */
    function transferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 amount
    ) external returns (bool);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.8.0) (token/ERC20/utils/SafeERC20.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
import "../IERC20Upgradeable.sol";
import "../extensions/draft-IERC20PermitUpgradeable.sol";
import "../../../utils/AddressUpgradeable.sol";
/**
 * @title SafeERC20
 * @dev Wrappers around ERC20 operations that throw on failure (when the token
 * contract returns false). Tokens that return no value (and instead revert or
 * throw on failure) are also supported, non-reverting calls are assumed to be
 * successful.
 * To use this library you can add a `using SafeERC20 for IERC20;` statement to your contract,
 * which allows you to call the safe operations as `token.safeTransfer(...)`, etc.
 */
library SafeERC20Upgradeable {
    using AddressUpgradeable for address;
    function safeTransfer(
        IERC20Upgradeable token,
        address to,
        uint256 value
    ) internal {
        _callOptionalReturn(token, abi.encodeWithSelector(token.transfer.selector, to, value));
    }
    function safeTransferFrom(
        IERC20Upgradeable token,
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 value
    ) internal {
        _callOptionalReturn(token, abi.encodeWithSelector(token.transferFrom.selector, from, to, value));
    }
    /**
     * @dev Deprecated. This function has issues similar to the ones found in
     * {IERC20-approve}, and its usage is discouraged.
     *
     * Whenever possible, use {safeIncreaseAllowance} and
     * {safeDecreaseAllowance} instead.
     */
    function safeApprove(
        IERC20Upgradeable token,
        address spender,
        uint256 value
    ) internal {
        // safeApprove should only be called when setting an initial allowance,
        // or when resetting it to zero. To increase and decrease it, use
        // 'safeIncreaseAllowance' and 'safeDecreaseAllowance'
        require(
            (value == 0) || (token.allowance(address(this), spender) == 0),
            "SafeERC20: approve from non-zero to non-zero allowance"
        );
        _callOptionalReturn(token, abi.encodeWithSelector(token.approve.selector, spender, value));
    }
    function safeIncreaseAllowance(
        IERC20Upgradeable token,
        address spender,
        uint256 value
    ) internal {
        uint256 newAllowance = token.allowance(address(this), spender) + value;
        _callOptionalReturn(token, abi.encodeWithSelector(token.approve.selector, spender, newAllowance));
    }
    function safeDecreaseAllowance(
        IERC20Upgradeable token,
        address spender,
        uint256 value
    ) internal {
        unchecked {
            uint256 oldAllowance = token.allowance(address(this), spender);
            require(oldAllowance >= value, "SafeERC20: decreased allowance below zero");
            uint256 newAllowance = oldAllowance - value;
            _callOptionalReturn(token, abi.encodeWithSelector(token.approve.selector, spender, newAllowance));
        }
    }
    function safePermit(
        IERC20PermitUpgradeable token,
        address owner,
        address spender,
        uint256 value,
        uint256 deadline,
        uint8 v,
        bytes32 r,
        bytes32 s
    ) internal {
        uint256 nonceBefore = token.nonces(owner);
        token.permit(owner, spender, value, deadline, v, r, s);
        uint256 nonceAfter = token.nonces(owner);
        require(nonceAfter == nonceBefore + 1, "SafeERC20: permit did not succeed");
    }
    /**
     * @dev Imitates a Solidity high-level call (i.e. a regular function call to a contract), relaxing the requirement
     * on the return value: the return value is optional (but if data is returned, it must not be false).
     * @param token The token targeted by the call.
     * @param data The call data (encoded using abi.encode or one of its variants).
     */
    function _callOptionalReturn(IERC20Upgradeable token, bytes memory data) private {
        // We need to perform a low level call here, to bypass Solidity's return data size checking mechanism, since
        // we're implementing it ourselves. We use {Address-functionCall} to perform this call, which verifies that
        // the target address contains contract code and also asserts for success in the low-level call.
        bytes memory returndata = address(token).functionCall(data, "SafeERC20: low-level call failed");
        if (returndata.length > 0) {
            // Return data is optional
            require(abi.decode(returndata, (bool)), "SafeERC20: ERC20 operation did not succeed");
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.8.0) (utils/Address.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.1;
/**
 * @dev Collection of functions related to the address type
 */
library AddressUpgradeable {
    /**
     * @dev Returns true if `account` is a contract.
     *
     * [IMPORTANT]
     * ====
     * It is unsafe to assume that an address for which this function returns
     * false is an externally-owned account (EOA) and not a contract.
     *
     * Among others, `isContract` will return false for the following
     * types of addresses:
     *
     *  - an externally-owned account
     *  - a contract in construction
     *  - an address where a contract will be created
     *  - an address where a contract lived, but was destroyed
     * ====
     *
     * [IMPORTANT]
     * ====
     * You shouldn't rely on `isContract` to protect against flash loan attacks!
     *
     * Preventing calls from contracts is highly discouraged. It breaks composability, breaks support for smart wallets
     * like Gnosis Safe, and does not provide security since it can be circumvented by calling from a contract
     * constructor.
     * ====
     */
    function isContract(address account) internal view returns (bool) {
        // This method relies on extcodesize/address.code.length, which returns 0
        // for contracts in construction, since the code is only stored at the end
        // of the constructor execution.
        return account.code.length > 0;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Replacement for Solidity's `transfer`: sends `amount` wei to
     * `recipient`, forwarding all available gas and reverting on errors.
     *
     * https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-1884[EIP1884] increases the gas cost
     * of certain opcodes, possibly making contracts go over the 2300 gas limit
     * imposed by `transfer`, making them unable to receive funds via
     * `transfer`. {sendValue} removes this limitation.
     *
     * https://diligence.consensys.net/posts/2019/09/stop-using-soliditys-transfer-now/[Learn more].
     *
     * IMPORTANT: because control is transferred to `recipient`, care must be
     * taken to not create reentrancy vulnerabilities. Consider using
     * {ReentrancyGuard} or the
     * https://solidity.readthedocs.io/en/v0.5.11/security-considerations.html#use-the-checks-effects-interactions-pattern[checks-effects-interactions pattern].
     */
    function sendValue(address payable recipient, uint256 amount) internal {
        require(address(this).balance >= amount, "Address: insufficient balance");
        (bool success, ) = recipient.call{value: amount}("");
        require(success, "Address: unable to send value, recipient may have reverted");
    }
    /**
     * @dev Performs a Solidity function call using a low level `call`. A
     * plain `call` is an unsafe replacement for a function call: use this
     * function instead.
     *
     * If `target` reverts with a revert reason, it is bubbled up by this
     * function (like regular Solidity function calls).
     *
     * Returns the raw returned data. To convert to the expected return value,
     * use https://solidity.readthedocs.io/en/latest/units-and-global-variables.html?highlight=abi.decode#abi-encoding-and-decoding-functions[`abi.decode`].
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `target` must be a contract.
     * - calling `target` with `data` must not revert.
     *
     * _Available since v3.1._
     */
    function functionCall(address target, bytes memory data) internal returns (bytes memory) {
        return functionCallWithValue(target, data, 0, "Address: low-level call failed");
    }
    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-}[`functionCall`], but with
     * `errorMessage` as a fallback revert reason when `target` reverts.
     *
     * _Available since v3.1._
     */
    function functionCall(
        address target,
        bytes memory data,
        string memory errorMessage
    ) internal returns (bytes memory) {
        return functionCallWithValue(target, data, 0, errorMessage);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-}[`functionCall`],
     * but also transferring `value` wei to `target`.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - the calling contract must have an ETH balance of at least `value`.
     * - the called Solidity function must be `payable`.
     *
     * _Available since v3.1._
     */
    function functionCallWithValue(
        address target,
        bytes memory data,
        uint256 value
    ) internal returns (bytes memory) {
        return functionCallWithValue(target, data, value, "Address: low-level call with value failed");
    }
    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCallWithValue-address-bytes-uint256-}[`functionCallWithValue`], but
     * with `errorMessage` as a fallback revert reason when `target` reverts.
     *
     * _Available since v3.1._
     */
    function functionCallWithValue(
        address target,
        bytes memory data,
        uint256 value,
        string memory errorMessage
    ) internal returns (bytes memory) {
        require(address(this).balance >= value, "Address: insufficient balance for call");
        (bool success, bytes memory returndata) = target.call{value: value}(data);
        return verifyCallResultFromTarget(target, success, returndata, errorMessage);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-}[`functionCall`],
     * but performing a static call.
     *
     * _Available since v3.3._
     */
    function functionStaticCall(address target, bytes memory data) internal view returns (bytes memory) {
        return functionStaticCall(target, data, "Address: low-level static call failed");
    }
    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-string-}[`functionCall`],
     * but performing a static call.
     *
     * _Available since v3.3._
     */
    function functionStaticCall(
        address target,
        bytes memory data,
        string memory errorMessage
    ) internal view returns (bytes memory) {
        (bool success, bytes memory returndata) = target.staticcall(data);
        return verifyCallResultFromTarget(target, success, returndata, errorMessage);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Tool to verify that a low level call to smart-contract was successful, and revert (either by bubbling
     * the revert reason or using the provided one) in case of unsuccessful call or if target was not a contract.
     *
     * _Available since v4.8._
     */
    function verifyCallResultFromTarget(
        address target,
        bool success,
        bytes memory returndata,
        string memory errorMessage
    ) internal view returns (bytes memory) {
        if (success) {
            if (returndata.length == 0) {
                // only check isContract if the call was successful and the return data is empty
                // otherwise we already know that it was a contract
                require(isContract(target), "Address: call to non-contract");
            }
            return returndata;
        } else {
            _revert(returndata, errorMessage);
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Tool to verify that a low level call was successful, and revert if it wasn't, either by bubbling the
     * revert reason or using the provided one.
     *
     * _Available since v4.3._
     */
    function verifyCallResult(
        bool success,
        bytes memory returndata,
        string memory errorMessage
    ) internal pure returns (bytes memory) {
        if (success) {
            return returndata;
        } else {
            _revert(returndata, errorMessage);
        }
    }
    function _revert(bytes memory returndata, string memory errorMessage) private pure {
        // Look for revert reason and bubble it up if present
        if (returndata.length > 0) {
            // The easiest way to bubble the revert reason is using memory via assembly
            /// @solidity memory-safe-assembly
            assembly {
                let returndata_size := mload(returndata)
                revert(add(32, returndata), returndata_size)
            }
        } else {
            revert(errorMessage);
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts v4.4.1 (utils/Context.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
import "../proxy/utils/Initializable.sol";
/**
 * @dev Provides information about the current execution context, including the
 * sender of the transaction and its data. While these are generally available
 * via msg.sender and msg.data, they should not be accessed in such a direct
 * manner, since when dealing with meta-transactions the account sending and
 * paying for execution may not be the actual sender (as far as an application
 * is concerned).
 *
 * This contract is only required for intermediate, library-like contracts.
 */
abstract contract ContextUpgradeable is Initializable {
    function __Context_init() internal onlyInitializing {
    }
    function __Context_init_unchained() internal onlyInitializing {
    }
    function _msgSender() internal view virtual returns (address) {
        return msg.sender;
    }
    function _msgData() internal view virtual returns (bytes calldata) {
        return msg.data;
    }
    /**
     * @dev This empty reserved space is put in place to allow future versions to add new
     * variables without shifting down storage in the inheritance chain.
     * See https://docs.openzeppelin.com/contracts/4.x/upgradeable#storage_gaps
     */
    uint256[50] private __gap;
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts v4.4.1 (utils/introspection/ERC165.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
import "./IERC165Upgradeable.sol";
import "../../proxy/utils/Initializable.sol";
/**
 * @dev Implementation of the {IERC165} interface.
 *
 * Contracts that want to implement ERC165 should inherit from this contract and override {supportsInterface} to check
 * for the additional interface id that will be supported. For example:
 *
 * ```solidity
 * function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId) public view virtual override returns (bool) {
 *     return interfaceId == type(MyInterface).interfaceId || super.supportsInterface(interfaceId);
 * }
 * ```
 *
 * Alternatively, {ERC165Storage} provides an easier to use but more expensive implementation.
 */
abstract contract ERC165Upgradeable is Initializable, IERC165Upgradeable {
    function __ERC165_init() internal onlyInitializing {
    }
    function __ERC165_init_unchained() internal onlyInitializing {
    }
    /**
     * @dev See {IERC165-supportsInterface}.
     */
    function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId) public view virtual override returns (bool) {
        return interfaceId == type(IERC165Upgradeable).interfaceId;
    }
    /**
     * @dev This empty reserved space is put in place to allow future versions to add new
     * variables without shifting down storage in the inheritance chain.
     * See https://docs.openzeppelin.com/contracts/4.x/upgradeable#storage_gaps
     */
    uint256[50] private __gap;
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts v4.4.1 (utils/introspection/IERC165.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/**
 * @dev Interface of the ERC165 standard, as defined in the
 * https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-165[EIP].
 *
 * Implementers can declare support of contract interfaces, which can then be
 * queried by others ({ERC165Checker}).
 *
 * For an implementation, see {ERC165}.
 */
interface IERC165Upgradeable {
    /**
     * @dev Returns true if this contract implements the interface defined by
     * `interfaceId`. See the corresponding
     * https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-165#how-interfaces-are-identified[EIP section]
     * to learn more about how these ids are created.
     *
     * This function call must use less than 30 000 gas.
     */
    function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId) external view returns (bool);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.8.0) (access/AccessControl.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
import "./IAccessControl.sol";
import "../utils/Context.sol";
import "../utils/Strings.sol";
import "../utils/introspection/ERC165.sol";
/**
 * @dev Contract module that allows children to implement role-based access
 * control mechanisms. This is a lightweight version that doesn't allow enumerating role
 * members except through off-chain means by accessing the contract event logs. Some
 * applications may benefit from on-chain enumerability, for those cases see
 * {AccessControlEnumerable}.
 *
 * Roles are referred to by their `bytes32` identifier. These should be exposed
 * in the external API and be unique. The best way to achieve this is by
 * using `public constant` hash digests:
 *
 * ```
 * bytes32 public constant MY_ROLE = keccak256("MY_ROLE");
 * ```
 *
 * Roles can be used to represent a set of permissions. To restrict access to a
 * function call, use {hasRole}:
 *
 * ```
 * function foo() public {
 *     require(hasRole(MY_ROLE, msg.sender));
 *     ...
 * }
 * ```
 *
 * Roles can be granted and revoked dynamically via the {grantRole} and
 * {revokeRole} functions. Each role has an associated admin role, and only
 * accounts that have a role's admin role can call {grantRole} and {revokeRole}.
 *
 * By default, the admin role for all roles is `DEFAULT_ADMIN_ROLE`, which means
 * that only accounts with this role will be able to grant or revoke other
 * roles. More complex role relationships can be created by using
 * {_setRoleAdmin}.
 *
 * WARNING: The `DEFAULT_ADMIN_ROLE` is also its own admin: it has permission to
 * grant and revoke this role. Extra precautions should be taken to secure
 * accounts that have been granted it.
 */
abstract contract AccessControl is Context, IAccessControl, ERC165 {
    struct RoleData {
        mapping(address => bool) members;
        bytes32 adminRole;
    }
    mapping(bytes32 => RoleData) private _roles;
    bytes32 public constant DEFAULT_ADMIN_ROLE = 0x00;
    /**
     * @dev Modifier that checks that an account has a specific role. Reverts
     * with a standardized message including the required role.
     *
     * The format of the revert reason is given by the following regular expression:
     *
     *  /^AccessControl: account (0x[0-9a-f]{40}) is missing role (0x[0-9a-f]{64})$/
     *
     * _Available since v4.1._
     */
    modifier onlyRole(bytes32 role) {
        _checkRole(role);
        _;
    }
    /**
     * @dev See {IERC165-supportsInterface}.
     */
    function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId) public view virtual override returns (bool) {
        return interfaceId == type(IAccessControl).interfaceId || super.supportsInterface(interfaceId);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns `true` if `account` has been granted `role`.
     */
    function hasRole(bytes32 role, address account) public view virtual override returns (bool) {
        return _roles[role].members[account];
    }
    /**
     * @dev Revert with a standard message if `_msgSender()` is missing `role`.
     * Overriding this function changes the behavior of the {onlyRole} modifier.
     *
     * Format of the revert message is described in {_checkRole}.
     *
     * _Available since v4.6._
     */
    function _checkRole(bytes32 role) internal view virtual {
        _checkRole(role, _msgSender());
    }
    /**
     * @dev Revert with a standard message if `account` is missing `role`.
     *
     * The format of the revert reason is given by the following regular expression:
     *
     *  /^AccessControl: account (0x[0-9a-f]{40}) is missing role (0x[0-9a-f]{64})$/
     */
    function _checkRole(bytes32 role, address account) internal view virtual {
        if (!hasRole(role, account)) {
            revert(
                string(
                    abi.encodePacked(
                        "AccessControl: account ",
                        Strings.toHexString(account),
                        " is missing role ",
                        Strings.toHexString(uint256(role), 32)
                    )
                )
            );
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the admin role that controls `role`. See {grantRole} and
     * {revokeRole}.
     *
     * To change a role's admin, use {_setRoleAdmin}.
     */
    function getRoleAdmin(bytes32 role) public view virtual override returns (bytes32) {
        return _roles[role].adminRole;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Grants `role` to `account`.
     *
     * If `account` had not been already granted `role`, emits a {RoleGranted}
     * event.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - the caller must have ``role``'s admin role.
     *
     * May emit a {RoleGranted} event.
     */
    function grantRole(bytes32 role, address account) public virtual override onlyRole(getRoleAdmin(role)) {
        _grantRole(role, account);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Revokes `role` from `account`.
     *
     * If `account` had been granted `role`, emits a {RoleRevoked} event.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - the caller must have ``role``'s admin role.
     *
     * May emit a {RoleRevoked} event.
     */
    function revokeRole(bytes32 role, address account) public virtual override onlyRole(getRoleAdmin(role)) {
        _revokeRole(role, account);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Revokes `role` from the calling account.
     *
     * Roles are often managed via {grantRole} and {revokeRole}: this function's
     * purpose is to provide a mechanism for accounts to lose their privileges
     * if they are compromised (such as when a trusted device is misplaced).
     *
     * If the calling account had been revoked `role`, emits a {RoleRevoked}
     * event.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - the caller must be `account`.
     *
     * May emit a {RoleRevoked} event.
     */
    function renounceRole(bytes32 role, address account) public virtual override {
        require(account == _msgSender(), "AccessControl: can only renounce roles for self");
        _revokeRole(role, account);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Grants `role` to `account`.
     *
     * If `account` had not been already granted `role`, emits a {RoleGranted}
     * event. Note that unlike {grantRole}, this function doesn't perform any
     * checks on the calling account.
     *
     * May emit a {RoleGranted} event.
     *
     * [WARNING]
     * ====
     * This function should only be called from the constructor when setting
     * up the initial roles for the system.
     *
     * Using this function in any other way is effectively circumventing the admin
     * system imposed by {AccessControl}.
     * ====
     *
     * NOTE: This function is deprecated in favor of {_grantRole}.
     */
    function _setupRole(bytes32 role, address account) internal virtual {
        _grantRole(role, account);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Sets `adminRole` as ``role``'s admin role.
     *
     * Emits a {RoleAdminChanged} event.
     */
    function _setRoleAdmin(bytes32 role, bytes32 adminRole) internal virtual {
        bytes32 previousAdminRole = getRoleAdmin(role);
        _roles[role].adminRole = adminRole;
        emit RoleAdminChanged(role, previousAdminRole, adminRole);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Grants `role` to `account`.
     *
     * Internal function without access restriction.
     *
     * May emit a {RoleGranted} event.
     */
    function _grantRole(bytes32 role, address account) internal virtual {
        if (!hasRole(role, account)) {
            _roles[role].members[account] = true;
            emit RoleGranted(role, account, _msgSender());
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Revokes `role` from `account`.
     *
     * Internal function without access restriction.
     *
     * May emit a {RoleRevoked} event.
     */
    function _revokeRole(bytes32 role, address account) internal virtual {
        if (hasRole(role, account)) {
            _roles[role].members[account] = false;
            emit RoleRevoked(role, account, _msgSender());
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts v4.4.1 (access/IAccessControl.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/**
 * @dev External interface of AccessControl declared to support ERC165 detection.
 */
interface IAccessControl {
    /**
     * @dev Emitted when `newAdminRole` is set as ``role``'s admin role, replacing `previousAdminRole`
     *
     * `DEFAULT_ADMIN_ROLE` is the starting admin for all roles, despite
     * {RoleAdminChanged} not being emitted signaling this.
     *
     * _Available since v3.1._
     */
    event RoleAdminChanged(bytes32 indexed role, bytes32 indexed previousAdminRole, bytes32 indexed newAdminRole);
    /**
     * @dev Emitted when `account` is granted `role`.
     *
     * `sender` is the account that originated the contract call, an admin role
     * bearer except when using {AccessControl-_setupRole}.
     */
    event RoleGranted(bytes32 indexed role, address indexed account, address indexed sender);
    /**
     * @dev Emitted when `account` is revoked `role`.
     *
     * `sender` is the account that originated the contract call:
     *   - if using `revokeRole`, it is the admin role bearer
     *   - if using `renounceRole`, it is the role bearer (i.e. `account`)
     */
    event RoleRevoked(bytes32 indexed role, address indexed account, address indexed sender);
    /**
     * @dev Returns `true` if `account` has been granted `role`.
     */
    function hasRole(bytes32 role, address account) external view returns (bool);
    /**
     * @dev Returns the admin role that controls `role`. See {grantRole} and
     * {revokeRole}.
     *
     * To change a role's admin, use {AccessControl-_setRoleAdmin}.
     */
    function getRoleAdmin(bytes32 role) external view returns (bytes32);
    /**
     * @dev Grants `role` to `account`.
     *
     * If `account` had not been already granted `role`, emits a {RoleGranted}
     * event.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - the caller must have ``role``'s admin role.
     */
    function grantRole(bytes32 role, address account) external;
    /**
     * @dev Revokes `role` from `account`.
     *
     * If `account` had been granted `role`, emits a {RoleRevoked} event.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - the caller must have ``role``'s admin role.
     */
    function revokeRole(bytes32 role, address account) external;
    /**
     * @dev Revokes `role` from the calling account.
     *
     * Roles are often managed via {grantRole} and {revokeRole}: this function's
     * purpose is to provide a mechanism for accounts to lose their privileges
     * if they are compromised (such as when a trusted device is misplaced).
     *
     * If the calling account had been granted `role`, emits a {RoleRevoked}
     * event.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - the caller must be `account`.
     */
    function renounceRole(bytes32 role, address account) external;
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.8.0) (proxy/Clones.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/**
 * @dev https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-1167[EIP 1167] is a standard for
 * deploying minimal proxy contracts, also known as "clones".
 *
 * > To simply and cheaply clone contract functionality in an immutable way, this standard specifies
 * > a minimal bytecode implementation that delegates all calls to a known, fixed address.
 *
 * The library includes functions to deploy a proxy using either `create` (traditional deployment) or `create2`
 * (salted deterministic deployment). It also includes functions to predict the addresses of clones deployed using the
 * deterministic method.
 *
 * _Available since v3.4._
 */
library Clones {
    /**
     * @dev Deploys and returns the address of a clone that mimics the behaviour of `implementation`.
     *
     * This function uses the create opcode, which should never revert.
     */
    function clone(address implementation) internal returns (address instance) {
        /// @solidity memory-safe-assembly
        assembly {
            // Cleans the upper 96 bits of the `implementation` word, then packs the first 3 bytes
            // of the `implementation` address with the bytecode before the address.
            mstore(0x00, or(shr(0xe8, shl(0x60, implementation)), 0x3d602d80600a3d3981f3363d3d373d3d3d363d73000000))
            // Packs the remaining 17 bytes of `implementation` with the bytecode after the address.
            mstore(0x20, or(shl(0x78, implementation), 0x5af43d82803e903d91602b57fd5bf3))
            instance := create(0, 0x09, 0x37)
        }
        require(instance != address(0), "ERC1167: create failed");
    }
    /**
     * @dev Deploys and returns the address of a clone that mimics the behaviour of `implementation`.
     *
     * This function uses the create2 opcode and a `salt` to deterministically deploy
     * the clone. Using the same `implementation` and `salt` multiple time will revert, since
     * the clones cannot be deployed twice at the same address.
     */
    function cloneDeterministic(address implementation, bytes32 salt) internal returns (address instance) {
        /// @solidity memory-safe-assembly
        assembly {
            // Cleans the upper 96 bits of the `implementation` word, then packs the first 3 bytes
            // of the `implementation` address with the bytecode before the address.
            mstore(0x00, or(shr(0xe8, shl(0x60, implementation)), 0x3d602d80600a3d3981f3363d3d373d3d3d363d73000000))
            // Packs the remaining 17 bytes of `implementation` with the bytecode after the address.
            mstore(0x20, or(shl(0x78, implementation), 0x5af43d82803e903d91602b57fd5bf3))
            instance := create2(0, 0x09, 0x37, salt)
        }
        require(instance != address(0), "ERC1167: create2 failed");
    }
    /**
     * @dev Computes the address of a clone deployed using {Clones-cloneDeterministic}.
     */
    function predictDeterministicAddress(
        address implementation,
        bytes32 salt,
        address deployer
    ) internal pure returns (address predicted) {
        /// @solidity memory-safe-assembly
        assembly {
            let ptr := mload(0x40)
            mstore(add(ptr, 0x38), deployer)
            mstore(add(ptr, 0x24), 0x5af43d82803e903d91602b57fd5bf3ff)
            mstore(add(ptr, 0x14), implementation)
            mstore(ptr, 0x3d602d80600a3d3981f3363d3d373d3d3d363d73)
            mstore(add(ptr, 0x58), salt)
            mstore(add(ptr, 0x78), keccak256(add(ptr, 0x0c), 0x37))
            predicted := keccak256(add(ptr, 0x43), 0x55)
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Computes the address of a clone deployed using {Clones-cloneDeterministic}.
     */
    function predictDeterministicAddress(address implementation, bytes32 salt)
        internal
        view
        returns (address predicted)
    {
        return predictDeterministicAddress(implementation, salt, address(this));
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts v4.4.1 (utils/Context.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/**
 * @dev Provides information about the current execution context, including the
 * sender of the transaction and its data. While these are generally available
 * via msg.sender and msg.data, they should not be accessed in such a direct
 * manner, since when dealing with meta-transactions the account sending and
 * paying for execution may not be the actual sender (as far as an application
 * is concerned).
 *
 * This contract is only required for intermediate, library-like contracts.
 */
abstract contract Context {
    function _msgSender() internal view virtual returns (address) {
        return msg.sender;
    }
    function _msgData() internal view virtual returns (bytes calldata) {
        return msg.data;
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.8.0) (utils/cryptography/MerkleProof.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/**
 * @dev These functions deal with verification of Merkle Tree proofs.
 *
 * The tree and the proofs can be generated using our
 * https://github.com/OpenZeppelin/merkle-tree[JavaScript library].
 * You will find a quickstart guide in the readme.
 *
 * WARNING: You should avoid using leaf values that are 64 bytes long prior to
 * hashing, or use a hash function other than keccak256 for hashing leaves.
 * This is because the concatenation of a sorted pair of internal nodes in
 * the merkle tree could be reinterpreted as a leaf value.
 * OpenZeppelin's JavaScript library generates merkle trees that are safe
 * against this attack out of the box.
 */
library MerkleProof {
    /**
     * @dev Returns true if a `leaf` can be proved to be a part of a Merkle tree
     * defined by `root`. For this, a `proof` must be provided, containing
     * sibling hashes on the branch from the leaf to the root of the tree. Each
     * pair of leaves and each pair of pre-images are assumed to be sorted.
     */
    function verify(
        bytes32[] memory proof,
        bytes32 root,
        bytes32 leaf
    ) internal pure returns (bool) {
        return processProof(proof, leaf) == root;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Calldata version of {verify}
     *
     * _Available since v4.7._
     */
    function verifyCalldata(
        bytes32[] calldata proof,
        bytes32 root,
        bytes32 leaf
    ) internal pure returns (bool) {
        return processProofCalldata(proof, leaf) == root;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the rebuilt hash obtained by traversing a Merkle tree up
     * from `leaf` using `proof`. A `proof` is valid if and only if the rebuilt
     * hash matches the root of the tree. When processing the proof, the pairs
     * of leafs & pre-images are assumed to be sorted.
     *
     * _Available since v4.4._
     */
    function processProof(bytes32[] memory proof, bytes32 leaf) internal pure returns (bytes32) {
        bytes32 computedHash = leaf;
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < proof.length; i++) {
            computedHash = _hashPair(computedHash, proof[i]);
        }
        return computedHash;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Calldata version of {processProof}
     *
     * _Available since v4.7._
     */
    function processProofCalldata(bytes32[] calldata proof, bytes32 leaf) internal pure returns (bytes32) {
        bytes32 computedHash = leaf;
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < proof.length; i++) {
            computedHash = _hashPair(computedHash, proof[i]);
        }
        return computedHash;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns true if the `leaves` can be simultaneously proven to be a part of a merkle tree defined by
     * `root`, according to `proof` and `proofFlags` as described in {processMultiProof}.
     *
     * CAUTION: Not all merkle trees admit multiproofs. See {processMultiProof} for details.
     *
     * _Available since v4.7._
     */
    function multiProofVerify(
        bytes32[] memory proof,
        bool[] memory proofFlags,
        bytes32 root,
        bytes32[] memory leaves
    ) internal pure returns (bool) {
        return processMultiProof(proof, proofFlags, leaves) == root;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Calldata version of {multiProofVerify}
     *
     * CAUTION: Not all merkle trees admit multiproofs. See {processMultiProof} for details.
     *
     * _Available since v4.7._
     */
    function multiProofVerifyCalldata(
        bytes32[] calldata proof,
        bool[] calldata proofFlags,
        bytes32 root,
        bytes32[] memory leaves
    ) internal pure returns (bool) {
        return processMultiProofCalldata(proof, proofFlags, leaves) == root;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the root of a tree reconstructed from `leaves` and sibling nodes in `proof`. The reconstruction
     * proceeds by incrementally reconstructing all inner nodes by combining a leaf/inner node with either another
     * leaf/inner node or a proof sibling node, depending on whether each `proofFlags` item is true or false
     * respectively.
     *
     * CAUTION: Not all merkle trees admit multiproofs. To use multiproofs, it is sufficient to ensure that: 1) the tree
     * is complete (but not necessarily perfect), 2) the leaves to be proven are in the opposite order they are in the
     * tree (i.e., as seen from right to left starting at the deepest layer and continuing at the next layer).
     *
     * _Available since v4.7._
     */
    function processMultiProof(
        bytes32[] memory proof,
        bool[] memory proofFlags,
        bytes32[] memory leaves
    ) internal pure returns (bytes32 merkleRoot) {
        // This function rebuild the root hash by traversing the tree up from the leaves. The root is rebuilt by
        // consuming and producing values on a queue. The queue starts with the `leaves` array, then goes onto the
        // `hashes` array. At the end of the process, the last hash in the `hashes` array should contain the root of
        // the merkle tree.
        uint256 leavesLen = leaves.length;
        uint256 totalHashes = proofFlags.length;
        // Check proof validity.
        require(leavesLen + proof.length - 1 == totalHashes, "MerkleProof: invalid multiproof");
        // The xxxPos values are "pointers" to the next value to consume in each array. All accesses are done using
        // `xxx[xxxPos++]`, which return the current value and increment the pointer, thus mimicking a queue's "pop".
        bytes32[] memory hashes = new bytes32[](totalHashes);
        uint256 leafPos = 0;
        uint256 hashPos = 0;
        uint256 proofPos = 0;
        // At each step, we compute the next hash using two values:
        // - a value from the "main queue". If not all leaves have been consumed, we get the next leaf, otherwise we
        //   get the next hash.
        // - depending on the flag, either another value for the "main queue" (merging branches) or an element from the
        //   `proof` array.
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < totalHashes; i++) {
            bytes32 a = leafPos < leavesLen ? leaves[leafPos++] : hashes[hashPos++];
            bytes32 b = proofFlags[i] ? leafPos < leavesLen ? leaves[leafPos++] : hashes[hashPos++] : proof[proofPos++];
            hashes[i] = _hashPair(a, b);
        }
        if (totalHashes > 0) {
            return hashes[totalHashes - 1];
        } else if (leavesLen > 0) {
            return leaves[0];
        } else {
            return proof[0];
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Calldata version of {processMultiProof}.
     *
     * CAUTION: Not all merkle trees admit multiproofs. See {processMultiProof} for details.
     *
     * _Available since v4.7._
     */
    function processMultiProofCalldata(
        bytes32[] calldata proof,
        bool[] calldata proofFlags,
        bytes32[] memory leaves
    ) internal pure returns (bytes32 merkleRoot) {
        // This function rebuild the root hash by traversing the tree up from the leaves. The root is rebuilt by
        // consuming and producing values on a queue. The queue starts with the `leaves` array, then goes onto the
        // `hashes` array. At the end of the process, the last hash in the `hashes` array should contain the root of
        // the merkle tree.
        uint256 leavesLen = leaves.length;
        uint256 totalHashes = proofFlags.length;
        // Check proof validity.
        require(leavesLen + proof.length - 1 == totalHashes, "MerkleProof: invalid multiproof");
        // The xxxPos values are "pointers" to the next value to consume in each array. All accesses are done using
        // `xxx[xxxPos++]`, which return the current value and increment the pointer, thus mimicking a queue's "pop".
        bytes32[] memory hashes = new bytes32[](totalHashes);
        uint256 leafPos = 0;
        uint256 hashPos = 0;
        uint256 proofPos = 0;
        // At each step, we compute the next hash using two values:
        // - a value from the "main queue". If not all leaves have been consumed, we get the next leaf, otherwise we
        //   get the next hash.
        // - depending on the flag, either another value for the "main queue" (merging branches) or an element from the
        //   `proof` array.
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < totalHashes; i++) {
            bytes32 a = leafPos < leavesLen ? leaves[leafPos++] : hashes[hashPos++];
            bytes32 b = proofFlags[i] ? leafPos < leavesLen ? leaves[leafPos++] : hashes[hashPos++] : proof[proofPos++];
            hashes[i] = _hashPair(a, b);
        }
        if (totalHashes > 0) {
            return hashes[totalHashes - 1];
        } else if (leavesLen > 0) {
            return leaves[0];
        } else {
            return proof[0];
        }
    }
    function _hashPair(bytes32 a, bytes32 b) private pure returns (bytes32) {
        return a < b ? _efficientHash(a, b) : _efficientHash(b, a);
    }
    function _efficientHash(bytes32 a, bytes32 b) private pure returns (bytes32 value) {
        /// @solidity memory-safe-assembly
        assembly {
            mstore(0x00, a)
            mstore(0x20, b)
            value := keccak256(0x00, 0x40)
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts v4.4.1 (utils/introspection/ERC165.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
import "./IERC165.sol";
/**
 * @dev Implementation of the {IERC165} interface.
 *
 * Contracts that want to implement ERC165 should inherit from this contract and override {supportsInterface} to check
 * for the additional interface id that will be supported. For example:
 *
 * ```solidity
 * function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId) public view virtual override returns (bool) {
 *     return interfaceId == type(MyInterface).interfaceId || super.supportsInterface(interfaceId);
 * }
 * ```
 *
 * Alternatively, {ERC165Storage} provides an easier to use but more expensive implementation.
 */
abstract contract ERC165 is IERC165 {
    /**
     * @dev See {IERC165-supportsInterface}.
     */
    function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId) public view virtual override returns (bool) {
        return interfaceId == type(IERC165).interfaceId;
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts v4.4.1 (utils/introspection/IERC165.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/**
 * @dev Interface of the ERC165 standard, as defined in the
 * https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-165[EIP].
 *
 * Implementers can declare support of contract interfaces, which can then be
 * queried by others ({ERC165Checker}).
 *
 * For an implementation, see {ERC165}.
 */
interface IERC165 {
    /**
     * @dev Returns true if this contract implements the interface defined by
     * `interfaceId`. See the corresponding
     * https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-165#how-interfaces-are-identified[EIP section]
     * to learn more about how these ids are created.
     *
     * This function call must use less than 30 000 gas.
     */
    function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId) external view returns (bool);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.8.0) (utils/math/Math.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/**
 * @dev Standard math utilities missing in the Solidity language.
 */
library Math {
    enum Rounding {
        Down, // Toward negative infinity
        Up, // Toward infinity
        Zero // Toward zero
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the largest of two numbers.
     */
    function max(uint256 a, uint256 b) internal pure returns (uint256) {
        return a > b ? a : b;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the smallest of two numbers.
     */
    function min(uint256 a, uint256 b) internal pure returns (uint256) {
        return a < b ? a : b;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the average of two numbers. The result is rounded towards
     * zero.
     */
    function average(uint256 a, uint256 b) internal pure returns (uint256) {
        // (a + b) / 2 can overflow.
        return (a & b) + (a ^ b) / 2;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the ceiling of the division of two numbers.
     *
     * This differs from standard division with `/` in that it rounds up instead
     * of rounding down.
     */
    function ceilDiv(uint256 a, uint256 b) internal pure returns (uint256) {
        // (a + b - 1) / b can overflow on addition, so we distribute.
        return a == 0 ? 0 : (a - 1) / b + 1;
    }
    /**
     * @notice Calculates floor(x * y / denominator) with full precision. Throws if result overflows a uint256 or denominator == 0
     * @dev Original credit to Remco Bloemen under MIT license (https://xn--2-umb.com/21/muldiv)
     * with further edits by Uniswap Labs also under MIT license.
     */
    function mulDiv(
        uint256 x,
        uint256 y,
        uint256 denominator
    ) internal pure returns (uint256 result) {
        unchecked {
            // 512-bit multiply [prod1 prod0] = x * y. Compute the product mod 2^256 and mod 2^256 - 1, then use
            // use the Chinese Remainder Theorem to reconstruct the 512 bit result. The result is stored in two 256
            // variables such that product = prod1 * 2^256 + prod0.
            uint256 prod0; // Least significant 256 bits of the product
            uint256 prod1; // Most significant 256 bits of the product
            assembly {
                let mm := mulmod(x, y, not(0))
                prod0 := mul(x, y)
                prod1 := sub(sub(mm, prod0), lt(mm, prod0))
            }
            // Handle non-overflow cases, 256 by 256 division.
            if (prod1 == 0) {
                return prod0 / denominator;
            }
            // Make sure the result is less than 2^256. Also prevents denominator == 0.
            require(denominator > prod1);
            ///////////////////////////////////////////////
            // 512 by 256 division.
            ///////////////////////////////////////////////
            // Make division exact by subtracting the remainder from [prod1 prod0].
            uint256 remainder;
            assembly {
                // Compute remainder using mulmod.
                remainder := mulmod(x, y, denominator)
                // Subtract 256 bit number from 512 bit number.
                prod1 := sub(prod1, gt(remainder, prod0))
                prod0 := sub(prod0, remainder)
            }
            // Factor powers of two out of denominator and compute largest power of two divisor of denominator. Always >= 1.
            // See https://cs.stackexchange.com/q/138556/92363.
            // Does not overflow because the denominator cannot be zero at this stage in the function.
            uint256 twos = denominator & (~denominator + 1);
            assembly {
                // Divide denominator by twos.
                denominator := div(denominator, twos)
                // Divide [prod1 prod0] by twos.
                prod0 := div(prod0, twos)
                // Flip twos such that it is 2^256 / twos. If twos is zero, then it becomes one.
                twos := add(div(sub(0, twos), twos), 1)
            }
            // Shift in bits from prod1 into prod0.
            prod0 |= prod1 * twos;
            // Invert denominator mod 2^256. Now that denominator is an odd number, it has an inverse modulo 2^256 such
            // that denominator * inv = 1 mod 2^256. Compute the inverse by starting with a seed that is correct for
            // four bits. That is, denominator * inv = 1 mod 2^4.
            uint256 inverse = (3 * denominator) ^ 2;
            // Use the Newton-Raphson iteration to improve the precision. Thanks to Hensel's lifting lemma, this also works
            // in modular arithmetic, doubling the correct bits in each step.
            inverse *= 2 - denominator * inverse; // inverse mod 2^8
            inverse *= 2 - denominator * inverse; // inverse mod 2^16
            inverse *= 2 - denominator * inverse; // inverse mod 2^32
            inverse *= 2 - denominator * inverse; // inverse mod 2^64
            inverse *= 2 - denominator * inverse; // inverse mod 2^128
            inverse *= 2 - denominator * inverse; // inverse mod 2^256
            // Because the division is now exact we can divide by multiplying with the modular inverse of denominator.
            // This will give us the correct result modulo 2^256. Since the preconditions guarantee that the outcome is
            // less than 2^256, this is the final result. We don't need to compute the high bits of the result and prod1
            // is no longer required.
            result = prod0 * inverse;
            return result;
        }
    }
    /**
     * @notice Calculates x * y / denominator with full precision, following the selected rounding direction.
     */
    function mulDiv(
        uint256 x,
        uint256 y,
        uint256 denominator,
        Rounding rounding
    ) internal pure returns (uint256) {
        uint256 result = mulDiv(x, y, denominator);
        if (rounding == Rounding.Up && mulmod(x, y, denominator) > 0) {
            result += 1;
        }
        return result;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the square root of a number. If the number is not a perfect square, the value is rounded down.
     *
     * Inspired by Henry S. Warren, Jr.'s "Hacker's Delight" (Chapter 11).
     */
    function sqrt(uint256 a) internal pure returns (uint256) {
        if (a == 0) {
            return 0;
        }
        // For our first guess, we get the biggest power of 2 which is smaller than the square root of the target.
        //
        // We know that the "msb" (most significant bit) of our target number `a` is a power of 2 such that we have
        // `msb(a) <= a < 2*msb(a)`. This value can be written `msb(a)=2**k` with `k=log2(a)`.
        //
        // This can be rewritten `2**log2(a) <= a < 2**(log2(a) + 1)`
        // → `sqrt(2**k) <= sqrt(a) < sqrt(2**(k+1))`
        // → `2**(k/2) <= sqrt(a) < 2**((k+1)/2) <= 2**(k/2 + 1)`
        //
        // Consequently, `2**(log2(a) / 2)` is a good first approximation of `sqrt(a)` with at least 1 correct bit.
        uint256 result = 1 << (log2(a) >> 1);
        // At this point `result` is an estimation with one bit of precision. We know the true value is a uint128,
        // since it is the square root of a uint256. Newton's method converges quadratically (precision doubles at
        // every iteration). We thus need at most 7 iteration to turn our partial result with one bit of precision
        // into the expected uint128 result.
        unchecked {
            result = (result + a / result) >> 1;
            result = (result + a / result) >> 1;
            result = (result + a / result) >> 1;
            result = (result + a / result) >> 1;
            result = (result + a / result) >> 1;
            result = (result + a / result) >> 1;
            result = (result + a / result) >> 1;
            return min(result, a / result);
        }
    }
    /**
     * @notice Calculates sqrt(a), following the selected rounding direction.
     */
    function sqrt(uint256 a, Rounding rounding) internal pure returns (uint256) {
        unchecked {
            uint256 result = sqrt(a);
            return result + (rounding == Rounding.Up && result * result < a ? 1 : 0);
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Return the log in base 2, rounded down, of a positive value.
     * Returns 0 if given 0.
     */
    function log2(uint256 value) internal pure returns (uint256) {
        uint256 result = 0;
        unchecked {
            if (value >> 128 > 0) {
                value >>= 128;
                result += 128;
            }
            if (value >> 64 > 0) {
                value >>= 64;
                result += 64;
            }
            if (value >> 32 > 0) {
                value >>= 32;
                result += 32;
            }
            if (value >> 16 > 0) {
                value >>= 16;
                result += 16;
            }
            if (value >> 8 > 0) {
                value >>= 8;
                result += 8;
            }
            if (value >> 4 > 0) {
                value >>= 4;
                result += 4;
            }
            if (value >> 2 > 0) {
                value >>= 2;
                result += 2;
            }
            if (value >> 1 > 0) {
                result += 1;
            }
        }
        return result;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Return the log in base 2, following the selected rounding direction, of a positive value.
     * Returns 0 if given 0.
     */
    function log2(uint256 value, Rounding rounding) internal pure returns (uint256) {
        unchecked {
            uint256 result = log2(value);
            return result + (rounding == Rounding.Up && 1 << result < value ? 1 : 0);
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Return the log in base 10, rounded down, of a positive value.
     * Returns 0 if given 0.
     */
    function log10(uint256 value) internal pure returns (uint256) {
        uint256 result = 0;
        unchecked {
            if (value >= 10**64) {
                value /= 10**64;
                result += 64;
            }
            if (value >= 10**32) {
                value /= 10**32;
                result += 32;
            }
            if (value >= 10**16) {
                value /= 10**16;
                result += 16;
            }
            if (value >= 10**8) {
                value /= 10**8;
                result += 8;
            }
            if (value >= 10**4) {
                value /= 10**4;
                result += 4;
            }
            if (value >= 10**2) {
                value /= 10**2;
                result += 2;
            }
            if (value >= 10**1) {
                result += 1;
            }
        }
        return result;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Return the log in base 10, following the selected rounding direction, of a positive value.
     * Returns 0 if given 0.
     */
    function log10(uint256 value, Rounding rounding) internal pure returns (uint256) {
        unchecked {
            uint256 result = log10(value);
            return result + (rounding == Rounding.Up && 10**result < value ? 1 : 0);
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Return the log in base 256, rounded down, of a positive value.
     * Returns 0 if given 0.
     *
     * Adding one to the result gives the number of pairs of hex symbols needed to represent `value` as a hex string.
     */
    function log256(uint256 value) internal pure returns (uint256) {
        uint256 result = 0;
        unchecked {
            if (value >> 128 > 0) {
                value >>= 128;
                result += 16;
            }
            if (value >> 64 > 0) {
                value >>= 64;
                result += 8;
            }
            if (value >> 32 > 0) {
                value >>= 32;
                result += 4;
            }
            if (value >> 16 > 0) {
                value >>= 16;
                result += 2;
            }
            if (value >> 8 > 0) {
                result += 1;
            }
        }
        return result;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Return the log in base 10, following the selected rounding direction, of a positive value.
     * Returns 0 if given 0.
     */
    function log256(uint256 value, Rounding rounding) internal pure returns (uint256) {
        unchecked {
            uint256 result = log256(value);
            return result + (rounding == Rounding.Up && 1 << (result * 8) < value ? 1 : 0);
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.8.0) (utils/Strings.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
import "./math/Math.sol";
/**
 * @dev String operations.
 */
library Strings {
    bytes16 private constant _SYMBOLS = "0123456789abcdef";
    uint8 private constant _ADDRESS_LENGTH = 20;
    /**
     * @dev Converts a `uint256` to its ASCII `string` decimal representation.
     */
    function toString(uint256 value) internal pure returns (string memory) {
        unchecked {
            uint256 length = Math.log10(value) + 1;
            string memory buffer = new string(length);
            uint256 ptr;
            /// @solidity memory-safe-assembly
            assembly {
                ptr := add(buffer, add(32, length))
            }
            while (true) {
                ptr--;
                /// @solidity memory-safe-assembly
                assembly {
                    mstore8(ptr, byte(mod(value, 10), _SYMBOLS))
                }
                value /= 10;
                if (value == 0) break;
            }
            return buffer;
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Converts a `uint256` to its ASCII `string` hexadecimal representation.
     */
    function toHexString(uint256 value) internal pure returns (string memory) {
        unchecked {
            return toHexString(value, Math.log256(value) + 1);
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Converts a `uint256` to its ASCII `string` hexadecimal representation with fixed length.
     */
    function toHexString(uint256 value, uint256 length) internal pure returns (string memory) {
        bytes memory buffer = new bytes(2 * length + 2);
        buffer[0] = "0";
        buffer[1] = "x";
        for (uint256 i = 2 * length + 1; i > 1; --i) {
            buffer[i] = _SYMBOLS[value & 0xf];
            value >>= 4;
        }
        require(value == 0, "Strings: hex length insufficient");
        return string(buffer);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Converts an `address` with fixed length of 20 bytes to its not checksummed ASCII `string` hexadecimal representation.
     */
    function toHexString(address addr) internal pure returns (string memory) {
        return toHexString(uint256(uint160(addr)), _ADDRESS_LENGTH);
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.17;
import "@openzeppelin/contracts-upgradeable/token/ERC1155/extensions/ERC1155SupplyUpgradeable.sol";
import "@openzeppelin/contracts-upgradeable/access/OwnableUpgradeable.sol";
import "@openzeppelin/contracts/utils/cryptography/MerkleProof.sol";
import "@openzeppelin/contracts-upgradeable/utils/AddressUpgradeable.sol";
import "@openzeppelin/contracts-upgradeable/token/common/ERC2981Upgradeable.sol";
import "operator-filter-registry/src/upgradeable/OperatorFiltererUpgradeable.sol";
import "./ICommon.sol";
struct TokenSettings {
    /// @dev total number of tokens that can be minted
    uint32 maxSupply;
    /// @dev total number of tokens that can be minted per wallet
    uint32 maxPerWallet;
    /// @dev tracks the total amount that have been minted
    uint32 amountMinted;
    /// @dev merkle root associated with claiming the token, otherwise bytes32(0)
    bytes32 merkleRoot;
    /// @dev timestamp of when the token can be minted
    uint32 mintStart;
    /// @dev timestamp of when the token can no longer be minted
    uint32 mintEnd;
    /// @dev price for the phase
    uint256 price;
    /// @dev uuid of the token within the Bueno ecosystem
    string uuid;
    /// @dev optional revenue splitting settings
    PaymentSplitterSettings paymentSplitterSettings;
}
struct TokenData {
    TokenSettings settings;
    uint256 index;
}
error TokenSettingsLocked();
error TokenAlreadyExists();
error InvalidPaymentSplitterSettings();
error TooManyTokens();
error InvalidToken();
error MintNotActive();
error InvalidMintDates();
/// @author Bueno.art
/// @title ERC-1155 "Drops" contract (v3)
contract Bueno1155Drop is
    ERC1155SupplyUpgradeable,
    OwnableUpgradeable,
    ERC2981Upgradeable,
    OperatorFiltererUpgradeable
{
    string public name;
    string public symbol;
    uint256 private _currentTokenId;
    bool private allowBurning;
    /// @dev maps the token ID (eg 1, 2 ...n) to the token's minting settings
    mapping(uint256 => TokenSettings) private _tokens;
    /// @dev track how many mints a particular wallet has made for a given token
    mapping(uint256 => mapping(address => uint64))
        private _mintBalanceByTokenId;
    /// @dev track how much revenue each payee has earned
    mapping(address => uint256) private _revenueByAddress;
    /// @dev track how much revenue has been released to each address
    mapping(address => uint256) private _released;
    /// @dev track how much revenue has been released in total
    uint256 private _totalReleased;
    /// @dev "fallback" payment splitter settings in case token-level settings aren't specified
    PaymentSplitterSettings private _fallbackPaymentSplitterSettings;
    event RoyaltyUpdated(address royaltyAddress, uint96 royaltyAmount);
    event TokenRoyaltyUpdated(
        uint256 tokenId,
        address royaltyAddress,
        uint96 royaltyAmount
    );
    event TokenCreated(string indexed uuid, uint256 indexed tokenId);
    event BurnStatusChanged(bool burnActive);
    event TokensAirdropped(uint256 numRecipients, uint256 numTokens);
    event TokenBurned(address indexed owner, uint256 tokenId, uint256 amount);
    event PaymentReleased(address to, uint256 amount);
    event TokenSettingsUpdated(uint256 tokenId);
    event RevenueSettingsUpdated(uint256 tokenId);
    event FallbackRevenueSettingsUpdated();
    event TokensMinted(address indexed to, uint256 tokenId, uint256 quantity);
    event TokenSupplyCapped(uint256 tokenId, uint256 maxSupply);
    /// @custom:oz-upgrades-unsafe-allow constructor
    constructor() {
        _disableInitializers();
    }
    function initialize(
        string memory _name,
        string memory _symbol,
        string memory _baseUri,
        TokenSettings[] calldata _tokenSettings,
        RoyaltySettings calldata _royaltySettings,
        PaymentSplitterSettings calldata _paymentSplitterSettings,
        bool _allowBurning,
        address _deployer,
        address _operatorFilter
    ) public initializer {
        __ERC1155_init(_baseUri);
        __Ownable_init();
        uint256 numTokens = _tokenSettings.length;
        // set a reasonable maximum here so we don't run out of gas
        if (numTokens > 100) {
            revert TooManyTokens();
        }
        // verify fallback (contract-level) payment splitter settings
        _verifyPaymentSplitterSettings(_paymentSplitterSettings);
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < numTokens; ) {
            // verify token-level payment splitter settings, if present
            if (_tokenSettings[i].paymentSplitterSettings.payees.length > 0) {
                _verifyPaymentSplitterSettings(
                    _tokenSettings[i].paymentSplitterSettings
                );
            }
            _verifyMintingTime(
                _tokenSettings[i].mintStart,
                _tokenSettings[i].mintEnd
            );
            _tokens[i] = _tokenSettings[i];
            // this value should always be 0 for new tokens
            _tokens[i].amountMinted = 0;
            emit TokenCreated(_tokenSettings[i].uuid, i);
            // numTokens has a maximum value of 2^256 - 1
            unchecked {
                ++i;
            }
        }
        _currentTokenId = numTokens;
        _fallbackPaymentSplitterSettings = _paymentSplitterSettings;
        name = _name;
        symbol = _symbol;
        allowBurning = _allowBurning;
        _setDefaultRoyalty(
            _royaltySettings.royaltyAddress,
            _royaltySettings.royaltyAmount
        );
        _transferOwnership(_deployer);
        OperatorFiltererUpgradeable.__OperatorFilterer_init(
            _operatorFilter,
            _operatorFilter == address(0) ? false : true // only subscribe if a filter is provided
        );
    }
    /*//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
                           CREATOR FUNCTIONS
    //////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////*/
    /**
     * @notice Create a new token to be minted with the provided settings.
     */
    function createDropToken(
        TokenSettings calldata settings
    ) external onlyOwner {
        if (settings.paymentSplitterSettings.payees.length > 0) {
            _verifyPaymentSplitterSettings(settings.paymentSplitterSettings);
        }
        _verifyMintingTime(settings.mintStart, settings.mintEnd);
        uint256 id = _currentTokenId;
        _tokens[id] = settings;
        // this value should always be 0 for new tokens
        _tokens[id].amountMinted = 0;
        ++_currentTokenId;
        emit TokenCreated(settings.uuid, id);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Create multiple tokens to be minted with the provided settings.
     */
    function createDropTokens(
        TokenSettings[] calldata tokenSettings
    ) external onlyOwner {
        uint256 numTokens = tokenSettings.length;
        uint256 currentTokenId = _currentTokenId;
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < numTokens; ) {
            if (tokenSettings[i].paymentSplitterSettings.payees.length > 0) {
                _verifyPaymentSplitterSettings(
                    tokenSettings[i].paymentSplitterSettings
                );
            }
            TokenSettings memory settings = tokenSettings[i];
            _verifyMintingTime(settings.mintStart, settings.mintEnd);
            uint256 id = currentTokenId;
            // this value should always be 0 for new tokens
            settings.amountMinted = 0;
            _tokens[id] = settings;
            ++currentTokenId;
            // numTokens has a maximum value of 2^256 - 1
            unchecked {
                ++i;
            }
            emit TokenCreated(settings.uuid, id);
        }
        _currentTokenId = currentTokenId;
    }
    /**
     * @notice Update the settings for a token. Certain settings cannot be changed once a token has been minted.
     */
    function updateTokenSettingsByIndex(
        uint256 id,
        TokenSettings calldata settings
    ) external onlyOwner {
        // cannot edit a token larger than the current token ID
        if (id >= _currentTokenId) {
            revert InvalidToken();
        }
        TokenSettings memory token = _tokens[id];
        uint32 existingAmountMinted = token.amountMinted;
        PaymentSplitterSettings memory existingPaymentSplitterSettings = token
            .paymentSplitterSettings;
        // Once a token has been minted, it's not possible to change the supply & start/end times
        if (
            existingAmountMinted > 0 &&
            (settings.maxSupply != token.maxSupply ||
                settings.mintStart != token.mintStart ||
                settings.mintEnd != token.mintEnd)
        ) {
            revert TokenSettingsLocked();
        }
        _verifyMintingTime(settings.mintStart, settings.mintEnd);
        _tokens[id] = settings;
        // it's not possible to update how many have been claimed, but it's part of the TokenSettings struct
        // ignore any value that is passed in and use the existing value
        _tokens[id].amountMinted = existingAmountMinted;
        // payment splitter settings can only be updated via `updatePaymentSplitterSettingsByIndex`
        _tokens[id].paymentSplitterSettings = existingPaymentSplitterSettings;
        emit TokenSettingsUpdated(id);
    }
    function updatePaymentSplitterSettingsByIndex(
        uint256 id,
        PaymentSplitterSettings calldata settings
    ) external onlyOwner {
        // cannot edit a token larger than the current token ID
        if (id >= _currentTokenId) {
            revert InvalidToken();
        }
        // revenue split cannot be changed once a token is minted
        if (_tokens[id].amountMinted > 0) {
            revert TokenSettingsLocked();
        }
        _verifyPaymentSplitterSettings(settings);
        _tokens[id].paymentSplitterSettings = settings;
        emit RevenueSettingsUpdated(id);
    }
    function updateFallbackPaymentSplitterSettings(
        PaymentSplitterSettings calldata settings
    ) external onlyOwner {
        _verifyPaymentSplitterSettings(settings);
        _fallbackPaymentSplitterSettings = settings;
        emit FallbackRevenueSettingsUpdated();
    }
    function _verifyMintingTime(uint32 mintStart, uint32 mintEnd) private view {
        if (mintEnd > 0) {
            // mint end must be after mint start
            if (mintEnd < mintStart) {
                revert InvalidMintDates();
            }
            // mint end must be in the future
            if (mintEnd < block.timestamp) {
                revert InvalidMintDates();
            }
        }
    }
    function _verifyPaymentSplitterSettings(
        PaymentSplitterSettings calldata settings
    ) private pure {
        uint256 shareTotal;
        uint256 numPayees = settings.payees.length;
        // we discourage using the payment splitter for more than 4 payees, as it's not gas efficient for minting
        // more advanced use-cases should consider a multi-sig payee
        if (numPayees != settings.shares.length || numPayees > 4) {
            revert InvalidPaymentSplitterSettings();
        }
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < numPayees; ) {
            uint256 shares = settings.shares[i];
            if (shares == 0) {
                revert InvalidPaymentSplitterSettings();
            }
            shareTotal += shares;
            // this can't overflow as numPayees is capped at 4
            unchecked {
                ++i;
            }
        }
        if (shareTotal != 100) {
            revert InvalidPaymentSplitterSettings();
        }
    }
    /**
     * @notice Perform a batch airdrop of tokens to a list of recipients
     */
    function airdropToken(
        uint256 id,
        uint32[] calldata quantities,
        address[] calldata recipients
    ) external onlyOwner {
        if (id >= _currentTokenId) {
            revert InvalidToken();
        }
        uint256 numRecipients = recipients.length;
        uint256 totalAirdropped;
        if (numRecipients != quantities.length) revert InvalidAirdrop();
        TokenSettings storage token = _tokens[id];
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < numRecipients; ) {
            uint32 updatedAmountMinted = token.amountMinted + quantities[i];
            if (token.maxSupply > 0 && updatedAmountMinted > token.maxSupply) {
                revert SoldOut();
            }
            // airdrops are not subject to the per-wallet mint limits,
            // but we track how much is minted
            token.amountMinted = updatedAmountMinted;
            totalAirdropped += quantities[i];
            _mint(recipients[i], id, quantities[i], "");
            // numRecipients has a maximum value of 2^256 - 1
            unchecked {
                ++i;
            }
        }
        emit TokensAirdropped(numRecipients, totalAirdropped);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Release funds for a particular payee
     */
    function release(address payee) public {
        uint256 amount = releasable(payee);
        if (amount > 0) {
            _totalReleased += amount;
            // If "_totalReleased += amount" does not overflow, then "_released[payee] += amount" cannot overflow.
            unchecked {
                _released[payee] += amount;
            }
            AddressUpgradeable.sendValue(payable(payee), amount);
            emit PaymentReleased(payee, amount);
        }
    }
    /**
     * @notice Release funds for specified payees
     * @dev This is a convenience method to calling release() for each payee
     */
    function releaseBatch(address[] calldata payees) external {
        uint256 numPayees = payees.length;
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < numPayees; ) {
            release(payees[i]);
            // this can't overflow as numPayees is capped at 4
            unchecked {
                ++i;
            }
        }
    }
    /**
     * @notice Update the default royalty settings (EIP-2981) for the contract.
     */
    function setRoyaltyInfo(
        address receiver,
        uint96 feeBasisPoints
    ) external onlyOwner {
        _setDefaultRoyalty(receiver, feeBasisPoints);
        emit RoyaltyUpdated(receiver, feeBasisPoints);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Update the royalty settings (EIP-2981) for the token.
     */
    function setTokenRoyaltyInfo(
        uint256 tokenId,
        address receiver,
        uint96 feeBasisPoints
    ) external onlyOwner {
        _setTokenRoyalty(tokenId, receiver, feeBasisPoints);
        emit TokenRoyaltyUpdated(tokenId, receiver, feeBasisPoints);
    }
    /**
     * @notice If enabled, the token can be burned, for approved operators.
     * @dev The burn method will revert unless this is enabled
     */
    function toggleBurning() external onlyOwner {
        allowBurning = !allowBurning;
        emit BurnStatusChanged(allowBurning);
    }
    /**
     * @dev See {ERC1155Upgradeable-_setURI}
     */
    function setUri(string calldata uri) external onlyOwner {
        _setURI(uri);
    }
    /**
     * @notice This function can only be called for tokens with supply. Calling this function will set the max supply
     * of a token to the current amount minted. This cannot be reversed.
     */
    function capSupplyAtIndex(uint256 id) external onlyOwner {
        TokenSettings storage token = _tokens[id];
        // only limited edition tokens can be capped
        if (token.maxSupply == 0) {
            revert InvalidToken();
        }
        token.maxSupply = token.amountMinted;
        emit TokenSupplyCapped(id, token.maxSupply);
    }
    /*//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
                           MINTING FUNCTIONS
    //////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////*/
    /**
     * @notice Mint a token to the sender
     */
    function mintToken(uint256 id, uint32 quantity) external payable {
        TokenSettings memory token = _tokens[id];
        if (token.merkleRoot != bytes32(0)) {
            revert InvalidMintFunction();
        }
        _mintAfterChecks(
            msg.sender,
            msg.value,
            id,
            quantity,
            token.maxPerWallet
        );
    }
    /**
     * @notice Mint a token to a specific address
     * @dev Useful in case the recipient of the tokens is not the sender (gifting, fiat checkout, etc)
     */
    function mintTokenTo(
        address account,
        uint256 id,
        uint32 quantity
    ) external payable {
        TokenSettings memory token = _tokens[id];
        if (token.merkleRoot != bytes32(0)) {
            revert InvalidMintFunction();
        }
        _mintAfterChecks(account, msg.value, id, quantity, token.maxPerWallet);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Mint a token that has an allowlist associated with it.
     * @dev maxQuantity is encoded as part of the proof, and is a way to associate variable quantities with each allowlisted wallet
     */
    function mintTokenAllowlist(
        uint256 id,
        uint32 quantity,
        uint32 maxQuantity,
        bytes32[] calldata proof
    ) external payable {
        bytes32 merkleRoot = _tokens[id].merkleRoot;
        if (merkleRoot == bytes32(0)) {
            revert InvalidMintFunction();
        }
        if (
            !MerkleProof.verify(
                proof,
                merkleRoot,
                keccak256(abi.encodePacked(msg.sender, maxQuantity))
            )
        ) {
            revert InvalidProof();
        }
        _mintAfterChecks(msg.sender, msg.value, id, quantity, maxQuantity);
    }
    function _mintAfterChecks(
        address account,
        uint256 balance,
        uint256 id,
        uint32 quantity,
        uint32 maxQuantity
    ) private {
        if (id >= _currentTokenId) {
            revert InvalidToken();
        }
        TokenSettings storage token = _tokens[id];
        if (balance != token.price * quantity) {
            revert InvalidPrice();
        }
        if (
            token.maxSupply > 0 &&
            token.amountMinted + quantity > token.maxSupply
        ) {
            revert SoldOut();
        }
        if (
            maxQuantity > 0 &&
            // maxQuantity is either the token-level maxPerWallet, or the maxQuantity passed in from the allowlist mint function
            // if the latter, the value is provided by the user, but is first checked against the merkle tree
            _mintBalanceByTokenId[id][account] + quantity > maxQuantity
        ) {
            revert ExceedMaxPerWallet();
        }
        if (token.mintStart > 0 && block.timestamp < token.mintStart) {
            revert MintNotActive();
        }
        if (token.mintEnd > 0 && block.timestamp > token.mintEnd) {
            revert MintNotActive();
        }
        // we only need to proceed if this is a revenue generating mint
        if (balance > 0) {
            uint256 numPayees = token.paymentSplitterSettings.payees.length;
            if (numPayees > 0) {
                // if we have token-level payment splitter settings, use those
                calculateRevenueSplit(balance, token.paymentSplitterSettings);
            } else {
                // otherwise, fallback to the contract-level payment splitter settings
                calculateRevenueSplit(
                    balance,
                    _fallbackPaymentSplitterSettings
                );
            }
        }
        token.amountMinted += quantity;
        _mintBalanceByTokenId[id][account] += quantity;
        _mint(account, id, quantity, "");
        emit TokensMinted(account, id, quantity);
    }
    function calculateRevenueSplit(
        uint256 value,
        PaymentSplitterSettings storage paymentSplitterSettings
    ) private {
        uint256 numPayees = paymentSplitterSettings.payees.length;
        // each token can have different payment splitter settings, and price can change while mint is occurring
        // therefore we need to do some revenue accounting at the time of mint based on the price paid
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < numPayees; ) {
            address payee = paymentSplitterSettings.payees[i];
            uint256 amount = ((value * paymentSplitterSettings.shares[i]) /
                100);
            _revenueByAddress[payee] += amount;
            // this can't overflow as numPayees is capped at 4
            unchecked {
                ++i;
            }
        }
    }
    /**
     * @notice Burn a token, if the contract allows for it
     */
    function burn(uint256 id, uint256 amount) external {
        if (!allowBurning) {
            revert BurningNotAllowed();
        }
        _burn(msg.sender, id, amount);
        emit TokenBurned(msg.sender, id, amount);
    }
    /*//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
                             VIEW FUNCTIONS
    //////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////*/
    /**
     * @notice Get the token data based on it's ID (1, 2, etc)
     */
    function getTokenSettingsByTokenId(
        uint256 id
    ) external view returns (TokenSettings memory) {
        return _tokens[id];
    }
    /**
     * @notice Retrieve the fallback payment splitter config (used if a token doesn't have it's own payment splitter settings)
     */
    function getFallbackPaymentSplitterSettings()
        external
        view
        returns (PaymentSplitterSettings memory)
    {
        return _fallbackPaymentSplitterSettings;
    }
    /**
     * @notice Get the token data for all tokens associated with the contract
     */
    function getAllTokenData() external view returns (TokenData[] memory) {
        uint256 numTokens = _currentTokenId;
        TokenData[] memory tokens = new TokenData[](numTokens);
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < numTokens; i++) {
            tokens[i].settings = _tokens[i];
            tokens[i].index = i;
        }
        return tokens;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Getter for the amount of Ether already released to a payee.
     */
    function released(address account) public view returns (uint256) {
        return _released[account];
    }
    /**
     * @dev Getter for the total amount of Ether already released.
     */
    function totalReleased() external view returns (uint256) {
        return _totalReleased;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Getter for the amount of payee's releasable Ether.
     */
    function releasable(address account) public view returns (uint256) {
        return _revenueByAddress[account] - released(account);
    }
    /**
     * @dev See {IERC165-supportsInterface}.
     */
    function supportsInterface(
        bytes4 interfaceId
    )
        public
        view
        virtual
        override(ERC1155Upgradeable, ERC2981Upgradeable)
        returns (bool)
    {
        return super.supportsInterface(interfaceId);
    }
    /*//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
                      OPERATOR REGISTRY OVERRIDES
    //////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////*/
    function setApprovalForAll(
        address operator,
        bool approved
    ) public override onlyAllowedOperatorApproval(operator) {
        super.setApprovalForAll(operator, approved);
    }
    /**
     * @dev See {IERC1155-safeTransferFrom}.
     */
    function safeTransferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId,
        uint256 amount,
        bytes memory data
    ) public override onlyAllowedOperator(from) {
        super.safeTransferFrom(from, to, tokenId, amount, data);
    }
    /**
     * @dev See {IERC1155-safeBatchTransferFrom}.
     */
    function safeBatchTransferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256[] memory ids,
        uint256[] memory amounts,
        bytes memory data
    ) public virtual override onlyAllowedOperator(from) {
        super.safeBatchTransferFrom(from, to, ids, amounts, data);
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.17;
import "erc721a-upgradeable/contracts/extensions/ERC721AQueryableUpgradeable.sol";
import "@openzeppelin/contracts-upgradeable/access/OwnableUpgradeable.sol";
import "@openzeppelin/contracts-upgradeable/token/common/ERC2981Upgradeable.sol";
import "@openzeppelin/contracts/utils/cryptography/MerkleProof.sol";
import "@openzeppelin/contracts-upgradeable/finance/PaymentSplitterUpgradeable.sol";
import "operator-filter-registry/src/upgradeable/OperatorFiltererUpgradeable.sol";
import "./ICommon.sol";
struct PhaseSettings {
    /// @dev phase supply. This can be released to public by ending the phase.
    uint64 maxSupply;
    /// @dev tracks the total amount minted in the phase
    uint64 amountMinted;
    /// @dev wallet maximum for the phase
    uint64 maxPerWallet;
    /// @dev merkle root for the phase (if applicable, otherwise bytes32(0))
    bytes32 merkleRoot;
    /// @dev whether the phase is active
    bool isActive;
    /// @dev price for the phase (or free if 0)
    uint256 price;
}
struct BaseSettings {
    /// @dev public sale supply. ending a phase will carry supply into this value
    uint64 maxSupply;
    /// @dev global wallet maximum across all phases (including public)
    uint64 maxPerWallet;
    /// @dev tracks the total amount minted in the public sale
    uint64 amountMinted;
    /// @dev price for the public sale (or free if 0)
    uint256 price;
}
struct SaleState {
    uint64 numPhases;
    mapping(uint256 => PhaseSettings) phases;
}
error PhaseNotActive();
error InvalidPhase();
error PhaseNotEnded();
/// @author Bueno.art
/// @title ERC-721 Multi-Phase Drop Contract (v3)
contract Bueno721Drop is
    ERC721AQueryableUpgradeable,
    OwnableUpgradeable,
    ERC2981Upgradeable,
    PaymentSplitterUpgradeable,
    OperatorFiltererUpgradeable
{
    string public _baseTokenURI;
    SaleState public saleState;
    BaseSettings public baseSettings;
    uint256 public maxSupply;
    address[] public withdrawAddresses;
    mapping(address => mapping(uint256 => uint64)) private amountMintedForPhase;
    bool public isPublicActive;
    bool private allowBurning;
    event TokensMinted(address indexed to, uint256 quantity);
    event TokenBurned(address indexed owner, uint256 tokenId);
    event TokensAirdropped(uint256 numRecipients, uint256 numTokens);
    event PhasesActivated(uint256[] phaseIds, bool activatedPublic);
    event PhasesPaused(uint256[] phaseIds, bool pausedPublic);
    event PhaseEnded(uint256 phaseIds);
    event BurnStatusChanged(bool burnActive);
    event PhaseSettingsUpdated(uint256 phaseId, PhaseSettings settings);
    event BaseSettingsUpdated(BaseSettings settings);
    event BaseURIUpdated(string baseURI);
    event RoyaltyUpdated(address royaltyAddress, uint96 royaltyAmount);
    /// @custom:oz-upgrades-unsafe-allow constructor
    constructor() {
        _disableInitializers();
    }
    function initialize(
        string memory _name,
        string memory _symbol,
        string memory _baseUri,
        RoyaltySettings calldata _royaltySettings,
        PhaseSettings[] calldata _phases,
        BaseSettings calldata _baseSettings,
        PaymentSplitterSettings calldata _paymentSplitterSettings,
        uint256 _maxIntendedSupply,
        bool _allowBurning,
        address _deployer,
        address _operatorFilter
    ) public initializerERC721A initializer {
        __ERC721A_init(_name, _symbol);
        __Ownable_init();
        __PaymentSplitter_init(
            _paymentSplitterSettings.payees,
            _paymentSplitterSettings.shares
        );
        uint64 numPhases = uint64(_phases.length);
        uint256 supplyValidationCount = _baseSettings.maxSupply;
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < numPhases; ) {
            saleState.phases[i] = _phases[i];
            supplyValidationCount += _phases[i].maxSupply;
            // numPhases has a maximum value of 2^64 - 1
            unchecked {
                ++i;
            }
        }
        require(
            supplyValidationCount == _maxIntendedSupply,
            "Supply of all phases must equal maxIntendedSupply"
        );
        _baseTokenURI = _baseUri;
        withdrawAddresses = _paymentSplitterSettings.payees;
        saleState.numPhases = numPhases;
        baseSettings = _baseSettings;
        allowBurning = _allowBurning;
        maxSupply = _maxIntendedSupply;
        _setDefaultRoyalty(
            _royaltySettings.royaltyAddress,
            _royaltySettings.royaltyAmount
        );
        transferOwnership(_deployer);
        OperatorFiltererUpgradeable.__OperatorFilterer_init(
            _operatorFilter,
            _operatorFilter == address(0) ? false : true // only subscribe if a filter is provided
        );
    }
    // ========= EXTERNAL MINTING METHODS =========
    /**
     * @notice Mint tokens for an allowlisted phase
     * @dev Calling this function for a phase that doesn't have an allowlist will fail
     */
    function mintPhaseAllowlist(
        uint256 phaseIndex,
        uint64 quantity,
        uint32 maxQuantity,
        bytes32[] calldata proof
    ) external payable {
        uint64 updatedAmountMinted = _checkAllowlistPhaseMintConditions(
            quantity,
            maxQuantity,
            proof,
            phaseIndex,
            msg.value
        );
        _mintPhaseTo(msg.sender, quantity, phaseIndex, updatedAmountMinted);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Mint tokens for a non-allowlist phase.
     * @dev Calling this function for a phase that has an allowlist will fail
     */
    function mintPhase(uint256 phaseIndex, uint64 quantity) external payable {
        uint64 updatedAmountMinted = _checkPhaseMintConditions(
            msg.sender,
            quantity,
            phaseIndex,
            msg.value
        );
        _mintPhaseTo(msg.sender, quantity, phaseIndex, updatedAmountMinted);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Mint a token to a specific address from a non-allowlisted sale phase
     * @dev Useful in case the recipient of the tokens is not the sender (gifting, fiat checkout, etc)
     */
    function mintPhaseTo(
        address account,
        uint256 phaseIndex,
        uint64 quantity
    ) external payable {
        uint64 updatedAmountMinted = _checkPhaseMintConditions(
            account,
            quantity,
            phaseIndex,
            msg.value
        );
        _mintPhaseTo(account, quantity, phaseIndex, updatedAmountMinted);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Mint tokens for a given phase
     * @param account The address to mint the tokens to
     * @param quantity The number of tokens to mint
     * @param phaseIndex The index of the phase to mint from
     * @param updatedAmountMinted The updated amount minted for the phase
     */
    function _mintPhaseTo(
        address account,
        uint64 quantity,
        uint256 phaseIndex,
        uint64 updatedAmountMinted
    ) internal {
        _checkGlobalPerWalletMax(account, quantity);
        saleState.phases[phaseIndex].amountMinted += quantity;
        amountMintedForPhase[account][phaseIndex] = updatedAmountMinted;
        _mint(account, quantity);
        emit TokensMinted(account, quantity);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Mint tokens in the public sale
     */
    function mintPublic(uint64 quantity) external payable {
        _mintPublicTo(msg.sender, quantity);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Mint a token to a specific address from the public sale
     * @dev Useful in case the recipient of the tokens is not the sender (gifting, fiat checkout, etc)
     */
    function mintPublicTo(address account, uint64 quantity) external payable {
        _mintPublicTo(account, quantity);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Mint tokens in the public sale
     * @param account The address to mint the tokens to
     * @param quantity The number of tokens to mint
     */
    function _mintPublicTo(address account, uint64 quantity) internal {
        uint64 updatedAmountMinted = _checkPublicMintConditions(
            quantity,
            msg.value
        );
        _checkGlobalPerWalletMax(account, quantity);
        baseSettings.amountMinted = updatedAmountMinted;
        _mint(account, quantity);
        emit TokensMinted(account, quantity);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Mint tokens in all possible phases (including public sale)
     */
    function mintBatch(
        uint64[] calldata quantities,
        uint32[] calldata maxQuantities,
        bytes32[][] calldata proofs,
        uint256[] calldata phaseIndices,
        uint64 publicQuantity
    ) external payable {
        uint256 phaseLength = phaseIndices.length;
        if (
            phaseLength > saleState.numPhases ||
            phaseLength != quantities.length ||
            phaseLength != proofs.length ||
            phaseLength != maxQuantities.length
        ) {
            revert InvalidPhase();
        }
        uint256 balance = msg.value;
        uint256 quantityToMint;
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < phaseLength; ) {
            uint64 updatedAmount;
            uint256 phaseIndex = phaseIndices[i];
            uint64 quantity = quantities[i];
            uint32 maxQuantity = maxQuantities[i];
            bytes32[] calldata proof = proofs[i];
            PhaseSettings storage phase = saleState.phases[phaseIndex];
            uint256 priceForPhase = phase.price * quantity;
            // Since price is strictly checked in the _check* functions below,
            // we have an additional check here to ensure that the balance doesn't underflow
            if (balance < priceForPhase) {
                revert InvalidPrice();
            }
            // if the phase has no allowlist, the merkleRoot will be zeroed out.
            if (phase.merkleRoot == bytes32(0)) {
                updatedAmount = _checkPhaseMintConditions(
                    msg.sender,
                    quantity,
                    phaseIndex,
                    priceForPhase
                );
            } else {
                updatedAmount = _checkAllowlistPhaseMintConditions(
                    quantity,
                    maxQuantity,
                    proof,
                    phaseIndex,
                    priceForPhase
                );
            }
            // quantity & phaseLength have a maximum value of 2^64 - 1
            // balance underflow is checked above
            unchecked {
                saleState.phases[phaseIndex].amountMinted += quantity;
                amountMintedForPhase[msg.sender][phaseIndex] = updatedAmount;
                balance -= priceForPhase;
                quantityToMint += quantity;
                ++i;
            }
        }
        uint256 totalMintQuantity = quantityToMint;
        if (publicQuantity > 0) {
            _checkPublicMintConditions(publicQuantity, balance);
            // publicQuantity has a max value of 2^64 - 1
            unchecked {
                baseSettings.amountMinted += publicQuantity;
                totalMintQuantity += publicQuantity;
            }
        } else {
            // remaining balance is checked in _checkPublicMintConditions, so we only need to check
            // in the case where publicQuantity is 0
            if (balance != 0) {
                revert InvalidPrice();
            }
        }
        _checkGlobalPerWalletMax(msg.sender, totalMintQuantity);
        _mint(msg.sender, totalMintQuantity);
        emit TokensMinted(msg.sender, totalMintQuantity);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Burn a token, if the contract allows for it
     */
    function burn(uint256 tokenId) external {
        if (!allowBurning) {
            revert BurningNotAllowed();
        }
        _burn(tokenId, true);
        emit TokenBurned(msg.sender, tokenId);
    }
    // ========= OWNER METHODS =========
    /**
     * @notice Perform a batch airdrop for a particular phase.
     * @dev Minted tokens are pulled from the phase that is specified in the airdropper.
     */
    function airdropForPhase(
        uint256 phaseIndex,
        uint64[] calldata quantities,
        address[] calldata recipients
    ) external onlyOwner {
        uint256 numRecipients = recipients.length;
        uint256 totalAirdropped;
        if (numRecipients != quantities.length) revert InvalidAirdrop();
        PhaseSettings storage phase = saleState.phases[phaseIndex];
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < numRecipients; ) {
            uint64 updatedAmountMinted = phase.amountMinted + quantities[i];
            if (updatedAmountMinted > phase.maxSupply) {
                revert SoldOut();
            }
            // airdrops are not subject to the per-wallet mint limits,
            // but we track how much is minted for the phase
            phase.amountMinted = updatedAmountMinted;
            totalAirdropped += quantities[i];
            _mint(recipients[i], quantities[i]);
            // numRecipients has a maximum value of 2^256 - 1
            unchecked {
                ++i;
            }
        }
        emit TokensAirdropped(numRecipients, totalAirdropped);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Perform a batch airdrop for the public phase.
     * @dev Minted tokens are pulled from the public phase.
     */
    function airdropPublic(
        uint64[] calldata quantities,
        address[] calldata recipients
    ) external onlyOwner {
        uint256 numRecipients = recipients.length;
        uint256 totalAirdropped;
        if (numRecipients != quantities.length) revert InvalidAirdrop();
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < numRecipients; ) {
            uint64 updatedAmountMinted = baseSettings.amountMinted +
                quantities[i];
            if (updatedAmountMinted > baseSettings.maxSupply) {
                revert SoldOut();
            }
            // airdrops are not subject to the per-wallet mint limits,
            // but we track how much is minted for the phase
            baseSettings.amountMinted = updatedAmountMinted;
            totalAirdropped += quantities[i];
            _mint(recipients[i], quantities[i]);
            // numRecipients has a maximum value of 2^256 - 1
            unchecked {
                ++i;
            }
        }
        emit TokensAirdropped(numRecipients, totalAirdropped);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Specify which phases are active.
     * Public sale can be activated by setting `activatePublic` to true.
     */
    function activatePhases(
        uint256[] calldata phaseIndices,
        bool activatePublic
    ) external onlyOwner {
        uint256 numPhases = phaseIndices.length;
        // activate all the phases provided in phaseIndices
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < numPhases; ) {
            uint256 phaseIndex = phaseIndices[i];
            if (phaseIndex >= saleState.numPhases) {
                // phaseIndex is out of bounds
                revert InvalidPhase();
            }
            saleState.phases[phaseIndices[i]].isActive = true;
            // numPhases has a maximum value of 2^256 - 1
            unchecked {
                ++i;
            }
        }
        // calling this function with activatePublic=false only indicates the public sale
        // is not intended to be activated, but it does not pause it.
        if (activatePublic) {
            isPublicActive = true;
        }
        emit PhasesActivated(phaseIndices, activatePublic);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Specify which phases are inactive (paused).
     * Public sale can be paused by setting `pausePublic` to true.
     * Pausing is separate from ending, since ending permanently closes the phase.
     */
    function pausePhases(
        uint256[] calldata phaseIndices,
        bool pausePublic
    ) external onlyOwner {
        uint256 numPhases = phaseIndices.length;
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < numPhases; ) {
            uint256 phaseIndex = phaseIndices[i];
            if (phaseIndex >= saleState.numPhases) {
                // phaseIndex is out of bounds
                revert InvalidPhase();
            }
            saleState.phases[phaseIndex].isActive = false;
            // numPhases has a maximum value of 2^256 - 1
            unchecked {
                ++i;
            }
        }
        // calling this function with pausePublic=false only indicates the public sale
        // is not intended to be paused, but it does not pause it.
        if (pausePublic) {
            isPublicActive = false;
        }
        emit PhasesPaused(phaseIndices, pausePublic);
    }
    /**
     * @notice If enabled, the token can be burned, for approved operators.
     * @dev The burn method will revert unless this is enabled
     */
    function toggleBurning() external onlyOwner {
        allowBurning = !allowBurning;
        emit BurnStatusChanged(allowBurning);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Permanently closes a phase by capping the supply & releasing it
     */
    function endPhase(uint256 phaseIndex) public onlyOwner {
        PhaseSettings storage phase = saleState.phases[phaseIndex];
        // if the phase never had supply, there is nothing to do
        if (phase.maxSupply == 0) {
            revert InvalidPhase();
        }
        // transfer the remaining supply into the base settings (used for public sale accounting)
        baseSettings.maxSupply += phase.maxSupply - phase.amountMinted;
        // remove the supply from the phase
        phase.maxSupply = 0;
        emit PhaseEnded(phaseIndex);
    }
    function endPhases(uint64[] calldata phaseIndices) external onlyOwner {
        uint256 phaseIndicesLength = phaseIndices.length;
        // ensure that phaseIndices argument will only ever be as large as the number of phases
        if (phaseIndicesLength > saleState.numPhases) {
            revert InvalidPhase();
        }
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < phaseIndicesLength; ) {
            endPhase(phaseIndices[i]);
            // phaseIndicesLength has a maximum value of 2^256 - 1
            unchecked {
                ++i;
            }
        }
    }
    /**
     * @notice Updates the minting rules for a particular phase
     * @dev supply, amountMinted are not changeable. isActive is handled by activatePhases
     */
    function updatePhaseSettings(
        uint256 phaseIndex,
        PhaseSettings calldata phase
    ) external onlyOwner {
        uint64 existingAmountMinted = saleState.phases[phaseIndex].amountMinted;
        uint64 existingMaxSupply = saleState.phases[phaseIndex].maxSupply;
        bool existingStatus = saleState.phases[phaseIndex].isActive;
        saleState.phases[phaseIndex] = phase;
        // ensure that the amountMinted, maxSupply, and status values cannot be set
        saleState.phases[phaseIndex].amountMinted = existingAmountMinted;
        saleState.phases[phaseIndex].maxSupply = existingMaxSupply;
        saleState.phases[phaseIndex].isActive = existingStatus;
        emit PhaseSettingsUpdated(phaseIndex, phase);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Updates the the base minting settings
     * The global maxPerWallet setting applies to all phases
     * Pricing and other fields will apply to the public sale
     *
     * @dev maxSupply & amountMinted are not changeable. isActive is handled by activatePhases
     */
    function updateBaseSettings(
        BaseSettings calldata _baseSettings
    ) external onlyOwner {
        uint64 existingMaxSupply = baseSettings.maxSupply;
        uint64 existingAmountMinted = baseSettings.amountMinted;
        baseSettings = _baseSettings;
        // ensure that the maxSupply & amountMinted value cannot be set
        baseSettings.maxSupply = existingMaxSupply;
        baseSettings.amountMinted = existingAmountMinted;
        emit BaseSettingsUpdated(_baseSettings);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Payment can be pulled via PaymentSplitter.release
     * this method is provided for convenience to release all payee funds
     */
    function withdraw() external onlyOwner {
        uint256 numAddresses = withdrawAddresses.length;
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < numAddresses; ) {
            address payable withdrawAddress = payable(withdrawAddresses[i]);
            if (releasable(withdrawAddress) > 0) {
                release(withdrawAddress);
            }
            // numAddresses has a maximum value of 2^256 - 1
            unchecked {
                ++i;
            }
        }
    }
    function setBaseURI(string memory baseURI) external onlyOwner {
        _baseTokenURI = baseURI;
        emit BaseURIUpdated(baseURI);
    }
    function setRoyaltyInfo(
        address receiver,
        uint96 feeBasisPoints
    ) external onlyOwner {
        _setDefaultRoyalty(receiver, feeBasisPoints);
        emit RoyaltyUpdated(receiver, feeBasisPoints);
    }
    /**
     * @notice This function cannot be called if any phase has not ended. This will cap the max supply
     * to the amount of tokens that have been minted so far. This cannot be reversed.
     */
    function capMaxSupply() external onlyOwner {
        uint64 numPhases = saleState.numPhases;
        for (uint64 i = 0; i < numPhases; ) {
            if (saleState.phases[i].maxSupply > 0) {
                // we only want to cap the supply if all phases are ended, meaning their supply
                // has been transferred to the public/base phase
                revert PhaseNotEnded();
            }
            // numPhases has a maximum value of 2^64 - 1
            unchecked {
                ++i;
            }
        }
        // whatever the amount of tokens that has been minted is the new overall "max supply"
        maxSupply = _totalMinted();
        // the max supply of the public/base phase is however many have been minted
        baseSettings.maxSupply = baseSettings.amountMinted;
    }
    // ========= VIEW METHODS =========
    function _startTokenId() internal view virtual override returns (uint256) {
        return 1;
    }
    function _checkAllowlistPhaseMintConditions(
        uint64 quantity,
        uint32 maxQuantity,
        bytes32[] calldata proof,
        uint256 phaseIndex,
        uint256 balance
    ) internal view returns (uint64) {
        PhaseSettings storage phase = saleState.phases[phaseIndex];
        if (!phase.isActive) {
            revert PhaseNotActive();
        }
        // there should be a valid merkle root for the phase
        if (phase.merkleRoot == bytes32(0)) {
            revert InvalidMintFunction();
        }
        if (phase.amountMinted + quantity > phase.maxSupply) {
            revert SoldOut();
        }
        if (balance != quantity * phase.price) {
            revert InvalidPrice();
        }
        if (
            !MerkleProof.verify(
                proof,
                phase.merkleRoot,
                keccak256(abi.encodePacked(msg.sender, maxQuantity))
            )
        ) {
            revert InvalidProof();
        }
        uint256 amountMinted = amountMintedForPhase[msg.sender][phaseIndex];
        uint256 updatedAmountMinted = amountMinted + quantity;
        if (
            // phases can have a maxPerWallet
            (maxQuantity == 0 &&
                phase.maxPerWallet > 0 &&
                updatedAmountMinted > phase.maxPerWallet) ||
            // wallets can have a maxPerWallet encoded in the merkle tree
            (maxQuantity > 0 && updatedAmountMinted > maxQuantity)
        ) {
            revert ExceedMaxPerWallet();
        }
        return uint64(updatedAmountMinted);
    }
    function _checkPhaseMintConditions(
        address wallet,
        uint256 quantity,
        uint256 phaseIndex,
        uint256 balance
    ) internal view returns (uint64) {
        PhaseSettings storage phase = saleState.phases[phaseIndex];
        if (!phase.isActive) {
            revert PhaseNotActive();
        }
        // the phase should not have a merkleRoot
        if (phase.merkleRoot != bytes32(0)) {
            revert InvalidMintFunction();
        }
        if (phase.amountMinted + quantity > phase.maxSupply) {
            revert SoldOut();
        }
        if (balance != quantity * phase.price) {
            revert InvalidPrice();
        }
        uint256 amountMinted = amountMintedForPhase[wallet][phaseIndex];
        uint256 updatedAmountMinted = amountMinted + quantity;
        // phases can have a maxPerWallet
        if (
            phase.maxPerWallet > 0 && updatedAmountMinted > phase.maxPerWallet
        ) {
            revert ExceedMaxPerWallet();
        }
        return uint64(updatedAmountMinted);
    }
    function _checkPublicMintConditions(
        uint256 quantity,
        uint256 balance
    ) internal view returns (uint64) {
        if (!isPublicActive) {
            revert PhaseNotActive();
        }
        uint256 updatedAmountMinted = baseSettings.amountMinted + quantity;
        if (updatedAmountMinted > baseSettings.maxSupply) {
            revert SoldOut();
        }
        if (balance != quantity * baseSettings.price) {
            revert InvalidPrice();
        }
        return uint64(updatedAmountMinted);
    }
    function _checkGlobalPerWalletMax(
        address wallet,
        uint256 quantity
    ) internal view {
        if (
            baseSettings.maxPerWallet > 0 &&
            _numberMinted(wallet) + quantity > baseSettings.maxPerWallet
        ) {
            revert ExceedMaxPerWallet();
        }
    }
    function getDataForPhase(
        uint256 phaseIndex
    ) external view returns (PhaseSettings memory) {
        return saleState.phases[phaseIndex];
    }
    function getMintBalance(address wallet) external view returns (uint256) {
        return _numberMinted(wallet);
    }
    function getAmountMintedForPhase(
        uint256 phaseIndex,
        address wallet
    ) external view returns (uint64) {
        return amountMintedForPhase[wallet][phaseIndex];
    }
    function getAmountMintedForOwner(
        address wallet
    ) external view returns (uint256[] memory) {
        uint256[] memory amountMintedPerPhase = new uint256[](
            saleState.numPhases + 1
        );
        for (uint64 i = 0; i < saleState.numPhases; ) {
            amountMintedPerPhase[i] = amountMintedForPhase[wallet][i];
            // numPhases has a maximum value of 2^64 - 1
            unchecked {
                ++i;
            }
        }
        amountMintedPerPhase[saleState.numPhases] = _numberMinted(wallet);
        return amountMintedPerPhase;
    }
    /**
     * @dev See {ERC721-_baseURI}.
     */
    function _baseURI() internal view virtual override returns (string memory) {
        return _baseTokenURI;
    }
    function supportsInterface(
        bytes4 interfaceId
    )
        public
        view
        virtual
        override(IERC721AUpgradeable, ERC721AUpgradeable, ERC2981Upgradeable)
        returns (bool)
    {
        return
            ERC721AUpgradeable.supportsInterface(interfaceId) ||
            ERC2981Upgradeable.supportsInterface(interfaceId);
    }
    // ========= OPERATOR FILTERER OVERRIDES =========
    function setApprovalForAll(
        address operator,
        bool approved
    )
        public
        override(ERC721AUpgradeable, IERC721AUpgradeable)
        onlyAllowedOperatorApproval(operator)
    {
        super.setApprovalForAll(operator, approved);
    }
    function approve(
        address operator,
        uint256 tokenId
    )
        public
        payable
        override(ERC721AUpgradeable, IERC721AUpgradeable)
        onlyAllowedOperatorApproval(operator)
    {
        super.approve(operator, tokenId);
    }
    function transferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId
    )
        public
        payable
        override(ERC721AUpgradeable, IERC721AUpgradeable)
        onlyAllowedOperator(from)
    {
        super.transferFrom(from, to, tokenId);
    }
    function safeTransferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId
    )
        public
        payable
        override(ERC721AUpgradeable, IERC721AUpgradeable)
        onlyAllowedOperator(from)
    {
        super.safeTransferFrom(from, to, tokenId);
    }
    function safeTransferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId,
        bytes memory data
    )
        public
        payable
        override(ERC721AUpgradeable, IERC721AUpgradeable)
        onlyAllowedOperator(from)
    {
        super.safeTransferFrom(from, to, tokenId, data);
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.17;
import "@openzeppelin/contracts/proxy/Clones.sol";
import "@openzeppelin/contracts/access/AccessControl.sol";
import "./Bueno721Drop.sol";
import "./Bueno1155Drop.sol";
contract BuenoFactory is AccessControl {
    address private DEFAULT_OPERATOR_FILTER =
        address(0x3cc6CddA760b79bAfa08dF41ECFA224f810dCeB6);
    address private drop721Implementation;
    address private drop1155Implementation;
    event ContractCreated(address creator, address contractAddress);
    constructor() {
        _setupRole(DEFAULT_ADMIN_ROLE, _msgSender());
    }
    function updateDefaultOperatorFilter(
        address newFilter
    ) external onlyRole(DEFAULT_ADMIN_ROLE) {
        DEFAULT_OPERATOR_FILTER = newFilter;
    }
    function update721Implementation(
        address newImplementation
    ) external onlyRole(DEFAULT_ADMIN_ROLE) {
        drop721Implementation = newImplementation;
    }
    function update1155Implementation(
        address newImplementation
    ) external onlyRole(DEFAULT_ADMIN_ROLE) {
        drop1155Implementation = newImplementation;
    }
    function getOperatorFilter() external view returns (address) {
        return DEFAULT_OPERATOR_FILTER;
    }
    function get721ImplementationAddress() external view returns (address) {
        return drop721Implementation;
    }
    function get1155ImplementationAddress() external view returns (address) {
        return drop1155Implementation;
    }
    function deploy721Drop(
        string memory _name,
        string memory _symbol,
        string memory _baseUri,
        RoyaltySettings calldata _royaltySettings,
        PhaseSettings[] calldata _phases,
        BaseSettings calldata _baseSettings,
        PaymentSplitterSettings calldata _paymentSplitterSettings,
        uint256 _maxIntendedSupply,
        bool _registerOperatorFilter,
        bool _allowBurning
    ) external {
        require(drop721Implementation != address(0), "Implementation not set");
        address payable clone = payable(Clones.clone(drop721Implementation));
        address operatorFilter = _registerOperatorFilter
            ? DEFAULT_OPERATOR_FILTER
            : address(0);
        Bueno721Drop(clone).initialize(
            _name,
            _symbol,
            _baseUri,
            _royaltySettings,
            _phases,
            _baseSettings,
            _paymentSplitterSettings,
            _maxIntendedSupply,
            _allowBurning,
            msg.sender,
            operatorFilter
        );
        emit ContractCreated(msg.sender, clone);
    }
    function deploy1155Drop(
        string memory _name,
        string memory _symbol,
        string memory _baseUri,
        TokenSettings[] calldata _tokenSettings,
        RoyaltySettings calldata _royaltySettings,
        PaymentSplitterSettings calldata _paymentSplitterSettings,
        bool _registerOperatorFilter,
        bool _allowBurning
    ) external {
        require(drop1155Implementation != address(0), "Implementation not set");
        address clone = Clones.clone(drop1155Implementation);
        address operatorFilter = _registerOperatorFilter
            ? DEFAULT_OPERATOR_FILTER
            : address(0);
        Bueno1155Drop(clone).initialize(
            _name,
            _symbol,
            _baseUri,
            _tokenSettings,
            _royaltySettings,
            _paymentSplitterSettings,
            _allowBurning,
            msg.sender,
            operatorFilter
        );
        emit ContractCreated(msg.sender, clone);
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.17;
error InvalidPrice();
error SoldOut();
error ExceedMaxPerWallet();
error InvalidProof();
error InvalidMintFunction();
error InvalidAirdrop();
error BurningNotAllowed();
struct PaymentSplitterSettings {
    address[] payees;
    uint256[] shares;
}
struct RoyaltySettings {
    address royaltyAddress;
    uint96 royaltyAmount;
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/**
 * @dev This is a base contract to aid in writing upgradeable diamond facet contracts, or any kind of contract that will be deployed
 * behind a proxy. Since proxied contracts do not make use of a constructor, it's common to move constructor logic to an
 * external initializer function, usually called `initialize`. It then becomes necessary to protect this initializer
 * function so it can only be called once. The {initializer} modifier provided by this contract will have this effect.
 *
 * TIP: To avoid leaving the proxy in an uninitialized state, the initializer function should be called as early as
 * possible by providing the encoded function call as the `_data` argument to {ERC1967Proxy-constructor}.
 *
 * CAUTION: When used with inheritance, manual care must be taken to not invoke a parent initializer twice, or to ensure
 * that all initializers are idempotent. This is not verified automatically as constructors are by Solidity.
 */
import {ERC721A__InitializableStorage} from './ERC721A__InitializableStorage.sol';
abstract contract ERC721A__Initializable {
    using ERC721A__InitializableStorage for ERC721A__InitializableStorage.Layout;
    /**
     * @dev Modifier to protect an initializer function from being invoked twice.
     */
    modifier initializerERC721A() {
        // If the contract is initializing we ignore whether _initialized is set in order to support multiple
        // inheritance patterns, but we only do this in the context of a constructor, because in other contexts the
        // contract may have been reentered.
        require(
            ERC721A__InitializableStorage.layout()._initializing
                ? _isConstructor()
                : !ERC721A__InitializableStorage.layout()._initialized,
            'ERC721A__Initializable: contract is already initialized'
        );
        bool isTopLevelCall = !ERC721A__InitializableStorage.layout()._initializing;
        if (isTopLevelCall) {
            ERC721A__InitializableStorage.layout()._initializing = true;
            ERC721A__InitializableStorage.layout()._initialized = true;
        }
        _;
        if (isTopLevelCall) {
            ERC721A__InitializableStorage.layout()._initializing = false;
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Modifier to protect an initialization function so that it can only be invoked by functions with the
     * {initializer} modifier, directly or indirectly.
     */
    modifier onlyInitializingERC721A() {
        require(
            ERC721A__InitializableStorage.layout()._initializing,
            'ERC721A__Initializable: contract is not initializing'
        );
        _;
    }
    /// @dev Returns true if and only if the function is running in the constructor
    function _isConstructor() private view returns (bool) {
        // extcodesize checks the size of the code stored in an address, and
        // address returns the current address. Since the code is still not
        // deployed when running a constructor, any checks on its code size will
        // yield zero, making it an effective way to detect if a contract is
        // under construction or not.
        address self = address(this);
        uint256 cs;
        assembly {
            cs := extcodesize(self)
        }
        return cs == 0;
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/**
 * @dev This is a base storage for the  initialization function for upgradeable diamond facet contracts
 **/
library ERC721A__InitializableStorage {
    struct Layout {
        /*
         * Indicates that the contract has been initialized.
         */
        bool _initialized;
        /*
         * Indicates that the contract is in the process of being initialized.
         */
        bool _initializing;
    }
    bytes32 internal constant STORAGE_SLOT = keccak256('ERC721A.contracts.storage.initializable.facet');
    function layout() internal pure returns (Layout storage l) {
        bytes32 slot = STORAGE_SLOT;
        assembly {
            l.slot := slot
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
library ERC721AStorage {
    // Bypass for a `--via-ir` bug (https://github.com/chiru-labs/ERC721A/pull/364).
    struct TokenApprovalRef {
        address value;
    }
    struct Layout {
        // =============================================================
        //                            STORAGE
        // =============================================================
        // The next token ID to be minted.
        uint256 _currentIndex;
        // The number of tokens burned.
        uint256 _burnCounter;
        // Token name
        string _name;
        // Token symbol
        string _symbol;
        // Mapping from token ID to ownership details
        // An empty struct value does not necessarily mean the token is unowned.
        // See {_packedOwnershipOf} implementation for details.
        //
        // Bits Layout:
        // - [0..159]   `addr`
        // - [160..223] `startTimestamp`
        // - [224]      `burned`
        // - [225]      `nextInitialized`
        // - [232..255] `extraData`
        mapping(uint256 => uint256) _packedOwnerships;
        // Mapping owner address to address data.
        //
        // Bits Layout:
        // - [0..63]    `balance`
        // - [64..127]  `numberMinted`
        // - [128..191] `numberBurned`
        // - [192..255] `aux`
        mapping(address => uint256) _packedAddressData;
        // Mapping from token ID to approved address.
        mapping(uint256 => ERC721AStorage.TokenApprovalRef) _tokenApprovals;
        // Mapping from owner to operator approvals
        mapping(address => mapping(address => bool)) _operatorApprovals;
    }
    bytes32 internal constant STORAGE_SLOT = keccak256('ERC721A.contracts.storage.ERC721A');
    function layout() internal pure returns (Layout storage l) {
        bytes32 slot = STORAGE_SLOT;
        assembly {
            l.slot := slot
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// ERC721A Contracts v4.2.3
// Creator: Chiru Labs
pragma solidity ^0.8.4;
import './IERC721AUpgradeable.sol';
import {ERC721AStorage} from './ERC721AStorage.sol';
import './ERC721A__Initializable.sol';
/**
 * @dev Interface of ERC721 token receiver.
 */
interface ERC721A__IERC721ReceiverUpgradeable {
    function onERC721Received(
        address operator,
        address from,
        uint256 tokenId,
        bytes calldata data
    ) external returns (bytes4);
}
/**
 * @title ERC721A
 *
 * @dev Implementation of the [ERC721](https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-721)
 * Non-Fungible Token Standard, including the Metadata extension.
 * Optimized for lower gas during batch mints.
 *
 * Token IDs are minted in sequential order (e.g. 0, 1, 2, 3, ...)
 * starting from `_startTokenId()`.
 *
 * Assumptions:
 *
 * - An owner cannot have more than 2**64 - 1 (max value of uint64) of supply.
 * - The maximum token ID cannot exceed 2**256 - 1 (max value of uint256).
 */
contract ERC721AUpgradeable is ERC721A__Initializable, IERC721AUpgradeable {
    using ERC721AStorage for ERC721AStorage.Layout;
    // =============================================================
    //                           CONSTANTS
    // =============================================================
    // Mask of an entry in packed address data.
    uint256 private constant _BITMASK_ADDRESS_DATA_ENTRY = (1 << 64) - 1;
    // The bit position of `numberMinted` in packed address data.
    uint256 private constant _BITPOS_NUMBER_MINTED = 64;
    // The bit position of `numberBurned` in packed address data.
    uint256 private constant _BITPOS_NUMBER_BURNED = 128;
    // The bit position of `aux` in packed address data.
    uint256 private constant _BITPOS_AUX = 192;
    // Mask of all 256 bits in packed address data except the 64 bits for `aux`.
    uint256 private constant _BITMASK_AUX_COMPLEMENT = (1 << 192) - 1;
    // The bit position of `startTimestamp` in packed ownership.
    uint256 private constant _BITPOS_START_TIMESTAMP = 160;
    // The bit mask of the `burned` bit in packed ownership.
    uint256 private constant _BITMASK_BURNED = 1 << 224;
    // The bit position of the `nextInitialized` bit in packed ownership.
    uint256 private constant _BITPOS_NEXT_INITIALIZED = 225;
    // The bit mask of the `nextInitialized` bit in packed ownership.
    uint256 private constant _BITMASK_NEXT_INITIALIZED = 1 << 225;
    // The bit position of `extraData` in packed ownership.
    uint256 private constant _BITPOS_EXTRA_DATA = 232;
    // Mask of all 256 bits in a packed ownership except the 24 bits for `extraData`.
    uint256 private constant _BITMASK_EXTRA_DATA_COMPLEMENT = (1 << 232) - 1;
    // The mask of the lower 160 bits for addresses.
    uint256 private constant _BITMASK_ADDRESS = (1 << 160) - 1;
    // The maximum `quantity` that can be minted with {_mintERC2309}.
    // This limit is to prevent overflows on the address data entries.
    // For a limit of 5000, a total of 3.689e15 calls to {_mintERC2309}
    // is required to cause an overflow, which is unrealistic.
    uint256 private constant _MAX_MINT_ERC2309_QUANTITY_LIMIT = 5000;
    // The `Transfer` event signature is given by:
    // `keccak256(bytes("Transfer(address,address,uint256)"))`.
    bytes32 private constant _TRANSFER_EVENT_SIGNATURE =
        0xddf252ad1be2c89b69c2b068fc378daa952ba7f163c4a11628f55a4df523b3ef;
    // =============================================================
    //                          CONSTRUCTOR
    // =============================================================
    function __ERC721A_init(string memory name_, string memory symbol_) internal onlyInitializingERC721A {
        __ERC721A_init_unchained(name_, symbol_);
    }
    function __ERC721A_init_unchained(string memory name_, string memory symbol_) internal onlyInitializingERC721A {
        ERC721AStorage.layout()._name = name_;
        ERC721AStorage.layout()._symbol = symbol_;
        ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex = _startTokenId();
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                   TOKEN COUNTING OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Returns the starting token ID.
     * To change the starting token ID, please override this function.
     */
    function _startTokenId() internal view virtual returns (uint256) {
        return 0;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the next token ID to be minted.
     */
    function _nextTokenId() internal view virtual returns (uint256) {
        return ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the total number of tokens in existence.
     * Burned tokens will reduce the count.
     * To get the total number of tokens minted, please see {_totalMinted}.
     */
    function totalSupply() public view virtual override returns (uint256) {
        // Counter underflow is impossible as _burnCounter cannot be incremented
        // more than `_currentIndex - _startTokenId()` times.
        unchecked {
            return ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex - ERC721AStorage.layout()._burnCounter - _startTokenId();
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the total amount of tokens minted in the contract.
     */
    function _totalMinted() internal view virtual returns (uint256) {
        // Counter underflow is impossible as `_currentIndex` does not decrement,
        // and it is initialized to `_startTokenId()`.
        unchecked {
            return ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex - _startTokenId();
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the total number of tokens burned.
     */
    function _totalBurned() internal view virtual returns (uint256) {
        return ERC721AStorage.layout()._burnCounter;
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                    ADDRESS DATA OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Returns the number of tokens in `owner`'s account.
     */
    function balanceOf(address owner) public view virtual override returns (uint256) {
        if (owner == address(0)) revert BalanceQueryForZeroAddress();
        return ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[owner] & _BITMASK_ADDRESS_DATA_ENTRY;
    }
    /**
     * Returns the number of tokens minted by `owner`.
     */
    function _numberMinted(address owner) internal view returns (uint256) {
        return
            (ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[owner] >> _BITPOS_NUMBER_MINTED) & _BITMASK_ADDRESS_DATA_ENTRY;
    }
    /**
     * Returns the number of tokens burned by or on behalf of `owner`.
     */
    function _numberBurned(address owner) internal view returns (uint256) {
        return
            (ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[owner] >> _BITPOS_NUMBER_BURNED) & _BITMASK_ADDRESS_DATA_ENTRY;
    }
    /**
     * Returns the auxiliary data for `owner`. (e.g. number of whitelist mint slots used).
     */
    function _getAux(address owner) internal view returns (uint64) {
        return uint64(ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[owner] >> _BITPOS_AUX);
    }
    /**
     * Sets the auxiliary data for `owner`. (e.g. number of whitelist mint slots used).
     * If there are multiple variables, please pack them into a uint64.
     */
    function _setAux(address owner, uint64 aux) internal virtual {
        uint256 packed = ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[owner];
        uint256 auxCasted;
        // Cast `aux` with assembly to avoid redundant masking.
        assembly {
            auxCasted := aux
        }
        packed = (packed & _BITMASK_AUX_COMPLEMENT) | (auxCasted << _BITPOS_AUX);
        ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[owner] = packed;
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                            IERC165
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Returns true if this contract implements the interface defined by
     * `interfaceId`. See the corresponding
     * [EIP section](https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-165#how-interfaces-are-identified)
     * to learn more about how these ids are created.
     *
     * This function call must use less than 30000 gas.
     */
    function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId) public view virtual override returns (bool) {
        // The interface IDs are constants representing the first 4 bytes
        // of the XOR of all function selectors in the interface.
        // See: [ERC165](https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-165)
        // (e.g. `bytes4(i.functionA.selector ^ i.functionB.selector ^ ...)`)
        return
            interfaceId == 0x01ffc9a7 || // ERC165 interface ID for ERC165.
            interfaceId == 0x80ac58cd || // ERC165 interface ID for ERC721.
            interfaceId == 0x5b5e139f; // ERC165 interface ID for ERC721Metadata.
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                        IERC721Metadata
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Returns the token collection name.
     */
    function name() public view virtual override returns (string memory) {
        return ERC721AStorage.layout()._name;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the token collection symbol.
     */
    function symbol() public view virtual override returns (string memory) {
        return ERC721AStorage.layout()._symbol;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the Uniform Resource Identifier (URI) for `tokenId` token.
     */
    function tokenURI(uint256 tokenId) public view virtual override returns (string memory) {
        if (!_exists(tokenId)) revert URIQueryForNonexistentToken();
        string memory baseURI = _baseURI();
        return bytes(baseURI).length != 0 ? string(abi.encodePacked(baseURI, _toString(tokenId))) : '';
    }
    /**
     * @dev Base URI for computing {tokenURI}. If set, the resulting URI for each
     * token will be the concatenation of the `baseURI` and the `tokenId`. Empty
     * by default, it can be overridden in child contracts.
     */
    function _baseURI() internal view virtual returns (string memory) {
        return '';
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                     OWNERSHIPS OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Returns the owner of the `tokenId` token.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `tokenId` must exist.
     */
    function ownerOf(uint256 tokenId) public view virtual override returns (address) {
        return address(uint160(_packedOwnershipOf(tokenId)));
    }
    /**
     * @dev Gas spent here starts off proportional to the maximum mint batch size.
     * It gradually moves to O(1) as tokens get transferred around over time.
     */
    function _ownershipOf(uint256 tokenId) internal view virtual returns (TokenOwnership memory) {
        return _unpackedOwnership(_packedOwnershipOf(tokenId));
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the unpacked `TokenOwnership` struct at `index`.
     */
    function _ownershipAt(uint256 index) internal view virtual returns (TokenOwnership memory) {
        return _unpackedOwnership(ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[index]);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Initializes the ownership slot minted at `index` for efficiency purposes.
     */
    function _initializeOwnershipAt(uint256 index) internal virtual {
        if (ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[index] == 0) {
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[index] = _packedOwnershipOf(index);
        }
    }
    /**
     * Returns the packed ownership data of `tokenId`.
     */
    function _packedOwnershipOf(uint256 tokenId) private view returns (uint256 packed) {
        if (_startTokenId() <= tokenId) {
            packed = ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[tokenId];
            // If not burned.
            if (packed & _BITMASK_BURNED == 0) {
                // If the data at the starting slot does not exist, start the scan.
                if (packed == 0) {
                    if (tokenId >= ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex) revert OwnerQueryForNonexistentToken();
                    // Invariant:
                    // There will always be an initialized ownership slot
                    // (i.e. `ownership.addr != address(0) && ownership.burned == false`)
                    // before an unintialized ownership slot
                    // (i.e. `ownership.addr == address(0) && ownership.burned == false`)
                    // Hence, `tokenId` will not underflow.
                    //
                    // We can directly compare the packed value.
                    // If the address is zero, packed will be zero.
                    for (;;) {
                        unchecked {
                            packed = ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[--tokenId];
                        }
                        if (packed == 0) continue;
                        return packed;
                    }
                }
                // Otherwise, the data exists and is not burned. We can skip the scan.
                // This is possible because we have already achieved the target condition.
                // This saves 2143 gas on transfers of initialized tokens.
                return packed;
            }
        }
        revert OwnerQueryForNonexistentToken();
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the unpacked `TokenOwnership` struct from `packed`.
     */
    function _unpackedOwnership(uint256 packed) private pure returns (TokenOwnership memory ownership) {
        ownership.addr = address(uint160(packed));
        ownership.startTimestamp = uint64(packed >> _BITPOS_START_TIMESTAMP);
        ownership.burned = packed & _BITMASK_BURNED != 0;
        ownership.extraData = uint24(packed >> _BITPOS_EXTRA_DATA);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Packs ownership data into a single uint256.
     */
    function _packOwnershipData(address owner, uint256 flags) private view returns (uint256 result) {
        assembly {
            // Mask `owner` to the lower 160 bits, in case the upper bits somehow aren't clean.
            owner := and(owner, _BITMASK_ADDRESS)
            // `owner | (block.timestamp << _BITPOS_START_TIMESTAMP) | flags`.
            result := or(owner, or(shl(_BITPOS_START_TIMESTAMP, timestamp()), flags))
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the `nextInitialized` flag set if `quantity` equals 1.
     */
    function _nextInitializedFlag(uint256 quantity) private pure returns (uint256 result) {
        // For branchless setting of the `nextInitialized` flag.
        assembly {
            // `(quantity == 1) << _BITPOS_NEXT_INITIALIZED`.
            result := shl(_BITPOS_NEXT_INITIALIZED, eq(quantity, 1))
        }
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                      APPROVAL OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Gives permission to `to` to transfer `tokenId` token to another account. See {ERC721A-_approve}.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - The caller must own the token or be an approved operator.
     */
    function approve(address to, uint256 tokenId) public payable virtual override {
        _approve(to, tokenId, true);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the account approved for `tokenId` token.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `tokenId` must exist.
     */
    function getApproved(uint256 tokenId) public view virtual override returns (address) {
        if (!_exists(tokenId)) revert ApprovalQueryForNonexistentToken();
        return ERC721AStorage.layout()._tokenApprovals[tokenId].value;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Approve or remove `operator` as an operator for the caller.
     * Operators can call {transferFrom} or {safeTransferFrom}
     * for any token owned by the caller.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - The `operator` cannot be the caller.
     *
     * Emits an {ApprovalForAll} event.
     */
    function setApprovalForAll(address operator, bool approved) public virtual override {
        ERC721AStorage.layout()._operatorApprovals[_msgSenderERC721A()][operator] = approved;
        emit ApprovalForAll(_msgSenderERC721A(), operator, approved);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns if the `operator` is allowed to manage all of the assets of `owner`.
     *
     * See {setApprovalForAll}.
     */
    function isApprovedForAll(address owner, address operator) public view virtual override returns (bool) {
        return ERC721AStorage.layout()._operatorApprovals[owner][operator];
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns whether `tokenId` exists.
     *
     * Tokens can be managed by their owner or approved accounts via {approve} or {setApprovalForAll}.
     *
     * Tokens start existing when they are minted. See {_mint}.
     */
    function _exists(uint256 tokenId) internal view virtual returns (bool) {
        return
            _startTokenId() <= tokenId &&
            tokenId < ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex && // If within bounds,
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[tokenId] & _BITMASK_BURNED == 0; // and not burned.
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns whether `msgSender` is equal to `approvedAddress` or `owner`.
     */
    function _isSenderApprovedOrOwner(
        address approvedAddress,
        address owner,
        address msgSender
    ) private pure returns (bool result) {
        assembly {
            // Mask `owner` to the lower 160 bits, in case the upper bits somehow aren't clean.
            owner := and(owner, _BITMASK_ADDRESS)
            // Mask `msgSender` to the lower 160 bits, in case the upper bits somehow aren't clean.
            msgSender := and(msgSender, _BITMASK_ADDRESS)
            // `msgSender == owner || msgSender == approvedAddress`.
            result := or(eq(msgSender, owner), eq(msgSender, approvedAddress))
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the storage slot and value for the approved address of `tokenId`.
     */
    function _getApprovedSlotAndAddress(uint256 tokenId)
        private
        view
        returns (uint256 approvedAddressSlot, address approvedAddress)
    {
        ERC721AStorage.TokenApprovalRef storage tokenApproval = ERC721AStorage.layout()._tokenApprovals[tokenId];
        // The following is equivalent to `approvedAddress = _tokenApprovals[tokenId].value`.
        assembly {
            approvedAddressSlot := tokenApproval.slot
            approvedAddress := sload(approvedAddressSlot)
        }
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                      TRANSFER OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Transfers `tokenId` from `from` to `to`.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `from` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `tokenId` token must be owned by `from`.
     * - If the caller is not `from`, it must be approved to move this token
     * by either {approve} or {setApprovalForAll}.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event.
     */
    function transferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId
    ) public payable virtual override {
        uint256 prevOwnershipPacked = _packedOwnershipOf(tokenId);
        if (address(uint160(prevOwnershipPacked)) != from) revert TransferFromIncorrectOwner();
        (uint256 approvedAddressSlot, address approvedAddress) = _getApprovedSlotAndAddress(tokenId);
        // The nested ifs save around 20+ gas over a compound boolean condition.
        if (!_isSenderApprovedOrOwner(approvedAddress, from, _msgSenderERC721A()))
            if (!isApprovedForAll(from, _msgSenderERC721A())) revert TransferCallerNotOwnerNorApproved();
        if (to == address(0)) revert TransferToZeroAddress();
        _beforeTokenTransfers(from, to, tokenId, 1);
        // Clear approvals from the previous owner.
        assembly {
            if approvedAddress {
                // This is equivalent to `delete _tokenApprovals[tokenId]`.
                sstore(approvedAddressSlot, 0)
            }
        }
        // Underflow of the sender's balance is impossible because we check for
        // ownership above and the recipient's balance can't realistically overflow.
        // Counter overflow is incredibly unrealistic as `tokenId` would have to be 2**256.
        unchecked {
            // We can directly increment and decrement the balances.
            --ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[from]; // Updates: `balance -= 1`.
            ++ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[to]; // Updates: `balance += 1`.
            // Updates:
            // - `address` to the next owner.
            // - `startTimestamp` to the timestamp of transfering.
            // - `burned` to `false`.
            // - `nextInitialized` to `true`.
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[tokenId] = _packOwnershipData(
                to,
                _BITMASK_NEXT_INITIALIZED | _nextExtraData(from, to, prevOwnershipPacked)
            );
            // If the next slot may not have been initialized (i.e. `nextInitialized == false`) .
            if (prevOwnershipPacked & _BITMASK_NEXT_INITIALIZED == 0) {
                uint256 nextTokenId = tokenId + 1;
                // If the next slot's address is zero and not burned (i.e. packed value is zero).
                if (ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[nextTokenId] == 0) {
                    // If the next slot is within bounds.
                    if (nextTokenId != ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex) {
                        // Initialize the next slot to maintain correctness for `ownerOf(tokenId + 1)`.
                        ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[nextTokenId] = prevOwnershipPacked;
                    }
                }
            }
        }
        emit Transfer(from, to, tokenId);
        _afterTokenTransfers(from, to, tokenId, 1);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Equivalent to `safeTransferFrom(from, to, tokenId, '')`.
     */
    function safeTransferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId
    ) public payable virtual override {
        safeTransferFrom(from, to, tokenId, '');
    }
    /**
     * @dev Safely transfers `tokenId` token from `from` to `to`.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `from` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `tokenId` token must exist and be owned by `from`.
     * - If the caller is not `from`, it must be approved to move this token
     * by either {approve} or {setApprovalForAll}.
     * - If `to` refers to a smart contract, it must implement
     * {IERC721Receiver-onERC721Received}, which is called upon a safe transfer.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event.
     */
    function safeTransferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId,
        bytes memory _data
    ) public payable virtual override {
        transferFrom(from, to, tokenId);
        if (to.code.length != 0)
            if (!_checkContractOnERC721Received(from, to, tokenId, _data)) {
                revert TransferToNonERC721ReceiverImplementer();
            }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Hook that is called before a set of serially-ordered token IDs
     * are about to be transferred. This includes minting.
     * And also called before burning one token.
     *
     * `startTokenId` - the first token ID to be transferred.
     * `quantity` - the amount to be transferred.
     *
     * Calling conditions:
     *
     * - When `from` and `to` are both non-zero, `from`'s `tokenId` will be
     * transferred to `to`.
     * - When `from` is zero, `tokenId` will be minted for `to`.
     * - When `to` is zero, `tokenId` will be burned by `from`.
     * - `from` and `to` are never both zero.
     */
    function _beforeTokenTransfers(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 startTokenId,
        uint256 quantity
    ) internal virtual {}
    /**
     * @dev Hook that is called after a set of serially-ordered token IDs
     * have been transferred. This includes minting.
     * And also called after one token has been burned.
     *
     * `startTokenId` - the first token ID to be transferred.
     * `quantity` - the amount to be transferred.
     *
     * Calling conditions:
     *
     * - When `from` and `to` are both non-zero, `from`'s `tokenId` has been
     * transferred to `to`.
     * - When `from` is zero, `tokenId` has been minted for `to`.
     * - When `to` is zero, `tokenId` has been burned by `from`.
     * - `from` and `to` are never both zero.
     */
    function _afterTokenTransfers(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 startTokenId,
        uint256 quantity
    ) internal virtual {}
    /**
     * @dev Private function to invoke {IERC721Receiver-onERC721Received} on a target contract.
     *
     * `from` - Previous owner of the given token ID.
     * `to` - Target address that will receive the token.
     * `tokenId` - Token ID to be transferred.
     * `_data` - Optional data to send along with the call.
     *
     * Returns whether the call correctly returned the expected magic value.
     */
    function _checkContractOnERC721Received(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId,
        bytes memory _data
    ) private returns (bool) {
        try
            ERC721A__IERC721ReceiverUpgradeable(to).onERC721Received(_msgSenderERC721A(), from, tokenId, _data)
        returns (bytes4 retval) {
            return retval == ERC721A__IERC721ReceiverUpgradeable(to).onERC721Received.selector;
        } catch (bytes memory reason) {
            if (reason.length == 0) {
                revert TransferToNonERC721ReceiverImplementer();
            } else {
                assembly {
                    revert(add(32, reason), mload(reason))
                }
            }
        }
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                        MINT OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Mints `quantity` tokens and transfers them to `to`.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `quantity` must be greater than 0.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event for each mint.
     */
    function _mint(address to, uint256 quantity) internal virtual {
        uint256 startTokenId = ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex;
        if (quantity == 0) revert MintZeroQuantity();
        _beforeTokenTransfers(address(0), to, startTokenId, quantity);
        // Overflows are incredibly unrealistic.
        // `balance` and `numberMinted` have a maximum limit of 2**64.
        // `tokenId` has a maximum limit of 2**256.
        unchecked {
            // Updates:
            // - `balance += quantity`.
            // - `numberMinted += quantity`.
            //
            // We can directly add to the `balance` and `numberMinted`.
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[to] += quantity * ((1 << _BITPOS_NUMBER_MINTED) | 1);
            // Updates:
            // - `address` to the owner.
            // - `startTimestamp` to the timestamp of minting.
            // - `burned` to `false`.
            // - `nextInitialized` to `quantity == 1`.
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[startTokenId] = _packOwnershipData(
                to,
                _nextInitializedFlag(quantity) | _nextExtraData(address(0), to, 0)
            );
            uint256 toMasked;
            uint256 end = startTokenId + quantity;
            // Use assembly to loop and emit the `Transfer` event for gas savings.
            // The duplicated `log4` removes an extra check and reduces stack juggling.
            // The assembly, together with the surrounding Solidity code, have been
            // delicately arranged to nudge the compiler into producing optimized opcodes.
            assembly {
                // Mask `to` to the lower 160 bits, in case the upper bits somehow aren't clean.
                toMasked := and(to, _BITMASK_ADDRESS)
                // Emit the `Transfer` event.
                log4(
                    0, // Start of data (0, since no data).
                    0, // End of data (0, since no data).
                    _TRANSFER_EVENT_SIGNATURE, // Signature.
                    0, // `address(0)`.
                    toMasked, // `to`.
                    startTokenId // `tokenId`.
                )
                // The `iszero(eq(,))` check ensures that large values of `quantity`
                // that overflows uint256 will make the loop run out of gas.
                // The compiler will optimize the `iszero` away for performance.
                for {
                    let tokenId := add(startTokenId, 1)
                } iszero(eq(tokenId, end)) {
                    tokenId := add(tokenId, 1)
                } {
                    // Emit the `Transfer` event. Similar to above.
                    log4(0, 0, _TRANSFER_EVENT_SIGNATURE, 0, toMasked, tokenId)
                }
            }
            if (toMasked == 0) revert MintToZeroAddress();
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex = end;
        }
        _afterTokenTransfers(address(0), to, startTokenId, quantity);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Mints `quantity` tokens and transfers them to `to`.
     *
     * This function is intended for efficient minting only during contract creation.
     *
     * It emits only one {ConsecutiveTransfer} as defined in
     * [ERC2309](https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-2309),
     * instead of a sequence of {Transfer} event(s).
     *
     * Calling this function outside of contract creation WILL make your contract
     * non-compliant with the ERC721 standard.
     * For full ERC721 compliance, substituting ERC721 {Transfer} event(s) with the ERC2309
     * {ConsecutiveTransfer} event is only permissible during contract creation.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `quantity` must be greater than 0.
     *
     * Emits a {ConsecutiveTransfer} event.
     */
    function _mintERC2309(address to, uint256 quantity) internal virtual {
        uint256 startTokenId = ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex;
        if (to == address(0)) revert MintToZeroAddress();
        if (quantity == 0) revert MintZeroQuantity();
        if (quantity > _MAX_MINT_ERC2309_QUANTITY_LIMIT) revert MintERC2309QuantityExceedsLimit();
        _beforeTokenTransfers(address(0), to, startTokenId, quantity);
        // Overflows are unrealistic due to the above check for `quantity` to be below the limit.
        unchecked {
            // Updates:
            // - `balance += quantity`.
            // - `numberMinted += quantity`.
            //
            // We can directly add to the `balance` and `numberMinted`.
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[to] += quantity * ((1 << _BITPOS_NUMBER_MINTED) | 1);
            // Updates:
            // - `address` to the owner.
            // - `startTimestamp` to the timestamp of minting.
            // - `burned` to `false`.
            // - `nextInitialized` to `quantity == 1`.
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[startTokenId] = _packOwnershipData(
                to,
                _nextInitializedFlag(quantity) | _nextExtraData(address(0), to, 0)
            );
            emit ConsecutiveTransfer(startTokenId, startTokenId + quantity - 1, address(0), to);
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex = startTokenId + quantity;
        }
        _afterTokenTransfers(address(0), to, startTokenId, quantity);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Safely mints `quantity` tokens and transfers them to `to`.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - If `to` refers to a smart contract, it must implement
     * {IERC721Receiver-onERC721Received}, which is called for each safe transfer.
     * - `quantity` must be greater than 0.
     *
     * See {_mint}.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event for each mint.
     */
    function _safeMint(
        address to,
        uint256 quantity,
        bytes memory _data
    ) internal virtual {
        _mint(to, quantity);
        unchecked {
            if (to.code.length != 0) {
                uint256 end = ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex;
                uint256 index = end - quantity;
                do {
                    if (!_checkContractOnERC721Received(address(0), to, index++, _data)) {
                        revert TransferToNonERC721ReceiverImplementer();
                    }
                } while (index < end);
                // Reentrancy protection.
                if (ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex != end) revert();
            }
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Equivalent to `_safeMint(to, quantity, '')`.
     */
    function _safeMint(address to, uint256 quantity) internal virtual {
        _safeMint(to, quantity, '');
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                       APPROVAL OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Equivalent to `_approve(to, tokenId, false)`.
     */
    function _approve(address to, uint256 tokenId) internal virtual {
        _approve(to, tokenId, false);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Gives permission to `to` to transfer `tokenId` token to another account.
     * The approval is cleared when the token is transferred.
     *
     * Only a single account can be approved at a time, so approving the
     * zero address clears previous approvals.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `tokenId` must exist.
     *
     * Emits an {Approval} event.
     */
    function _approve(
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId,
        bool approvalCheck
    ) internal virtual {
        address owner = ownerOf(tokenId);
        if (approvalCheck)
            if (_msgSenderERC721A() != owner)
                if (!isApprovedForAll(owner, _msgSenderERC721A())) {
                    revert ApprovalCallerNotOwnerNorApproved();
                }
        ERC721AStorage.layout()._tokenApprovals[tokenId].value = to;
        emit Approval(owner, to, tokenId);
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                        BURN OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Equivalent to `_burn(tokenId, false)`.
     */
    function _burn(uint256 tokenId) internal virtual {
        _burn(tokenId, false);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Destroys `tokenId`.
     * The approval is cleared when the token is burned.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `tokenId` must exist.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event.
     */
    function _burn(uint256 tokenId, bool approvalCheck) internal virtual {
        uint256 prevOwnershipPacked = _packedOwnershipOf(tokenId);
        address from = address(uint160(prevOwnershipPacked));
        (uint256 approvedAddressSlot, address approvedAddress) = _getApprovedSlotAndAddress(tokenId);
        if (approvalCheck) {
            // The nested ifs save around 20+ gas over a compound boolean condition.
            if (!_isSenderApprovedOrOwner(approvedAddress, from, _msgSenderERC721A()))
                if (!isApprovedForAll(from, _msgSenderERC721A())) revert TransferCallerNotOwnerNorApproved();
        }
        _beforeTokenTransfers(from, address(0), tokenId, 1);
        // Clear approvals from the previous owner.
        assembly {
            if approvedAddress {
                // This is equivalent to `delete _tokenApprovals[tokenId]`.
                sstore(approvedAddressSlot, 0)
            }
        }
        // Underflow of the sender's balance is impossible because we check for
        // ownership above and the recipient's balance can't realistically overflow.
        // Counter overflow is incredibly unrealistic as `tokenId` would have to be 2**256.
        unchecked {
            // Updates:
            // - `balance -= 1`.
            // - `numberBurned += 1`.
            //
            // We can directly decrement the balance, and increment the number burned.
            // This is equivalent to `packed -= 1; packed += 1 << _BITPOS_NUMBER_BURNED;`.
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[from] += (1 << _BITPOS_NUMBER_BURNED) - 1;
            // Updates:
            // - `address` to the last owner.
            // - `startTimestamp` to the timestamp of burning.
            // - `burned` to `true`.
            // - `nextInitialized` to `true`.
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[tokenId] = _packOwnershipData(
                from,
                (_BITMASK_BURNED | _BITMASK_NEXT_INITIALIZED) | _nextExtraData(from, address(0), prevOwnershipPacked)
            );
            // If the next slot may not have been initialized (i.e. `nextInitialized == false`) .
            if (prevOwnershipPacked & _BITMASK_NEXT_INITIALIZED == 0) {
                uint256 nextTokenId = tokenId + 1;
                // If the next slot's address is zero and not burned (i.e. packed value is zero).
                if (ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[nextTokenId] == 0) {
                    // If the next slot is within bounds.
                    if (nextTokenId != ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex) {
                        // Initialize the next slot to maintain correctness for `ownerOf(tokenId + 1)`.
                        ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[nextTokenId] = prevOwnershipPacked;
                    }
                }
            }
        }
        emit Transfer(from, address(0), tokenId);
        _afterTokenTransfers(from, address(0), tokenId, 1);
        // Overflow not possible, as _burnCounter cannot be exceed _currentIndex times.
        unchecked {
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._burnCounter++;
        }
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                     EXTRA DATA OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Directly sets the extra data for the ownership data `index`.
     */
    function _setExtraDataAt(uint256 index, uint24 extraData) internal virtual {
        uint256 packed = ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[index];
        if (packed == 0) revert OwnershipNotInitializedForExtraData();
        uint256 extraDataCasted;
        // Cast `extraData` with assembly to avoid redundant masking.
        assembly {
            extraDataCasted := extraData
        }
        packed = (packed & _BITMASK_EXTRA_DATA_COMPLEMENT) | (extraDataCasted << _BITPOS_EXTRA_DATA);
        ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[index] = packed;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Called during each token transfer to set the 24bit `extraData` field.
     * Intended to be overridden by the cosumer contract.
     *
     * `previousExtraData` - the value of `extraData` before transfer.
     *
     * Calling conditions:
     *
     * - When `from` and `to` are both non-zero, `from`'s `tokenId` will be
     * transferred to `to`.
     * - When `from` is zero, `tokenId` will be minted for `to`.
     * - When `to` is zero, `tokenId` will be burned by `from`.
     * - `from` and `to` are never both zero.
     */
    function _extraData(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint24 previousExtraData
    ) internal view virtual returns (uint24) {}
    /**
     * @dev Returns the next extra data for the packed ownership data.
     * The returned result is shifted into position.
     */
    function _nextExtraData(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 prevOwnershipPacked
    ) private view returns (uint256) {
        uint24 extraData = uint24(prevOwnershipPacked >> _BITPOS_EXTRA_DATA);
        return uint256(_extraData(from, to, extraData)) << _BITPOS_EXTRA_DATA;
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                       OTHER OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Returns the message sender (defaults to `msg.sender`).
     *
     * If you are writing GSN compatible contracts, you need to override this function.
     */
    function _msgSenderERC721A() internal view virtual returns (address) {
        return msg.sender;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Converts a uint256 to its ASCII string decimal representation.
     */
    function _toString(uint256 value) internal pure virtual returns (string memory str) {
        assembly {
            // The maximum value of a uint256 contains 78 digits (1 byte per digit), but
            // we allocate 0xa0 bytes to keep the free memory pointer 32-byte word aligned.
            // We will need 1 word for the trailing zeros padding, 1 word for the length,
            // and 3 words for a maximum of 78 digits. Total: 5 * 0x20 = 0xa0.
            let m := add(mload(0x40), 0xa0)
            // Update the free memory pointer to allocate.
            mstore(0x40, m)
            // Assign the `str` to the end.
            str := sub(m, 0x20)
            // Zeroize the slot after the string.
            mstore(str, 0)
            // Cache the end of the memory to calculate the length later.
            let end := str
            // We write the string from rightmost digit to leftmost digit.
            // The following is essentially a do-while loop that also handles the zero case.
            // prettier-ignore
            for { let temp := value } 1 {} {
                str := sub(str, 1)
                // Write the character to the pointer.
                // The ASCII index of the '0' character is 48.
                mstore8(str, add(48, mod(temp, 10)))
                // Keep dividing `temp` until zero.
                temp := div(temp, 10)
                // prettier-ignore
                if iszero(temp) { break }
            }
            let length := sub(end, str)
            // Move the pointer 32 bytes leftwards to make room for the length.
            str := sub(str, 0x20)
            // Store the length.
            mstore(str, length)
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// ERC721A Contracts v4.2.3
// Creator: Chiru Labs
pragma solidity ^0.8.4;
import './IERC721AQueryableUpgradeable.sol';
import '../ERC721AUpgradeable.sol';
import '../ERC721A__Initializable.sol';
/**
 * @title ERC721AQueryable.
 *
 * @dev ERC721A subclass with convenience query functions.
 */
abstract contract ERC721AQueryableUpgradeable is
    ERC721A__Initializable,
    ERC721AUpgradeable,
    IERC721AQueryableUpgradeable
{
    function __ERC721AQueryable_init() internal onlyInitializingERC721A {
        __ERC721AQueryable_init_unchained();
    }
    function __ERC721AQueryable_init_unchained() internal onlyInitializingERC721A {}
    /**
     * @dev Returns the `TokenOwnership` struct at `tokenId` without reverting.
     *
     * If the `tokenId` is out of bounds:
     *
     * - `addr = address(0)`
     * - `startTimestamp = 0`
     * - `burned = false`
     * - `extraData = 0`
     *
     * If the `tokenId` is burned:
     *
     * - `addr = <Address of owner before token was burned>`
     * - `startTimestamp = <Timestamp when token was burned>`
     * - `burned = true`
     * - `extraData = <Extra data when token was burned>`
     *
     * Otherwise:
     *
     * - `addr = <Address of owner>`
     * - `startTimestamp = <Timestamp of start of ownership>`
     * - `burned = false`
     * - `extraData = <Extra data at start of ownership>`
     */
    function explicitOwnershipOf(uint256 tokenId) public view virtual override returns (TokenOwnership memory) {
        TokenOwnership memory ownership;
        if (tokenId < _startTokenId() || tokenId >= _nextTokenId()) {
            return ownership;
        }
        ownership = _ownershipAt(tokenId);
        if (ownership.burned) {
            return ownership;
        }
        return _ownershipOf(tokenId);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns an array of `TokenOwnership` structs at `tokenIds` in order.
     * See {ERC721AQueryable-explicitOwnershipOf}
     */
    function explicitOwnershipsOf(uint256[] calldata tokenIds)
        external
        view
        virtual
        override
        returns (TokenOwnership[] memory)
    {
        unchecked {
            uint256 tokenIdsLength = tokenIds.length;
            TokenOwnership[] memory ownerships = new TokenOwnership[](tokenIdsLength);
            for (uint256 i; i != tokenIdsLength; ++i) {
                ownerships[i] = explicitOwnershipOf(tokenIds[i]);
            }
            return ownerships;
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns an array of token IDs owned by `owner`,
     * in the range [`start`, `stop`)
     * (i.e. `start <= tokenId < stop`).
     *
     * This function allows for tokens to be queried if the collection
     * grows too big for a single call of {ERC721AQueryable-tokensOfOwner}.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `start < stop`
     */
    function tokensOfOwnerIn(
        address owner,
        uint256 start,
        uint256 stop
    ) external view virtual override returns (uint256[] memory) {
        unchecked {
            if (start >= stop) revert InvalidQueryRange();
            uint256 tokenIdsIdx;
            uint256 stopLimit = _nextTokenId();
            // Set `start = max(start, _startTokenId())`.
            if (start < _startTokenId()) {
                start = _startTokenId();
            }
            // Set `stop = min(stop, stopLimit)`.
            if (stop > stopLimit) {
                stop = stopLimit;
            }
            uint256 tokenIdsMaxLength = balanceOf(owner);
            // Set `tokenIdsMaxLength = min(balanceOf(owner), stop - start)`,
            // to cater for cases where `balanceOf(owner)` is too big.
            if (start < stop) {
                uint256 rangeLength = stop - start;
                if (rangeLength < tokenIdsMaxLength) {
                    tokenIdsMaxLength = rangeLength;
                }
            } else {
                tokenIdsMaxLength = 0;
            }
            uint256[] memory tokenIds = new uint256[](tokenIdsMaxLength);
            if (tokenIdsMaxLength == 0) {
                return tokenIds;
            }
            // We need to call `explicitOwnershipOf(start)`,
            // because the slot at `start` may not be initialized.
            TokenOwnership memory ownership = explicitOwnershipOf(start);
            address currOwnershipAddr;
            // If the starting slot exists (i.e. not burned), initialize `currOwnershipAddr`.
            // `ownership.address` will not be zero, as `start` is clamped to the valid token ID range.
            if (!ownership.burned) {
                currOwnershipAddr = ownership.addr;
            }
            for (uint256 i = start; i != stop && tokenIdsIdx != tokenIdsMaxLength; ++i) {
                ownership = _ownershipAt(i);
                if (ownership.burned) {
                    continue;
                }
                if (ownership.addr != address(0)) {
                    currOwnershipAddr = ownership.addr;
                }
                if (currOwnershipAddr == owner) {
                    tokenIds[tokenIdsIdx++] = i;
                }
            }
            // Downsize the array to fit.
            assembly {
                mstore(tokenIds, tokenIdsIdx)
            }
            return tokenIds;
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns an array of token IDs owned by `owner`.
     *
     * This function scans the ownership mapping and is O(`totalSupply`) in complexity.
     * It is meant to be called off-chain.
     *
     * See {ERC721AQueryable-tokensOfOwnerIn} for splitting the scan into
     * multiple smaller scans if the collection is large enough to cause
     * an out-of-gas error (10K collections should be fine).
     */
    function tokensOfOwner(address owner) external view virtual override returns (uint256[] memory) {
        unchecked {
            uint256 tokenIdsIdx;
            address currOwnershipAddr;
            uint256 tokenIdsLength = balanceOf(owner);
            uint256[] memory tokenIds = new uint256[](tokenIdsLength);
            TokenOwnership memory ownership;
            for (uint256 i = _startTokenId(); tokenIdsIdx != tokenIdsLength; ++i) {
                ownership = _ownershipAt(i);
                if (ownership.burned) {
                    continue;
                }
                if (ownership.addr != address(0)) {
                    currOwnershipAddr = ownership.addr;
                }
                if (currOwnershipAddr == owner) {
                    tokenIds[tokenIdsIdx++] = i;
                }
            }
            return tokenIds;
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// ERC721A Contracts v4.2.3
// Creator: Chiru Labs
pragma solidity ^0.8.4;
import '../IERC721AUpgradeable.sol';
/**
 * @dev Interface of ERC721AQueryable.
 */
interface IERC721AQueryableUpgradeable is IERC721AUpgradeable {
    /**
     * Invalid query range (`start` >= `stop`).
     */
    error InvalidQueryRange();
    /**
     * @dev Returns the `TokenOwnership` struct at `tokenId` without reverting.
     *
     * If the `tokenId` is out of bounds:
     *
     * - `addr = address(0)`
     * - `startTimestamp = 0`
     * - `burned = false`
     * - `extraData = 0`
     *
     * If the `tokenId` is burned:
     *
     * - `addr = <Address of owner before token was burned>`
     * - `startTimestamp = <Timestamp when token was burned>`
     * - `burned = true`
     * - `extraData = <Extra data when token was burned>`
     *
     * Otherwise:
     *
     * - `addr = <Address of owner>`
     * - `startTimestamp = <Timestamp of start of ownership>`
     * - `burned = false`
     * - `extraData = <Extra data at start of ownership>`
     */
    function explicitOwnershipOf(uint256 tokenId) external view returns (TokenOwnership memory);
    /**
     * @dev Returns an array of `TokenOwnership` structs at `tokenIds` in order.
     * See {ERC721AQueryable-explicitOwnershipOf}
     */
    function explicitOwnershipsOf(uint256[] memory tokenIds) external view returns (TokenOwnership[] memory);
    /**
     * @dev Returns an array of token IDs owned by `owner`,
     * in the range [`start`, `stop`)
     * (i.e. `start <= tokenId < stop`).
     *
     * This function allows for tokens to be queried if the collection
     * grows too big for a single call of {ERC721AQueryable-tokensOfOwner}.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `start < stop`
     */
    function tokensOfOwnerIn(
        address owner,
        uint256 start,
        uint256 stop
    ) external view returns (uint256[] memory);
    /**
     * @dev Returns an array of token IDs owned by `owner`.
     *
     * This function scans the ownership mapping and is O(`totalSupply`) in complexity.
     * It is meant to be called off-chain.
     *
     * See {ERC721AQueryable-tokensOfOwnerIn} for splitting the scan into
     * multiple smaller scans if the collection is large enough to cause
     * an out-of-gas error (10K collections should be fine).
     */
    function tokensOfOwner(address owner) external view returns (uint256[] memory);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// ERC721A Contracts v4.2.3
// Creator: Chiru Labs
pragma solidity ^0.8.4;
/**
 * @dev Interface of ERC721A.
 */
interface IERC721AUpgradeable {
    /**
     * The caller must own the token or be an approved operator.
     */
    error ApprovalCallerNotOwnerNorApproved();
    /**
     * The token does not exist.
     */
    error ApprovalQueryForNonexistentToken();
    /**
     * Cannot query the balance for the zero address.
     */
    error BalanceQueryForZeroAddress();
    /**
     * Cannot mint to the zero address.
     */
    error MintToZeroAddress();
    /**
     * The quantity of tokens minted must be more than zero.
     */
    error MintZeroQuantity();
    /**
     * The token does not exist.
     */
    error OwnerQueryForNonexistentToken();
    /**
     * The caller must own the token or be an approved operator.
     */
    error TransferCallerNotOwnerNorApproved();
    /**
     * The token must be owned by `from`.
     */
    error TransferFromIncorrectOwner();
    /**
     * Cannot safely transfer to a contract that does not implement the
     * ERC721Receiver interface.
     */
    error TransferToNonERC721ReceiverImplementer();
    /**
     * Cannot transfer to the zero address.
     */
    error TransferToZeroAddress();
    /**
     * The token does not exist.
     */
    error URIQueryForNonexistentToken();
    /**
     * The `quantity` minted with ERC2309 exceeds the safety limit.
     */
    error MintERC2309QuantityExceedsLimit();
    /**
     * The `extraData` cannot be set on an unintialized ownership slot.
     */
    error OwnershipNotInitializedForExtraData();
    // =============================================================
    //                            STRUCTS
    // =============================================================
    struct TokenOwnership {
        // The address of the owner.
        address addr;
        // Stores the start time of ownership with minimal overhead for tokenomics.
        uint64 startTimestamp;
        // Whether the token has been burned.
        bool burned;
        // Arbitrary data similar to `startTimestamp` that can be set via {_extraData}.
        uint24 extraData;
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                         TOKEN COUNTERS
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Returns the total number of tokens in existence.
     * Burned tokens will reduce the count.
     * To get the total number of tokens minted, please see {_totalMinted}.
     */
    function totalSupply() external view returns (uint256);
    // =============================================================
    //                            IERC165
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Returns true if this contract implements the interface defined by
     * `interfaceId`. See the corresponding
     * [EIP section](https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-165#how-interfaces-are-identified)
     * to learn more about how these ids are created.
     *
     * This function call must use less than 30000 gas.
     */
    function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId) external view returns (bool);
    // =============================================================
    //                            IERC721
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Emitted when `tokenId` token is transferred from `from` to `to`.
     */
    event Transfer(address indexed from, address indexed to, uint256 indexed tokenId);
    /**
     * @dev Emitted when `owner` enables `approved` to manage the `tokenId` token.
     */
    event Approval(address indexed owner, address indexed approved, uint256 indexed tokenId);
    /**
     * @dev Emitted when `owner` enables or disables
     * (`approved`) `operator` to manage all of its assets.
     */
    event ApprovalForAll(address indexed owner, address indexed operator, bool approved);
    /**
     * @dev Returns the number of tokens in `owner`'s account.
     */
    function balanceOf(address owner) external view returns (uint256 balance);
    /**
     * @dev Returns the owner of the `tokenId` token.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `tokenId` must exist.
     */
    function ownerOf(uint256 tokenId) external view returns (address owner);
    /**
     * @dev Safely transfers `tokenId` token from `from` to `to`,
     * checking first that contract recipients are aware of the ERC721 protocol
     * to prevent tokens from being forever locked.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `from` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `tokenId` token must exist and be owned by `from`.
     * - If the caller is not `from`, it must be have been allowed to move
     * this token by either {approve} or {setApprovalForAll}.
     * - If `to` refers to a smart contract, it must implement
     * {IERC721Receiver-onERC721Received}, which is called upon a safe transfer.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event.
     */
    function safeTransferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId,
        bytes calldata data
    ) external payable;
    /**
     * @dev Equivalent to `safeTransferFrom(from, to, tokenId, '')`.
     */
    function safeTransferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId
    ) external payable;
    /**
     * @dev Transfers `tokenId` from `from` to `to`.
     *
     * WARNING: Usage of this method is discouraged, use {safeTransferFrom}
     * whenever possible.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `from` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `tokenId` token must be owned by `from`.
     * - If the caller is not `from`, it must be approved to move this token
     * by either {approve} or {setApprovalForAll}.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event.
     */
    function transferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId
    ) external payable;
    /**
     * @dev Gives permission to `to` to transfer `tokenId` token to another account.
     * The approval is cleared when the token is transferred.
     *
     * Only a single account can be approved at a time, so approving the
     * zero address clears previous approvals.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - The caller must own the token or be an approved operator.
     * - `tokenId` must exist.
     *
     * Emits an {Approval} event.
     */
    function approve(address to, uint256 tokenId) external payable;
    /**
     * @dev Approve or remove `operator` as an operator for the caller.
     * Operators can call {transferFrom} or {safeTransferFrom}
     * for any token owned by the caller.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - The `operator` cannot be the caller.
     *
     * Emits an {ApprovalForAll} event.
     */
    function setApprovalForAll(address operator, bool _approved) external;
    /**
     * @dev Returns the account approved for `tokenId` token.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `tokenId` must exist.
     */
    function getApproved(uint256 tokenId) external view returns (address operator);
    /**
     * @dev Returns if the `operator` is allowed to manage all of the assets of `owner`.
     *
     * See {setApprovalForAll}.
     */
    function isApprovedForAll(address owner, address operator) external view returns (bool);
    // =============================================================
    //                        IERC721Metadata
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Returns the token collection name.
     */
    function name() external view returns (string memory);
    /**
     * @dev Returns the token collection symbol.
     */
    function symbol() external view returns (string memory);
    /**
     * @dev Returns the Uniform Resource Identifier (URI) for `tokenId` token.
     */
    function tokenURI(uint256 tokenId) external view returns (string memory);
    // =============================================================
    //                           IERC2309
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Emitted when tokens in `fromTokenId` to `toTokenId`
     * (inclusive) is transferred from `from` to `to`, as defined in the
     * [ERC2309](https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-2309) standard.
     *
     * See {_mintERC2309} for more details.
     */
    event ConsecutiveTransfer(uint256 indexed fromTokenId, uint256 toTokenId, address indexed from, address indexed to);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.13;
interface IOperatorFilterRegistry {
    function isOperatorAllowed(address registrant, address operator) external view returns (bool);
    function register(address registrant) external;
    function registerAndSubscribe(address registrant, address subscription) external;
    function registerAndCopyEntries(address registrant, address registrantToCopy) external;
    function unregister(address addr) external;
    function updateOperator(address registrant, address operator, bool filtered) external;
    function updateOperators(address registrant, address[] calldata operators, bool filtered) external;
    function updateCodeHash(address registrant, bytes32 codehash, bool filtered) external;
    function updateCodeHashes(address registrant, bytes32[] calldata codeHashes, bool filtered) external;
    function subscribe(address registrant, address registrantToSubscribe) external;
    function unsubscribe(address registrant, bool copyExistingEntries) external;
    function subscriptionOf(address addr) external returns (address registrant);
    function subscribers(address registrant) external returns (address[] memory);
    function subscriberAt(address registrant, uint256 index) external returns (address);
    function copyEntriesOf(address registrant, address registrantToCopy) external;
    function isOperatorFiltered(address registrant, address operator) external returns (bool);
    function isCodeHashOfFiltered(address registrant, address operatorWithCode) external returns (bool);
    function isCodeHashFiltered(address registrant, bytes32 codeHash) external returns (bool);
    function filteredOperators(address addr) external returns (address[] memory);
    function filteredCodeHashes(address addr) external returns (bytes32[] memory);
    function filteredOperatorAt(address registrant, uint256 index) external returns (address);
    function filteredCodeHashAt(address registrant, uint256 index) external returns (bytes32);
    function isRegistered(address addr) external returns (bool);
    function codeHashOf(address addr) external returns (bytes32);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.13;
import {IOperatorFilterRegistry} from "../IOperatorFilterRegistry.sol";
import {Initializable} from "@openzeppelin/contracts-upgradeable/proxy/utils/Initializable.sol";
abstract contract OperatorFiltererUpgradeable is Initializable {
    error OperatorNotAllowed(address operator);
    IOperatorFilterRegistry constant operatorFilterRegistry =
        IOperatorFilterRegistry(0x000000000000AAeB6D7670E522A718067333cd4E);
    function __OperatorFilterer_init(address subscriptionOrRegistrantToCopy, bool subscribe)
        internal
        onlyInitializing
    {
        // If an inheriting token contract is deployed to a network without the registry deployed, the modifier
        // will not revert, but the contract will need to be registered with the registry once it is deployed in
        // order for the modifier to filter addresses.
        if (address(operatorFilterRegistry).code.length > 0) {
            if (!operatorFilterRegistry.isRegistered(address(this))) {
                if (subscribe) {
                    operatorFilterRegistry.registerAndSubscribe(address(this), subscriptionOrRegistrantToCopy);
                } else {
                    if (subscriptionOrRegistrantToCopy != address(0)) {
                        operatorFilterRegistry.registerAndCopyEntries(address(this), subscriptionOrRegistrantToCopy);
                    } else {
                        operatorFilterRegistry.register(address(this));
                    }
                }
            }
        }
    }
    modifier onlyAllowedOperator(address from) virtual {
        // Check registry code length to facilitate testing in environments without a deployed registry.
        if (address(operatorFilterRegistry).code.length > 0) {
            // Allow spending tokens from addresses with balance
            // Note that this still allows listings and marketplaces with escrow to transfer tokens if transferred
            // from an EOA.
            if (from == msg.sender) {
                _;
                return;
            }
            if (!operatorFilterRegistry.isOperatorAllowed(address(this), msg.sender)) {
                revert OperatorNotAllowed(msg.sender);
            }
        }
        _;
    }
    modifier onlyAllowedOperatorApproval(address operator) virtual {
        // Check registry code length to facilitate testing in environments without a deployed registry.
        if (address(operatorFilterRegistry).code.length > 0) {
            if (!operatorFilterRegistry.isOperatorAllowed(address(this), operator)) {
                revert OperatorNotAllowed(operator);
            }
        }
        _;
    }
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.7.0) (access/Ownable.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
import "../utils/Context.sol";
/**
 * @dev Contract module which provides a basic access control mechanism, where
 * there is an account (an owner) that can be granted exclusive access to
 * specific functions.
 *
 * By default, the owner account will be the one that deploys the contract. This
 * can later be changed with {transferOwnership}.
 *
 * This module is used through inheritance. It will make available the modifier
 * `onlyOwner`, which can be applied to your functions to restrict their use to
 * the owner.
 */
abstract contract Ownable is Context {
    address private _owner;
    event OwnershipTransferred(address indexed previousOwner, address indexed newOwner);
    /**
     * @dev Initializes the contract setting the deployer as the initial owner.
     */
    constructor() {
        _transferOwnership(_msgSender());
    }
    /**
     * @dev Throws if called by any account other than the owner.
     */
    modifier onlyOwner() {
        _checkOwner();
        _;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the address of the current owner.
     */
    function owner() public view virtual returns (address) {
        return _owner;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Throws if the sender is not the owner.
     */
    function _checkOwner() internal view virtual {
        require(owner() == _msgSender(), "Ownable: caller is not the owner");
    }
    /**
     * @dev Leaves the contract without owner. It will not be possible to call
     * `onlyOwner` functions anymore. Can only be called by the current owner.
     *
     * NOTE: Renouncing ownership will leave the contract without an owner,
     * thereby removing any functionality that is only available to the owner.
     */
    function renounceOwnership() public virtual onlyOwner {
        _transferOwnership(address(0));
    }
    /**
     * @dev Transfers ownership of the contract to a new account (`newOwner`).
     * Can only be called by the current owner.
     */
    function transferOwnership(address newOwner) public virtual onlyOwner {
        require(newOwner != address(0), "Ownable: new owner is the zero address");
        _transferOwnership(newOwner);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Transfers ownership of the contract to a new account (`newOwner`).
     * Internal function without access restriction.
     */
    function _transferOwnership(address newOwner) internal virtual {
        address oldOwner = _owner;
        _owner = newOwner;
        emit OwnershipTransferred(oldOwner, newOwner);
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts v4.4.1 (utils/Context.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/**
 * @dev Provides information about the current execution context, including the
 * sender of the transaction and its data. While these are generally available
 * via msg.sender and msg.data, they should not be accessed in such a direct
 * manner, since when dealing with meta-transactions the account sending and
 * paying for execution may not be the actual sender (as far as an application
 * is concerned).
 *
 * This contract is only required for intermediate, library-like contracts.
 */
abstract contract Context {
    function _msgSender() internal view virtual returns (address) {
        return msg.sender;
    }
    function _msgData() internal view virtual returns (bytes calldata) {
        return msg.data;
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.7.0) (utils/structs/EnumerableSet.sol)
// This file was procedurally generated from scripts/generate/templates/EnumerableSet.js.
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/**
 * @dev Library for managing
 * https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Set_(abstract_data_type)[sets] of primitive
 * types.
 *
 * Sets have the following properties:
 *
 * - Elements are added, removed, and checked for existence in constant time
 * (O(1)).
 * - Elements are enumerated in O(n). No guarantees are made on the ordering.
 *
 * ```
 * contract Example {
 *     // Add the library methods
 *     using EnumerableSet for EnumerableSet.AddressSet;
 *
 *     // Declare a set state variable
 *     EnumerableSet.AddressSet private mySet;
 * }
 * ```
 *
 * As of v3.3.0, sets of type `bytes32` (`Bytes32Set`), `address` (`AddressSet`)
 * and `uint256` (`UintSet`) are supported.
 *
 * [WARNING]
 * ====
 * Trying to delete such a structure from storage will likely result in data corruption, rendering the structure
 * unusable.
 * See https://github.com/ethereum/solidity/pull/11843[ethereum/solidity#11843] for more info.
 *
 * In order to clean an EnumerableSet, you can either remove all elements one by one or create a fresh instance using an
 * array of EnumerableSet.
 * ====
 */
library EnumerableSet {
    // To implement this library for multiple types with as little code
    // repetition as possible, we write it in terms of a generic Set type with
    // bytes32 values.
    // The Set implementation uses private functions, and user-facing
    // implementations (such as AddressSet) are just wrappers around the
    // underlying Set.
    // This means that we can only create new EnumerableSets for types that fit
    // in bytes32.
    struct Set {
        // Storage of set values
        bytes32[] _values;
        // Position of the value in the `values` array, plus 1 because index 0
        // means a value is not in the set.
        mapping(bytes32 => uint256) _indexes;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Add a value to a set. O(1).
     *
     * Returns true if the value was added to the set, that is if it was not
     * already present.
     */
    function _add(Set storage set, bytes32 value) private returns (bool) {
        if (!_contains(set, value)) {
            set._values.push(value);
            // The value is stored at length-1, but we add 1 to all indexes
            // and use 0 as a sentinel value
            set._indexes[value] = set._values.length;
            return true;
        } else {
            return false;
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Removes a value from a set. O(1).
     *
     * Returns true if the value was removed from the set, that is if it was
     * present.
     */
    function _remove(Set storage set, bytes32 value) private returns (bool) {
        // We read and store the value's index to prevent multiple reads from the same storage slot
        uint256 valueIndex = set._indexes[value];
        if (valueIndex != 0) {
            // Equivalent to contains(set, value)
            // To delete an element from the _values array in O(1), we swap the element to delete with the last one in
            // the array, and then remove the last element (sometimes called as 'swap and pop').
            // This modifies the order of the array, as noted in {at}.
            uint256 toDeleteIndex = valueIndex - 1;
            uint256 lastIndex = set._values.length - 1;
            if (lastIndex != toDeleteIndex) {
                bytes32 lastValue = set._values[lastIndex];
                // Move the last value to the index where the value to delete is
                set._values[toDeleteIndex] = lastValue;
                // Update the index for the moved value
                set._indexes[lastValue] = valueIndex; // Replace lastValue's index to valueIndex
            }
            // Delete the slot where the moved value was stored
            set._values.pop();
            // Delete the index for the deleted slot
            delete set._indexes[value];
            return true;
        } else {
            return false;
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns true if the value is in the set. O(1).
     */
    function _contains(Set storage set, bytes32 value) private view returns (bool) {
        return set._indexes[value] != 0;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the number of values on the set. O(1).
     */
    function _length(Set storage set) private view returns (uint256) {
        return set._values.length;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the value stored at position `index` in the set. O(1).
     *
     * Note that there are no guarantees on the ordering of values inside the
     * array, and it may change when more values are added or removed.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `index` must be strictly less than {length}.
     */
    function _at(Set storage set, uint256 index) private view returns (bytes32) {
        return set._values[index];
    }
    /**
     * @dev Return the entire set in an array
     *
     * WARNING: This operation will copy the entire storage to memory, which can be quite expensive. This is designed
     * to mostly be used by view accessors that are queried without any gas fees. Developers should keep in mind that
     * this function has an unbounded cost, and using it as part of a state-changing function may render the function
     * uncallable if the set grows to a point where copying to memory consumes too much gas to fit in a block.
     */
    function _values(Set storage set) private view returns (bytes32[] memory) {
        return set._values;
    }
    // Bytes32Set
    struct Bytes32Set {
        Set _inner;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Add a value to a set. O(1).
     *
     * Returns true if the value was added to the set, that is if it was not
     * already present.
     */
    function add(Bytes32Set storage set, bytes32 value) internal returns (bool) {
        return _add(set._inner, value);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Removes a value from a set. O(1).
     *
     * Returns true if the value was removed from the set, that is if it was
     * present.
     */
    function remove(Bytes32Set storage set, bytes32 value) internal returns (bool) {
        return _remove(set._inner, value);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns true if the value is in the set. O(1).
     */
    function contains(Bytes32Set storage set, bytes32 value) internal view returns (bool) {
        return _contains(set._inner, value);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the number of values in the set. O(1).
     */
    function length(Bytes32Set storage set) internal view returns (uint256) {
        return _length(set._inner);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the value stored at position `index` in the set. O(1).
     *
     * Note that there are no guarantees on the ordering of values inside the
     * array, and it may change when more values are added or removed.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `index` must be strictly less than {length}.
     */
    function at(Bytes32Set storage set, uint256 index) internal view returns (bytes32) {
        return _at(set._inner, index);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Return the entire set in an array
     *
     * WARNING: This operation will copy the entire storage to memory, which can be quite expensive. This is designed
     * to mostly be used by view accessors that are queried without any gas fees. Developers should keep in mind that
     * this function has an unbounded cost, and using it as part of a state-changing function may render the function
     * uncallable if the set grows to a point where copying to memory consumes too much gas to fit in a block.
     */
    function values(Bytes32Set storage set) internal view returns (bytes32[] memory) {
        bytes32[] memory store = _values(set._inner);
        bytes32[] memory result;
        /// @solidity memory-safe-assembly
        assembly {
            result := store
        }
        return result;
    }
    // AddressSet
    struct AddressSet {
        Set _inner;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Add a value to a set. O(1).
     *
     * Returns true if the value was added to the set, that is if it was not
     * already present.
     */
    function add(AddressSet storage set, address value) internal returns (bool) {
        return _add(set._inner, bytes32(uint256(uint160(value))));
    }
    /**
     * @dev Removes a value from a set. O(1).
     *
     * Returns true if the value was removed from the set, that is if it was
     * present.
     */
    function remove(AddressSet storage set, address value) internal returns (bool) {
        return _remove(set._inner, bytes32(uint256(uint160(value))));
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns true if the value is in the set. O(1).
     */
    function contains(AddressSet storage set, address value) internal view returns (bool) {
        return _contains(set._inner, bytes32(uint256(uint160(value))));
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the number of values in the set. O(1).
     */
    function length(AddressSet storage set) internal view returns (uint256) {
        return _length(set._inner);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the value stored at position `index` in the set. O(1).
     *
     * Note that there are no guarantees on the ordering of values inside the
     * array, and it may change when more values are added or removed.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `index` must be strictly less than {length}.
     */
    function at(AddressSet storage set, uint256 index) internal view returns (address) {
        return address(uint160(uint256(_at(set._inner, index))));
    }
    /**
     * @dev Return the entire set in an array
     *
     * WARNING: This operation will copy the entire storage to memory, which can be quite expensive. This is designed
     * to mostly be used by view accessors that are queried without any gas fees. Developers should keep in mind that
     * this function has an unbounded cost, and using it as part of a state-changing function may render the function
     * uncallable if the set grows to a point where copying to memory consumes too much gas to fit in a block.
     */
    function values(AddressSet storage set) internal view returns (address[] memory) {
        bytes32[] memory store = _values(set._inner);
        address[] memory result;
        /// @solidity memory-safe-assembly
        assembly {
            result := store
        }
        return result;
    }
    // UintSet
    struct UintSet {
        Set _inner;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Add a value to a set. O(1).
     *
     * Returns true if the value was added to the set, that is if it was not
     * already present.
     */
    function add(UintSet storage set, uint256 value) internal returns (bool) {
        return _add(set._inner, bytes32(value));
    }
    /**
     * @dev Removes a value from a set. O(1).
     *
     * Returns true if the value was removed from the set, that is if it was
     * present.
     */
    function remove(UintSet storage set, uint256 value) internal returns (bool) {
        return _remove(set._inner, bytes32(value));
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns true if the value is in the set. O(1).
     */
    function contains(UintSet storage set, uint256 value) internal view returns (bool) {
        return _contains(set._inner, bytes32(value));
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the number of values in the set. O(1).
     */
    function length(UintSet storage set) internal view returns (uint256) {
        return _length(set._inner);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the value stored at position `index` in the set. O(1).
     *
     * Note that there are no guarantees on the ordering of values inside the
     * array, and it may change when more values are added or removed.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `index` must be strictly less than {length}.
     */
    function at(UintSet storage set, uint256 index) internal view returns (uint256) {
        return uint256(_at(set._inner, index));
    }
    /**
     * @dev Return the entire set in an array
     *
     * WARNING: This operation will copy the entire storage to memory, which can be quite expensive. This is designed
     * to mostly be used by view accessors that are queried without any gas fees. Developers should keep in mind that
     * this function has an unbounded cost, and using it as part of a state-changing function may render the function
     * uncallable if the set grows to a point where copying to memory consumes too much gas to fit in a block.
     */
    function values(UintSet storage set) internal view returns (uint256[] memory) {
        bytes32[] memory store = _values(set._inner);
        uint256[] memory result;
        /// @solidity memory-safe-assembly
        assembly {
            result := store
        }
        return result;
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.13;
import {EnumerableSet} from "openzeppelin-contracts/utils/structs/EnumerableSet.sol";
interface IOperatorFilterRegistry {
    function isOperatorAllowed(address registrant, address operator) external returns (bool);
    function register(address registrant) external;
    function registerAndSubscribe(address registrant, address subscription) external;
    function registerAndCopyEntries(address registrant, address registrantToCopy) external;
    function updateOperator(address registrant, address operator, bool filtered) external;
    function updateOperators(address registrant, address[] calldata operators, bool filtered) external;
    function updateCodeHash(address registrant, bytes32 codehash, bool filtered) external;
    function updateCodeHashes(address registrant, bytes32[] calldata codeHashes, bool filtered) external;
    function subscribe(address registrant, address registrantToSubscribe) external;
    function unsubscribe(address registrant, bool copyExistingEntries) external;
    function subscriptionOf(address addr) external returns (address registrant);
    function subscribers(address registrant) external returns (address[] memory);
    function subscriberAt(address registrant, uint256 index) external returns (address);
    function copyEntriesOf(address registrant, address registrantToCopy) external;
    function isOperatorFiltered(address registrant, address operator) external returns (bool);
    function isCodeHashOfFiltered(address registrant, address operatorWithCode) external returns (bool);
    function isCodeHashFiltered(address registrant, bytes32 codeHash) external returns (bool);
    function filteredOperators(address addr) external returns (address[] memory);
    function filteredCodeHashes(address addr) external returns (bytes32[] memory);
    function filteredOperatorAt(address registrant, uint256 index) external returns (address);
    function filteredCodeHashAt(address registrant, uint256 index) external returns (bytes32);
    function isRegistered(address addr) external returns (bool);
    function codeHashOf(address addr) external returns (bytes32);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.13;
import {IOperatorFilterRegistry} from "./IOperatorFilterRegistry.sol";
import {Ownable} from "openzeppelin-contracts/access/Ownable.sol";
import {EnumerableSet} from "openzeppelin-contracts/utils/structs/EnumerableSet.sol";
import {OperatorFilterRegistryErrorsAndEvents} from "./OperatorFilterRegistryErrorsAndEvents.sol";
/**
 * @title  OperatorFilterRegistry
 * @notice Borrows heavily from the QQL BlacklistOperatorFilter contract:
 *         https://github.com/qql-art/contracts/blob/main/contracts/BlacklistOperatorFilter.sol
 * @notice This contracts allows tokens or token owners to register specific addresses or codeHashes that may be
 * *       restricted according to the isOperatorAllowed function.
 */
contract OperatorFilterRegistry is IOperatorFilterRegistry, OperatorFilterRegistryErrorsAndEvents {
    using EnumerableSet for EnumerableSet.AddressSet;
    using EnumerableSet for EnumerableSet.Bytes32Set;
    /// @dev initialized accounts have a nonzero codehash (see https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-1052)
    /// Note that this will also be a smart contract's codehash when making calls from its constructor.
    bytes32 constant EOA_CODEHASH = keccak256("");
    mapping(address => EnumerableSet.AddressSet) private _filteredOperators;
    mapping(address => EnumerableSet.Bytes32Set) private _filteredCodeHashes;
    mapping(address => address) private _registrations;
    mapping(address => EnumerableSet.AddressSet) private _subscribers;
    /**
     * @notice restricts method caller to the address or EIP-173 "owner()"
     */
    modifier onlyAddressOrOwner(address addr) {
        if (msg.sender != addr) {
            try Ownable(addr).owner() returns (address owner) {
                if (msg.sender != owner) {
                    revert OnlyAddressOrOwner();
                }
            } catch (bytes memory reason) {
                if (reason.length == 0) {
                    revert NotOwnable();
                } else {
                    /// @solidity memory-safe-assembly
                    assembly {
                        revert(add(32, reason), mload(reason))
                    }
                }
            }
        }
        _;
    }
    /**
     * @notice Returns true if operator is not filtered for a given token, either by address or codeHash. Also returns
     *         true if supplied registrant address is not registered.
     */
    function isOperatorAllowed(address registrant, address operator) external view returns (bool) {
        address registration = _registrations[registrant];
        if (registration != address(0)) {
            EnumerableSet.AddressSet storage filteredOperatorsRef;
            EnumerableSet.Bytes32Set storage filteredCodeHashesRef;
            filteredOperatorsRef = _filteredOperators[registration];
            filteredCodeHashesRef = _filteredCodeHashes[registration];
            if (filteredOperatorsRef.contains(operator)) {
                revert AddressFiltered(operator);
            }
            if (operator.code.length > 0) {
                bytes32 codeHash = operator.codehash;
                if (filteredCodeHashesRef.contains(codeHash)) {
                    revert CodeHashFiltered(operator, codeHash);
                }
            }
        }
        return true;
    }
    //////////////////
    // AUTH METHODS //
    //////////////////
    /**
     * @notice Registers an address with the registry. May be called by address itself or by EIP-173 owner.
     */
    function register(address registrant) external onlyAddressOrOwner(registrant) {
        if (_registrations[registrant] != address(0)) {
            revert AlreadyRegistered();
        }
        _registrations[registrant] = registrant;
        emit RegistrationUpdated(registrant, true);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Unregisters an address with the registry and removes its subscription. May be called by address itself or by EIP-173 owner.
     *         Note that this does not remove any filtered addresses or codeHashes.
     *         Also note that any subscriptions to this registrant will still be active and follow the existing filtered addresses and codehashes.
     */
    function unregister(address registrant) external onlyAddressOrOwner(registrant) {
        address registration = _registrations[registrant];
        if (registration == address(0)) {
            revert NotRegistered(registrant);
        }
        if (registration != registrant) {
            _subscribers[registration].remove(registrant);
            emit SubscriptionUpdated(registrant, registration, false);
        }
        _registrations[registrant] = address(0);
        emit RegistrationUpdated(registrant, false);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Registers an address with the registry and "subscribes" to another address's filtered operators and codeHashes.
     */
    function registerAndSubscribe(address registrant, address subscription) external onlyAddressOrOwner(registrant) {
        address registration = _registrations[registrant];
        if (registration != address(0)) {
            revert AlreadyRegistered();
        }
        if (registrant == subscription) {
            revert CannotSubscribeToSelf();
        }
        address subscriptionRegistration = _registrations[subscription];
        if (subscriptionRegistration == address(0)) {
            revert NotRegistered(subscription);
        }
        if (subscriptionRegistration != subscription) {
            revert CannotSubscribeToRegistrantWithSubscription(subscription);
        }
        _registrations[registrant] = subscription;
        _subscribers[subscription].add(registrant);
        emit RegistrationUpdated(registrant, true);
        emit SubscriptionUpdated(registrant, subscription, true);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Registers an address with the registry and copies the filtered operators and codeHashes from another
     *         address without subscribing.
     */
    function registerAndCopyEntries(address registrant, address registrantToCopy)
        external
        onlyAddressOrOwner(registrant)
    {
        if (registrantToCopy == registrant) {
            revert CannotCopyFromSelf();
        }
        address registration = _registrations[registrant];
        if (registration != address(0)) {
            revert AlreadyRegistered();
        }
        address registrantRegistration = _registrations[registrantToCopy];
        if (registrantRegistration == address(0)) {
            revert NotRegistered(registrantToCopy);
        }
        _registrations[registrant] = registrant;
        emit RegistrationUpdated(registrant, true);
        _copyEntries(registrant, registrantToCopy);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Update an operator address for a registered address - when filtered is true, the operator is filtered.
     */
    function updateOperator(address registrant, address operator, bool filtered)
        external
        onlyAddressOrOwner(registrant)
    {
        address registration = _registrations[registrant];
        if (registration == address(0)) {
            revert NotRegistered(registrant);
        }
        if (registration != registrant) {
            revert CannotUpdateWhileSubscribed(registration);
        }
        EnumerableSet.AddressSet storage filteredOperatorsRef = _filteredOperators[registrant];
        if (!filtered) {
            bool removed = filteredOperatorsRef.remove(operator);
            if (!removed) {
                revert AddressNotFiltered(operator);
            }
        } else {
            bool added = filteredOperatorsRef.add(operator);
            if (!added) {
                revert AddressAlreadyFiltered(operator);
            }
        }
        emit OperatorUpdated(registrant, operator, filtered);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Update a codeHash for a registered address - when filtered is true, the codeHash is filtered.
     */
    function updateCodeHash(address registrant, bytes32 codeHash, bool filtered)
        external
        onlyAddressOrOwner(registrant)
    {
        if (codeHash == EOA_CODEHASH) {
            revert CannotFilterEOAs();
        }
        address registration = _registrations[registrant];
        if (registration == address(0)) {
            revert NotRegistered(registrant);
        }
        if (registration != registrant) {
            revert CannotUpdateWhileSubscribed(registration);
        }
        EnumerableSet.Bytes32Set storage filteredCodeHashesRef = _filteredCodeHashes[registrant];
        if (!filtered) {
            bool removed = filteredCodeHashesRef.remove(codeHash);
            if (!removed) {
                revert CodeHashNotFiltered(codeHash);
            }
        } else {
            bool added = filteredCodeHashesRef.add(codeHash);
            if (!added) {
                revert CodeHashAlreadyFiltered(codeHash);
            }
        }
        emit CodeHashUpdated(registrant, codeHash, filtered);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Update multiple operators for a registered address - when filtered is true, the operators will be filtered. Reverts on duplicates.
     */
    function updateOperators(address registrant, address[] calldata operators, bool filtered)
        external
        onlyAddressOrOwner(registrant)
    {
        address registration = _registrations[registrant];
        if (registration == address(0)) {
            revert NotRegistered(registrant);
        }
        if (registration != registrant) {
            revert CannotUpdateWhileSubscribed(registration);
        }
        EnumerableSet.AddressSet storage filteredOperatorsRef = _filteredOperators[registrant];
        uint256 operatorsLength = operators.length;
        unchecked {
            if (!filtered) {
                for (uint256 i = 0; i < operatorsLength; ++i) {
                    address operator = operators[i];
                    bool removed = filteredOperatorsRef.remove(operator);
                    if (!removed) {
                        revert AddressNotFiltered(operator);
                    }
                }
            } else {
                for (uint256 i = 0; i < operatorsLength; ++i) {
                    address operator = operators[i];
                    bool added = filteredOperatorsRef.add(operator);
                    if (!added) {
                        revert AddressAlreadyFiltered(operator);
                    }
                }
            }
        }
        emit OperatorsUpdated(registrant, operators, filtered);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Update multiple codeHashes for a registered address - when filtered is true, the codeHashes will be filtered. Reverts on duplicates.
     */
    function updateCodeHashes(address registrant, bytes32[] calldata codeHashes, bool filtered)
        external
        onlyAddressOrOwner(registrant)
    {
        address registration = _registrations[registrant];
        if (registration == address(0)) {
            revert NotRegistered(registrant);
        }
        if (registration != registrant) {
            revert CannotUpdateWhileSubscribed(registration);
        }
        EnumerableSet.Bytes32Set storage filteredCodeHashesRef = _filteredCodeHashes[registrant];
        uint256 codeHashesLength = codeHashes.length;
        unchecked {
            if (!filtered) {
                for (uint256 i = 0; i < codeHashesLength; ++i) {
                    bytes32 codeHash = codeHashes[i];
                    bool removed = filteredCodeHashesRef.remove(codeHash);
                    if (!removed) {
                        revert CodeHashNotFiltered(codeHash);
                    }
                }
            } else {
                for (uint256 i = 0; i < codeHashesLength; ++i) {
                    bytes32 codeHash = codeHashes[i];
                    if (codeHash == EOA_CODEHASH) {
                        revert CannotFilterEOAs();
                    }
                    bool added = filteredCodeHashesRef.add(codeHash);
                    if (!added) {
                        revert CodeHashAlreadyFiltered(codeHash);
                    }
                }
            }
        }
        emit CodeHashesUpdated(registrant, codeHashes, filtered);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Subscribe an address to another registrant's filtered operators and codeHashes. Will remove previous
     *         subscription if present.
     *         Note that accounts with subscriptions may go on to subscribe to other accounts - in this case,
     *         subscriptions will not be forwarded. Instead the former subscription's existing entries will still be
     *         used.
     */
    function subscribe(address registrant, address newSubscription) external onlyAddressOrOwner(registrant) {
        if (registrant == newSubscription) {
            revert CannotSubscribeToSelf();
        }
        if (newSubscription == address(0)) {
            revert CannotSubscribeToZeroAddress();
        }
        address registration = _registrations[registrant];
        if (registration == address(0)) {
            revert NotRegistered(registrant);
        }
        if (registration == newSubscription) {
            revert AlreadySubscribed(newSubscription);
        }
        address newSubscriptionRegistration = _registrations[newSubscription];
        if (newSubscriptionRegistration == address(0)) {
            revert NotRegistered(newSubscription);
        }
        if (newSubscriptionRegistration != newSubscription) {
            revert CannotSubscribeToRegistrantWithSubscription(newSubscription);
        }
        if (registration != registrant) {
            _subscribers[registration].remove(registrant);
            emit SubscriptionUpdated(registrant, registration, false);
        }
        _registrations[registrant] = newSubscription;
        _subscribers[newSubscription].add(registrant);
        emit SubscriptionUpdated(registrant, newSubscription, true);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Unsubscribe an address from its current subscribed registrant, and optionally copy its filtered operators and codeHashes.
     */
    function unsubscribe(address registrant, bool copyExistingEntries) external onlyAddressOrOwner(registrant) {
        address registration = _registrations[registrant];
        if (registration == address(0)) {
            revert NotRegistered(registrant);
        }
        if (registration == registrant) {
            revert NotSubscribed();
        }
        _subscribers[registration].remove(registrant);
        _registrations[registrant] = registrant;
        emit SubscriptionUpdated(registrant, registration, false);
        if (copyExistingEntries) {
            _copyEntries(registrant, registration);
        }
    }
    /**
     * @notice Copy filtered operators and codeHashes from a different registrantToCopy to addr.
     */
    function copyEntriesOf(address registrant, address registrantToCopy) external onlyAddressOrOwner(registrant) {
        if (registrant == registrantToCopy) {
            revert CannotCopyFromSelf();
        }
        address registration = _registrations[registrant];
        if (registration == address(0)) {
            revert NotRegistered(registrant);
        }
        if (registration != registrant) {
            revert CannotUpdateWhileSubscribed(registration);
        }
        address registrantRegistration = _registrations[registrantToCopy];
        if (registrantRegistration == address(0)) {
            revert NotRegistered(registrantToCopy);
        }
        _copyEntries(registrant, registrantToCopy);
    }
    /// @dev helper to copy entries from registrantToCopy to registrant and emit events
    function _copyEntries(address registrant, address registrantToCopy) private {
        EnumerableSet.AddressSet storage filteredOperatorsRef = _filteredOperators[registrantToCopy];
        EnumerableSet.Bytes32Set storage filteredCodeHashesRef = _filteredCodeHashes[registrantToCopy];
        uint256 filteredOperatorsLength = filteredOperatorsRef.length();
        uint256 filteredCodeHashesLength = filteredCodeHashesRef.length();
        unchecked {
            for (uint256 i = 0; i < filteredOperatorsLength; ++i) {
                address operator = filteredOperatorsRef.at(i);
                bool added = _filteredOperators[registrant].add(operator);
                if (added) {
                    emit OperatorUpdated(registrant, operator, true);
                }
            }
            for (uint256 i = 0; i < filteredCodeHashesLength; ++i) {
                bytes32 codehash = filteredCodeHashesRef.at(i);
                bool added = _filteredCodeHashes[registrant].add(codehash);
                if (added) {
                    emit CodeHashUpdated(registrant, codehash, true);
                }
            }
        }
    }
    //////////////////
    // VIEW METHODS //
    //////////////////
    /**
     * @notice Get the subscription address of a given registrant, if any.
     */
    function subscriptionOf(address registrant) external view returns (address subscription) {
        subscription = _registrations[registrant];
        if (subscription == address(0)) {
            revert NotRegistered(registrant);
        } else if (subscription == registrant) {
            subscription = address(0);
        }
    }
    /**
     * @notice Get the set of addresses subscribed to a given registrant.
     *         Note that order is not guaranteed as updates are made.
     */
    function subscribers(address registrant) external view returns (address[] memory) {
        return _subscribers[registrant].values();
    }
    /**
     * @notice Get the subscriber at a given index in the set of addresses subscribed to a given registrant.
     *         Note that order is not guaranteed as updates are made.
     */
    function subscriberAt(address registrant, uint256 index) external view returns (address) {
        return _subscribers[registrant].at(index);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Returns true if operator is filtered by a given address or its subscription.
     */
    function isOperatorFiltered(address registrant, address operator) external view returns (bool) {
        address registration = _registrations[registrant];
        if (registration != registrant) {
            return _filteredOperators[registration].contains(operator);
        }
        return _filteredOperators[registrant].contains(operator);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Returns true if a codeHash is filtered by a given address or its subscription.
     */
    function isCodeHashFiltered(address registrant, bytes32 codeHash) external view returns (bool) {
        address registration = _registrations[registrant];
        if (registration != registrant) {
            return _filteredCodeHashes[registration].contains(codeHash);
        }
        return _filteredCodeHashes[registrant].contains(codeHash);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Returns true if the hash of an address's code is filtered by a given address or its subscription.
     */
    function isCodeHashOfFiltered(address registrant, address operatorWithCode) external view returns (bool) {
        bytes32 codeHash = operatorWithCode.codehash;
        address registration = _registrations[registrant];
        if (registration != registrant) {
            return _filteredCodeHashes[registration].contains(codeHash);
        }
        return _filteredCodeHashes[registrant].contains(codeHash);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Returns true if an address has registered
     */
    function isRegistered(address registrant) external view returns (bool) {
        return _registrations[registrant] != address(0);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Returns a list of filtered operators for a given address or its subscription.
     */
    function filteredOperators(address registrant) external view returns (address[] memory) {
        address registration = _registrations[registrant];
        if (registration != registrant) {
            return _filteredOperators[registration].values();
        }
        return _filteredOperators[registrant].values();
    }
    /**
     * @notice Returns the set of filtered codeHashes for a given address or its subscription.
     *         Note that order is not guaranteed as updates are made.
     */
    function filteredCodeHashes(address registrant) external view returns (bytes32[] memory) {
        address registration = _registrations[registrant];
        if (registration != registrant) {
            return _filteredCodeHashes[registration].values();
        }
        return _filteredCodeHashes[registrant].values();
    }
    /**
     * @notice Returns the filtered operator at the given index of the set of filtered operators for a given address or
     *         its subscription.
     *         Note that order is not guaranteed as updates are made.
     */
    function filteredOperatorAt(address registrant, uint256 index) external view returns (address) {
        address registration = _registrations[registrant];
        if (registration != registrant) {
            return _filteredOperators[registration].at(index);
        }
        return _filteredOperators[registrant].at(index);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Returns the filtered codeHash at the given index of the list of filtered codeHashes for a given address or
     *         its subscription.
     *         Note that order is not guaranteed as updates are made.
     */
    function filteredCodeHashAt(address registrant, uint256 index) external view returns (bytes32) {
        address registration = _registrations[registrant];
        if (registration != registrant) {
            return _filteredCodeHashes[registration].at(index);
        }
        return _filteredCodeHashes[registrant].at(index);
    }
    /// @dev Convenience method to compute the code hash of an arbitrary contract
    function codeHashOf(address a) external view returns (bytes32) {
        return a.codehash;
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.13;
contract OperatorFilterRegistryErrorsAndEvents {
    error CannotFilterEOAs();
    error AddressAlreadyFiltered(address operator);
    error AddressNotFiltered(address operator);
    error CodeHashAlreadyFiltered(bytes32 codeHash);
    error CodeHashNotFiltered(bytes32 codeHash);
    error OnlyAddressOrOwner();
    error NotRegistered(address registrant);
    error AlreadyRegistered();
    error AlreadySubscribed(address subscription);
    error NotSubscribed();
    error CannotUpdateWhileSubscribed(address subscription);
    error CannotSubscribeToSelf();
    error CannotSubscribeToZeroAddress();
    error NotOwnable();
    error AddressFiltered(address filtered);
    error CodeHashFiltered(address account, bytes32 codeHash);
    error CannotSubscribeToRegistrantWithSubscription(address registrant);
    error CannotCopyFromSelf();
    event RegistrationUpdated(address indexed registrant, bool indexed registered);
    event OperatorUpdated(address indexed registrant, address indexed operator, bool indexed filtered);
    event OperatorsUpdated(address indexed registrant, address[] operators, bool indexed filtered);
    event CodeHashUpdated(address indexed registrant, bytes32 indexed codeHash, bool indexed filtered);
    event CodeHashesUpdated(address indexed registrant, bytes32[] codeHashes, bool indexed filtered);
    event SubscriptionUpdated(address indexed registrant, address indexed subscription, bool indexed subscribed);
}